Home

- IBM Redbooks

1. QGPL QSQCLIPKG Object type CRTSQL PGM QGPL QSQCLIPKG SRCFILE SRCMBR COMMIT CHG OPTION SQL PERIOD TGTRLS PRV ALWCPYDTA OPTIMIZE CLOSQLCSR ENDPGM RDB NONE DATFMT ISO TIMFMT ISO ALWBLK ALLREAD DLYPRP NO DYNUSRPRF USER SRTSEQ HEX LANGID RDBCNNMTH RUW TEXT DECLARE SQLCURSORO00000001 CURSOR FOR SQLSTATEMENTO00001 Figure 58 Contents of QGPL QSQCLIPKG 141 Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 142 e rr Naming Mode Considerations If you set the DTW_SQL_NAMING_MODE to conflict with the naming mode in an existing QGPL QSQCLIPKG on a remote AS 400 system the SQL statement in the Web macro ends with an SQLCODE of 5016 To avoid this select a naming mode and stick with it If the object QGPL QSQCLIPKG conflicts with the naming mode you have chosen delete it and issue the Net Data request again A new QGPL QSQCLIPKG is created with the naming mode option you require Concurrent connections to the same remote database are not allowed If a connection exists to a remote database using one user ID the LOGIN SQL language environment parameter and another request is made to connect to the same remote database using a second user ID the SQL language environment must first disconnect the existing connection do a commit and reestablish the connection using the new user ID and password The reason that the commit is required is that if th
2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Evaluate mail of cust buff when E move We will contact you via E mail to ws message when S move We will contact you via Surface Mail to ws message when P move We will contact you via phone to ws message end evaluate MOVE LENGTH OF WS output message TO WSR LEN OUT CALL procedure QtmhWrStout USING WS output message WSR LEN OUT QUS EC MOVE LENGTH OF WS STANDARD TRAILER TO WSR LEN OUT CALL procedure QtmhWrStout USING WS STANDARD TRAILER WSR LEN OUT QUS EC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Point to the Database file in the WEBDB Library Open the database file Write the data that the user entered to the Database File Close the database file Delete the Override XXX HF E F kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk MOVE LENGTH OF ws ovrdbf cmd to ws cmd len CALL QCMDEXC using ws ovrdbf cmd ws cmd len OPEN extend custinf MOVE cust buff to custinf record write custinf record Close custinf MOVE LENGTH OF ws dltovr cmd to ws cmd len call QCMDEXC using ws dltovr cmd ws cmd len EXIT DONE GOBACK 260 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet A 3 HTML Input Form for CUSTINFO lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt title gt Get Customer Feedback lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt FORM METHOD post
3. Copyright IBM Corp 1997 xiii xiv Paul E Hampton is an AS 400 Evangelist in the USA He has 20 years of experience working with IBM customers and clients with S 36 S 38 and AS 400 Communications and Performance During the last two years he has helped several clients plan and execute successful AS 400 intranets and Internets Gottfried Schimunek is an IBM Chief Systems Engineer for the AS 400 system in Germany He has more than 25 years of experience in the area of DP and IT systems especially on IBM System 3x System 38 and the AS 400 system His areas of interest and expertise include AS 400 Architecture System and Application Performance and Internet Connection He coauthored books about AS 400 Performance Management Capacity Planning Client Server Performance and SAP R 3 Fernando R Zuliani is an AS 400 Certified I T Specialist in the ITSO Rochester He has 10 years of experience in the I T field He has worked at IBM for 9 years His areas of expertise include OS 400 Client Server VisualAge Generator Application Development and Performance He holds a master s degree in Mathematics from the University of Sao Paulo Brazil Thanks to the following people for their invaluable contributions to this project Allan E Johnson Systems Performance AS 400 Development IBM Rochester Bill C Rapp Internet Technologies AS 400 Development IBM Rochester Brian R Smith AS 400 Communications ITSO Rocheste
4. local message block inside a FUNCTION block FUNCTION DTW_REXX my_function EXEC my_command cmd MESSAGE 100 return code 100 message exit 100 return code 100 message continue default This is a second long message that spans more than one line You can use HTML tags including anchors and forms in this message exit 9 9 o o Figure 55 Message Block Macro If my_function returns with RETURN_CODE set to 50 Net Data processes in this order 1 Check for an exact match in the local MESSAGE block There is none Check for a default in the local MESSAGE block There is none Check for a default in the local MESSAGE block There is none Check for an exact match in the global MESSAGE block There is none Check for a default in the global MESSAGE block There is one Cie pe diD Now that Net Data found a match it sends the message text to the Web browser and checks the requested action Because continue is specified Net Data continues to process the Web macro after printing the message text For example if error 100 is found during processing with the MESSAGE block in the example output from a program can look similar to this 11 November 1996 245 45 13 November 1996 623 23 19 November 1996 83 02 return code 100 message 22 November 1996 42 67 Total 994 37 138 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 4 6 Langu
5. 247 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway 265 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Tables Du 901 NT n A ee OP OV CON SO Copyright IBM Corp 1997 HTML Main Elements 2 0000200002250 HELME Form Tags 2 46 28 LA 44 4008 beth dea DA dbs OM ee oa dew CGI Environment Variables in the QTMHENVI Index File The APIs Provided for ILE RPG ILE COBOL and C Programs Get Environment Variable QtmhGetEnv API Read from Stdin QtmhRdStin API Write from Stdout QtmhWrStout API Convert to DB QtmhCvtDb API Overview Programs HTMLFILE INPUT Net Data Function Definitions Net Data Calling Functions Net Data REPORT Block Net Data REXX Language Environment Variables Net Data SYSTEM Language Environment Variables Message Block Definitions User Exit Program Extensions xi xii Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Preface This redbook is intended to give directions to enable an AS 400 application to the Internet It gives you the necessary information to implement and run the Internet related AS 400 applications using one or a combination of the following available techniques e Common Gateway Interface CGI Bin e Net Data e Workstation Gateway e Java Applets and Java Scripts It is also the intent of this redbook to provide you with a road map of the AS 400 ap
6. 6 Setvardata procedure This procedure puts the content of variable value pairs into arrays that the wrtsection procedure uses later E Names values and lengths arrays for writing standard output Used in setvardata subroutine and wrtsection function Dsection S 10 Dvarnm S 10 dim 50 Dvarval S 500 dim 50 Dvarln S 5I 0 dim 50 Dv1 S 5i 0 Setup data for writing standard output C exsr setvardata kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Setvardata Sets values of variable names contents lengths kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk C setvardata begsr C eval vl 1 c eval varnm v1 NAME c eval varval v1 name c ar checkr varval v1 varln v1 Cc eval vl vl 1 I Wrtsection procedure At the end the wrtsection subroutine uses the variables that have been prepared by the setvardata subroutine and writes sections of HTML Wrtsection scans the delimiters for the sections for example top and the delimiters for the variables for example program in the arrays creates the gethtml subroutine and replaces the variable for the data Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet gt Names values and lengths arrays for writing standard output Used in setvardata subroutine and wrtsection function Dsection S 10 Dvarnm S 10 dim 50 Dvarval S 500 dim 50 Dvarln S 5I 0 dim 50 Dv
7. 4 7 8 Net Data Default Report Net Data gives you the ability to disable the default report The default report is built from text characters Net Data can automatically build HTML tables for you if you include the following in your macro define DTW_HTML_TABLE YES Once this is defined in the macro you can turn the value on or off by including the following statement before the table is to be displayed with this statement DTW_ASSIGN DTW_HTML_TABLE NO or DTW_HTML_TABLE YES In some cases you may want to display your table data using the built in table functions provided by Net Data rather than displaying the table data using a default report These table functions produce select radio list and check box HTML objects from your Net Data table The easiest way not to produce a report is to include a blank report block report within the function define as illustrated in this example which creates a select box where the QUERY1 Mytable causes Net Data to execute the FUNCTION DTW_SQL QUERY1 SQL command m Ofl kkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkko DEFINE SECTION 5 define DATABASE LOCAL TABLE AS0219R BRANDS Mytab e TABLE ALL lui SECTION XXX X FUNCTION DTW_SQL QUERY1 OUT Mytable select from TABLE report soi INPUT SECTION FRREFERE REFERER REA HTML FORM1 lt HTML gt lt h1 gt Net Data Select Box lt h1 gt lt FORM METHOD
8. The most commonly used HTML tags are the headings list anchors or links images and form tags The form tag is used when requesting CGI programs as we shall see in Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation on page 57 and the image tag is as it says used when referring to images or clickable images See Section 2 10 Server Side Imagemap Support on page 30 for more information 2 9 4 Creating Static HTML Pages The best approach is to create all the static HTML pages with a PC tool there are many available on the market check on the Internet and store them when you are finished on the AS 400 system in a folder or even better yet in the Integrated File System IFS For more information about IFS refer to the 2 13 IFS Integrated File System Considerations on page 43 Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 29 2 9 5 Feedback Note For more detailed information about HTML coding and use see http ww ncsa uiuc edu General Internet WW HTMLPrimer htm It is recommended that on your Web site you include an e mail address or point of contact for your company This allows you to gain valuable feedback or provide a means for users to report error conditions For example the following note might appear at the foot of your home page Contact webmaster yoursite com with comments The HTML used in this example is Contact lt A SUBJECT Comment on site home pa
9. 0 9 42 10 26 0 10 42 11 26 Phone Number 7S 00 11 42 14 25 Not found Please press ENTER Last Name DSPATR RI 21 5 FO3 Exit 21 30 Press ENTER to inquiry again Sample 5250 DDS Enhanced with the HTML Tag The plain text is mixed with HTML tags m Important The IMG SRC tag must have a fully qualified URL and the HTTP server must be running for Workstation Gateway to serve images Basically the Workstation Gateway server re directs all links for HTTP type objects such as images to the local server meaning that it has to be running on the same AS 400 system as the Workstation Gateway server Now let s take a look at the display output of the sample DDS with the preceding HTML tags You can see there is a Link Here which corresponds to the HREF in DDS Also a Table Demo is related to the TABLE tags Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Netscape A5 400 Wforksta AS 400 Workstation Gateway IEM Rochester Personnel Inquiry System Please Input Employee Number FOS Exit Figure 90 Link Table and Images Imbedded in DDS If you have installed the sample code from the Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet this display file and the program for it are in the library ITSOIC400 The name of the file is SHTMLD and its source is in the source file QDDSSRC The name of the program is SHTMLR and its source is in QRPGSRC m Note e Usin
10. Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 135 Total records retrieved 2 Net Data generated the report by 1 Printing Phone Query Results once at the beginning of the report 2 Giving the variables V1 V2 and V3 the values for Name Phone and Fax respectively for each row as it is retrieved 3 Drawing a line after each row retrieved to help readability 4 Printing the string Total records retrieved and the value for ROW_NUM once at the end of the report 4 5 1 Message Blocks 136 The MESSAGE block lets you determine how to proceed after a function call based on the success or failure of the function call and lets you display information to the caller of the function Net Data sets RETURN_CODE an implicit variable for each function call RETURN_CODE is set to the return code of the call to the language environment the function calls When the function call is completed the MESSAGE block uses the value of RETURN_CODE to determine how to proceed A MESSAGE block consists of a series of message statements each statement specifying a return code value message text and an action to take The syntax of a MESSAGE block is shown here MESSAGE return_code message text action oe Table 15 Page 1 of 2 Message Block Definitions return_code Any positive or negative number If the RETURN_CODE variable value matches this value the remaining information in the message statement is used to
11. 186 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Phone 2536000 2537001 2534299 2536082 2539976 2536666 25353000 5250 input fields are translated into HTML INPUT tags with the same field If an input field is between 60 and 160 characters long it is shown as an input field with 60 visible characters and a maximum length of the 5250 field size 4 Function key tags recognized in the function key area of the display are added to the menu items at the top of the document 5 4 3 DDS HTML Support The Workstation Gateway support allows the insertion of HTML tags into the DDS of a display file This allows us to utilize the graphic capabilities of a Web browser with only minor changes to the existing DDS For example a customer can add graphics through the IMG HTML tag to an existing display file and display a graphic image along with the display Note These HTML tags are only inserted into the data stream that flows to a terminal if the device query indicates that the device is a PC or more precisely an AS 400 5250 Workstation Gateway virtual terminal Otherwise the HTML tags are ignored for normal displays This simplifies and eases the handling of display files because only one source is needed for Web browsers and green screens 5 4 3 1 The New DDS Keyword There is a new DDS keyword HTML HyperText Markup Language This field level keyword can be treated the same as a usual constant Two thi
12. V3R2 Considerations With the release of V3R2 IBM has introduced the HTML DDS keyword that allows AS 400 applications to embed any HTML tag into the 5250 data steam This method of embedding HTML offers the following advantages e HTML keywords do not occupy any display space You can add HTML anywhere on the display no matter how crowded it is e All HTML tags are supported HTML keywords are not passed to normal green screens or emulation programs m Note One limitation imposed is that HTML keywords cannot be included in subfile records Please refer to the following publications for more information on the HTML DDS keyword AS 400 DDS Reference SC41 3712 01 e AS 400 Application Display Programming SC41 3715 01 Webulator 400 supports the use of the DDS HTML keyword in the same way as Workstation Gateway Further details for the use of the DDS HTML keyword can be found in Section 5 4 3 DDS HTML Support on page 187 However Webulator 400 has some additional configuration items that can further enhance your application 5 7 3 2 Emulating Color and Monochrome Displays The Terminal Color configuration element lets you emulate either a color or monochrome display If you emulate a color display Webulator 400 uses the colors defined in the 5250 data description If you emulate a monochrome display Webulator 400 displays all text in a single color and displays high intensity characters as bold The mon
13. char Password SIZE Password Output char ProgramLib SIZE Library of program to run Output char ProgramName SIZE Program to invoke Output char InitialMenu SIZE Initial menu to invoke Output QAPPO100_I_t EFE R H k eke keke ke e ke ke he de e ke ke he deke e he e e ke ERE KER e ke He ke e ERE KER ke e e e He KIRI IATA k kekek All file scoped Macro invocations go here EFE R H k e ke keke k e ke ke he e e ke ke e e ke ke e e e ke e e e ke ke e AAA e ke e e e e k e e e ke k eke k k eke k k k kekk kekek k EFE R H k eke ke ke e e ke ke he e e ke ke e de ke ke ke e e ke e e e ke He e e e Re He ke e e He ke e e e ke e e e e He e e ke Ke k eko ke k k kekk kekek ke Macro name TRACE L Log test result entry to an output file for workstation gateway x Arguments x Text string of application specific trace data from the calling program y Test results output file pointer x7 sE EFEK H k eke ke ke k e TATA e ke e e de ke IAA AIA AAA AAA RIA RER AREER ERE ER EREREEREREERE define TRACE x y memset file buff BLANK sizeof file_buff sprintf file buff s c x 0 fwrite file buff FWIDTH 1 y A a a EFE R H k eke keke k e ke ke he ERR ke e de ke e e e e ke e e e ke He e e e Re e ke e ERR ER AIA ARIA KIRI AIAR All internal function prototypes go here EFEK H k eke keke k e ke ke he e ke e ke e E
14. e CGI program parameter data passed as part of the URL has portions encoded with escape sequences It is cumbersome for CGI programs to decode these sequences after they have been converted from ASCII to EBCDIC It is difficult for the CGI programs to determine and control what CCSIDs to use when handling ASCII and EBCDIC data Multiple conversions from ASCII to EBCDIC of input and output data presents some performance problems Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 7 2 Java Applet Communicating to CGI Another dimension that can be added to the HTTP CGI model is to make use of Java applets running in the browser that communicate with CGI programs It turns out that the Java virtual machines built into browsers have mechanisms that allow its applets to access HTML documents and CGI programs directly With this model a CGI program may send to a browser HTML that includes a Java applet The Java applet may use HTTP to retrieve additional information from the server such as data stored in a file or output from another CGI program This access is done independently of the browser session but using the HTTP services built into the browser Since the HTTP protocol is being used all of the advantages of HTTP are maintained including its authentication and encryption features No changes are required to standard CGI or persistent CGI programs to support communications with a Java applet With this approach logic can be split be
15. messages are seen Hetscape AS400 W orkst ITSO Company Customer Comment Inquiry Syster Name Vera Small E mail vemalldwww net com Addressl 123 South Center Street Addressz City Rochester state MN zipcode 125456 Country USA Phone 507 2895300 Comment This is only a simple test We can use this to show you how easily you can use Workstation Gateway in the Internet World great for all of the 45 400 customers Press ENTER to inquire again Figure 87 Display of Customer Master Record through Workstation Gateway Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 185 10000 Be oO di oO rooooot mob w wr oOo AS 400 Workstation Gateway IBM Personnel Inquiry System Press ENTER to inquire again First Name Last Name Barry Jones Bernd Lindner Brian Simpson Edward Stewart Bart Hardy Robert Steidle Richard Young Figure 88 Display of Subfile Record through 5250 HTML Gateway 5 4 2 DDS to HTML Conversion The Workstation Gateway formats the 5250 display according to the following basic rules 1 2 The display is shown as 80 column pre formatted text Blank lines are omitted to reduce the vertical size of the display image in the browser length as the 5250 field e If an input field is longer than 160 characters the field is translated into an HTML TEXT area that is 80 columns long and has enough lines to contain all the input text needed
16. 2 9 3 HTML Syntax Let s give you an introduction to the HTML syntax in short terms The HTML language consists of markup tags to identify the elements of the document All tags begin with a left angle bracket lt and end with a right angle bracket gt Almost every tag is a container This means that there is always an opening tag and a closing tag the same as in the head and body Table 1 lists the main HTML elements Table 1 Page 1 of 3 HTML Main Elements Name Opening tag Closing tag Description Anchor lt A gt lt A gt HyperLink to a resource Address lt ADDRESS gt lt ADDRESS gt Format an address Bold lt B gt lt B gt Display test in bold Base lt BASE gt No closing tag Record URL of document Body lt BODY gt lt BODY gt Contain the document s body Blockquote lt BLOCKQUOTE gt lt BLOCKQUOTE gt Include text in quotes Line Break lt BR gt No closing tag Break current line Citation lt CITE gt lt CITE gt Specify a citation Code lt CODE gt lt CODE gt Enclose an example of code Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 27 28 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Table 1 Page 2 of 3 HTML Main Elements Name Opening tag Closing tag Description Definition lt DD gt No closing tag Description of Definition list list item description Directory lt DIR gt lt DIR gt
17. ILE RPG e ILE COBOL e REXX See Section 3 10 Programming CGI with REXX Language on page 93 for considerations and restrictions Necessary APIs are available to support the environment variables the standard input stream and the standard output stream The C language supports the environment variables through the getenv API The standard input stream and the standard output stream are supported through many APIs Examples are fgets and fwrite For the C programs the APIs are found in the QTMHCGI SVCPGM A C language header file member named QTMHCGI is provided in H file in library QSYSINC The APIs to support ILE RPG and ILE COBOL are provided in source files The source files are e QCBLLESRC for ILE COBOL e QRPGLESRC for ILE RPG Four APIs are provided Table 4 The APIs Provided for ILE RPG ILE COBOL and C Programs Type of API ILE RPG ILE COBOL C Language Get Environment QtmhGetEnv QtmhGetEnv getenv Variable Read from Stdin QtmhRdStin QtmhRdStin Many for example fgets Many for Write to Stdout QtmhWrStout QtmhWrStout example fwrite Parse CGI input QtmhCvtDb QtmhCvtDb pragma mapinc Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 73 m Note This for RPG and COBOL For the CRTPGM you must always specify the BNDSRVPGM QTCP QTMHCGI to ensure the module import for QtmhGetEnv QtmhRdStin QtmhWrStout and QtmhCvtDb are satisfied If you forget to include the S
18. REQUEST_METHOD POST printf This script should be referenced with a METHOD of POST n exit 1 if strcmp getenv CONTENT_TYPE application x www form urlencoded printf This script can only be used to decode form results n exit 1 cl atoi getenv CONTENT LENGTH for x 0 cl amp amp feof stdin x Mm X entries x val fmakeword stdin amp amp cl plustospace entries x val unescape_url entries x val entries x name makeword entries x val printf lt html gt n printf lt body gt n printf lt H1 gt Query Results lt H1 gt printf You submitted the following name value pairs lt p gt printf lt ul gt for x 0 x lt m x printf lt 1i gt lt code gt s s lt code gt entries x name entries x val printf lt ul gt printf lt body gt n printf lt html gt n Figure 40 ILE C Program PARSECGIP Method POST Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 109 110 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation With the explosion of intranets and the Internet there is a growing demand for access to dynamic Web pages Net Data allows people with little programming knowledge to easily transform static HTML Web pages into dynamic Web applications using Net Data Macr
19. What is attractive about the Internet client server model compared to the HTTP CGI model is that the program logic can be distributed as appropriate between the client and server and a persistent connection is maintained allowing for long running transactions However since the HTTP protocol and the HTTP server are not being used for communications it is the responsibility of client and server pair to agree on what application protocols are used for example roll your own over a sockets connection and how things such as security encryption integrity translation and such are handled This becomes especially difficult when dealing with transient Java applets For the purposes of this document the Internet client server programming model is defined as Java applications or applets communicating to server applications over Internet intranet protocols The server applications can be either new or existing procedural servers or new Java servers Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 21 Why Java Java is the common man s OO language It is much simpler than C and it was designed for programming on the Internet It comes with its own distributable object model and it runs everywhere Technically Java is the only language that deals with threads as part of its basic construction This has the potential of giving it scalability characteristics that are orders of magnitude greater than the traditional process based model An
20. 2 4 3 Content Authoring Internet content authoring for the AS 400 system is typically done using a PC editor or graphical tool The content HTML text Net Data macros Java applets images audio video and so on is created and tested on the PC and uploaded to the AS 400 IFS where it can be served to Internet clients 2 4 4 Content Management Internet content management deals with the difficult job that a Web administrator has of managing Web objects including HTML scripts macros CGI programs Java applets audio video clips bitmaps and the links that tie them all together It also deals with being able to determine how a Web site is navigated through navigation analysis tools A technology demo for a management tool Visual Web Manager is available at IBM on the Internet Visual Web Manager allows you to view the structure of your Web site and HTML presentations and make modifications on the fly Visual Web Manager gives you a simple visual environment in which you can develop and maintain your Web site The demo version of the software is suitable for small to medium sized Web sites that contain a maximum of 500 HTML pages The software runs locally on your machine which can be your server or any other machine where you develop a Web site or presentation and operates on Web sites where the HTML pages are contained within the directory containing the home page or subdirectories under this directory The best way to become famili
21. Also with AS 400 HTML Gateway your programmers can enhance and jazz up your applications by adding graphics and other HTML tags Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 171 It requires only a small change to the DDS specifications and does not affect your workstation users 5 2 Using the HTML Gateway in Application Development Having decided upon the use of an HTML gateway there are various routes you might take Figure 78 shows the implementation route that you might adopt depending on your application requirement You must consider whether you are proposing to use your applications on the Internet or the Intranet and consequently what login type and security is required In addition you must examine the level to which you want to enhance your applications You might also want to restrict the number of displays that are shown or even develop completely new applications for the web 5250 HTML GATEWAY INTRANET INTERNET UNSECURE UNSECURE SECURE LOGIN LOGIN LOGIN AS400 SIGNON EXIT LOGON PROGRAM NEW APPLICATION EXISTING APPLICATION NEW CODE DDS HTML SCREENS AS IS AS IS LIMITED AS IS ABSOLUTELY DDS HTML DDS HTML NO CHANGES ENHANCED ENHANCED Figure 78 5250 HTML Gateway Implementation Route Notes 1 At present it is only possible to implement a 5250 HTML gateway secure transaction by running I NET s Webulator 400 and Commerce Server 400 172 Unleashing AS 400 App
22. Back buttons and a history list that can be used to re display a page from the cache retrieval earlier in the session A history mechanism is meant to show exactly what the user saw at the time when the resource was retrieved on condition that the resource is still in the cache Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 5 2 3 Transaction Context In the beginning browsers were used to retrieve inter related documents No context was kept by the HTTP server related to a user session Here it made sense to switch back to another page without communication to a server even if the page was outdated But to re display a page from a cache does not make sense for transactions Here a page should reflect the current transaction state With transactions a page also contains forms for posting data to a server in contrast to links that are usually used to request other documents These forms make sense only in a certain context 2 5 2 4 GET and POST The GET method is always used in the HTTP request for links For forms the method is determined by the form attribute method which should be set to the POST method 2 5 2 5 Caching Strategies for GET and POST When using history mechanisms the Web browser always tries to retrieve the page from cache But when submitting a form or selecting a link we must differentiate between the POST and GET method When resubmitting a form with a POST method the Web browser never tries to retrieve
23. D QUSBAVL 5 8B 0 D QUSERVED 16 16 D D QUSEDO1 17 17 D D Qus EC Bytes Provided Bytes Available Exception Id Reserved Varying length Figure 28 QUSEC Data Structure for Error Reporting e The QtmhGetEnv API allows you to get the value set by the server for a particular HTTP environment variable Table 5 Get Environment Variable QtmhGetEnv API Description 1 0 Type Example Receiver variable Output Char name fred amp address center street Length of response Output i 31 Request variable Input QUERY_STRING Length of request variable Input 12 I O Char QUSEC data structure see Figure 28 Note Reference at number of bytes not at number of characters The following display shows a piece of RPG code using the QtmhGetEnv API Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 83 Copy QUSEC structure copy qsysinc qrpglesrc qusec D QUSEDO1 17 116 Variables for QtmhGetEnv Denvrevr S 32767 Denvrevrin S 10i 0 inz size envrevr Denvrspln S 10i 0 Denvrqsnm S 30 DenvrqsIn S 10i 0 C eval qusbprv 16 Get environment variable checkr envrqsnm envrqsIn Cc CALLB QtmhGetEnv Cc parm envrcvr parm envrcyrin Cc parm envrspIn Cc parm envrqsnm Cc parm envrqsIn Cc parm QUSEC e The QtmhRdStin API allows CGI programs to read from standard in stdin Table 6 Read from Stdin QtmhRdStin API Description 1 0 Exampl
24. IO SE A Refer to the TCP IP Configuration manual for API Parms kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk MOVE length of WSR STDIN DATA to wsr len req CALL procedure QtmhRdStin USING WSR STDIN DATA WSR LEN REQ WSR LEN RECEIVED QUS EC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Set length of Database Buffer then call the convert to Database Function This takes the string of variable names and values and maps them to field names like a normal read from a screen F F F F E F Refer to the TCP IP Configuration manual for API Parms kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk MOVE length of CUST BUFF to WSR LEN BUFF Call procedure QtmhCvtDb using WSR DB NAME WSR STDIN DATA WSR LEN RECEIVED CUST BUFF WSR LEN BUFF WSR LEN CVTD WSR RSP CODE QUS EC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Write the data to the user Write the standard header di the user data and the standard trailer kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk MOVE LENGTH OF WS STANDARD HEADER TO WSR LEN OUT CALL procedure QtmhWrStout USING WS STANDARD HEADER WSR LEN OUT QUS EC MOVE corr custrec of cust buff to ws output info MOVE LENGTH OF WS output info TO WSR LEN OUT CALL procedure QtmhWrStout USING WS output info WSR LEN OUT QUS EC Appendix A ILE RPG and ILE COBOL Sample CGI Programs 259
25. POST ACTION FORM2 gt lt h3 gt Vehicle Selection Box lt h3 gt lt BR gt QUERY1 Mytable DTW_TB SELECT Mytable brand 10 N 1 lt BR gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Submit it gt lt FORM gt lt HTML gt luna REPORT SECTION AEREERE FARE RE ERRE RI HTML FORM2 lt HTML gt lt TITLE gt Selct Box Results lt TITLE gt lt P gt You selected the value lt B gt brand lt B gt from the select box lt HTML gt o oe Figure 69 Net Data Select Box Macro When this macro is called it produces the following browser output Notice that 10 DTW_TB_SELECT Mytable brand 10 N 1 rows from the table are displayed and that the first option Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 153 DTW_TB_SELECT Mytable brand 10 N 1 was selected as the default selection Debug Tip The HTML section FORM2 prints the environment variable that is passed by the macro in the ACTION parameter of the FORM METHOD POST By including the brand you can see the value that was passed when the Submit it button was selected bttp rchasm02 cgi binnetdata 054S LIB NETDAT414 4 4 LIEND MACROS FILE selectbox mbr torml O Net Data Select Box i Vehicle Selection Box CHEVROLET CHRYSLER DAIHATSU DODGE Metacape Selot Ras Results ht
26. ifndef _string_h include lt string h gt endif ifndef __stdlib_h include lt stdlib h gt fendi f FER H k eke ke ke ke e ke ke he e ke ke he e deke e He e e ke e e EER ERE REER RI EKER ARIA RARI EREREEREREERE All file scoped Constants go here BRBRRRRRRERERRER ARERR ERR KER ERR KER IAA RIA IAA EER ER EER EREREEREREERE define SIZE 10 define FNAME 21 Qualified database file name size define FWIDTH 240 Width of one database file record define BLANK EFE R H k eke keke k e ke ke he ERE KERR EER e e e ke He e e e ke EER ERR EKER ER EER EREEREREREEREREERE All file scoped type declarations go here EFEK H k eke keke k e ke ke he de ke ke ke e deke He ke e e ke RITA e e Re AAA e e e e e e e IAA e ke K k eke ke ke ekekeke k Structure for data passed to Server Logon exit program EFE R Hk eke keke ke e ke ke he e eke he e deke e e e e ke e e e ke Ae e e IAA Ae ke e e e ke ke e e e ke e eke K REREREEREREERE Figure 102 Part 1 of 7 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples 265 typedef struct char OperSpecInfo_p Operation Specific Info Input int Lgth_OperSpecInfo Operation Spec Info length Input char ClientIPaddr 15 Client IP Addr Input int CCSID CCSID of operation info Input char AllowOper 1 Allow Operation 0 N 1 Y Output char UserProfile SIZE User Profile Output
27. kkkkkkkkkkkkk Stack Pop Function RRAAA ERE ARA RAEE ERA REI Fi UNCTION DTW_REXX myPop INOUT x INOUT y parse var y xy pops x off of stack y oe a kkkkkkkkk HTML Section main0 BRERAFEREA ZE RAEE HTML main0 lt html gt lt head gt lt META HTTP EQUIV Expires CONTENT Mon 01 Jan 1990 13 00 00 GMT gt lt TITLE gt First Screen lt TITLE gt lt head gt lt body bgcolor ffffff gt lt b gt First Screen lt b gt assign mainQ tempQ lt p gt This is the first screen lt p gt lt form method POST action mainl gt lt Push current panel onto my queue in case we gt lt need to find our way back gt myPush main0 mainQ lt input type hidden name mainQ value mai nQ gt lt POST hidden variables gt INCLUDE itsoexm2 mbr lt input type submit name nextButton value Next gt lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt kkkkkkkkkkk HTML Section main1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HTML mainl lt html gt lt head gt lt META HTTP EQUIV Expires CONTENT Mon 01 Jan 1990 13 00 00 GMT gt lt TITLE gt Second Screen lt TITLE gt lt head gt lt body bgcolor ffffff gt lt b gt Second Screen lt b gt Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet assign mainQ tempQ lt p gt This is the second screen Enter your first name lt p gt lt This is the next form gt lt form
28. lt P gt The table is now full lt BR gt ELSE lt P gt The table is too small lt BR gt ENDIF 4 7 4 Maintaining State using HTML Hidden Variables The following example shows one way to keep track of the HTML pages and their associated variables This example uses REXX functions to push and pop values from a stack and pass the values to the Net Data macro Using the nextButton and the backButton the field values of the form are remembered for the user so they can change an entry on the form easily Notice the HTML Meta tag lt META HTTP EQUIV Expires CONTENT Mon 01 Jan 1990 13 00 00 GMT gt This makes sure that when a user selects the backButton the variables are not coming from the user s cached pages Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 147 148 SS Source File Name itsoexmp mbr Source File Description This source file contains macro code that pushes an HTML screen onto a stack and also pops it off the stack kkkkkkkkk Define Section REAREARRARERRRAEE N SDEFINE FIRSTNAME LASTNAME MAINQ TEMPQ kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Assign Function BREFERKERAER ERE ERE RERE RL FUNCTION DTW_REXX assign IN from OUT to to from assigns the input variable to the output variable kkkkkkkkkkkkk Stack Push Function KHKKKKAKKAEKERERKEK KS F UNCTION DTW_REXX myPush IN x INOUT y y X y pushes x onto stack y
29. poor 5 very poor Overall Satisfaction Please answer the following questions Was this redbook published in time for your needs Yes____ No___ If no please explain Please complete this What other redbooks would you like to see published Comments Suggestions THANK YOU FOR YOUR FEEDBACK Copyright IBM Corp 1997 289 Printed in U S A G24 4935
30. program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM s product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent program that does not infringe any of IBM s intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product program or service Information in this book was developed in conjunction with use of the equipment specified and is limited in application to those specific hardware and software products and levels IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation 500 Columbus Avenue Thornwood NY 10594 USA Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling i the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs including this one and ii the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact IBM Corporation Dept 600A Mail Drop 1329 Somers NY 10589 USA Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed AS IS The information about non IBM vendor products in this manual has been supplied by the vendor an
31. 0 0 XV Chapter 1 AS 400 System in Network Computing Environment 1 1 1 What is the Internet 1 1 2 History of Internet ii e e e p e ee 2 1 3 Network Computing 3 1 4 Why Attach an AS 400 System to the Internet 4 Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 5 2 1 1 Network Centric Computing 5 2 2 AS 400 Internet Application Scenarios 0 0 5 2 3 Different Web Models 6 2 3 1 Simple Web Modell 6 2 3 2 Interactive Web Modell 7 2 3 3 Distributed Web Modell 8 2 3 4 Enterprise Distributed Web Model 9 2 4 AS 400 System Facilities for the Internet 10 2 4 1 Database Services 00 000 2 10 2 4 2 Application Accesso 10 2 4 3 Content Authoring 0 11 2 4 4 Content Management 11 2 4 5 Java Development Environment 12 2 5 General Design Considerations 0 12 2 5 1 Transactions over the World Wide Web using the Internet 12 2 5 2 Synchronization between Web Browser and Server 12 2 5 3 End User Driven 13 2 5 4 End User ANONYMOUS LL 13 2 5 5 Status of User Requests 14 2 5 6 National Characters Code Pages Date Format 15 2 5 7 Internet Intranet Extranet Considerations 16 2 5 8 Internet Application Error Recovery 17 2 6 Programming Alternatives 0 17 2 7 Internet Programming Models 18 2 7 1 HTTP CGI Programming Model 0
32. 19 2 7 2 Java Applet Communicating to CGI 21 2 7 3 Net Data Macros 2 0 0 0200022 21 2 7 4 The Internet Client Server Programming Model 21 2 7 5 Lotus DOMINO 9 zen 225 2 be ib eG es he hipaa SRY RA See See 22 2 8 Supporting the AS 400 Legacy Programming Models 22 2 8 1 The 5250 Workstation Gateway 22 2 8 2 On the Fly Translation versus the Toolkit Approach 23 2 8 3 Telnet and Client Access Personal Communication 24 2 9 HTML Programming Considerations 0 24 2 9 1 Hypertext Markup Language HTML 25 2 9 2 The HTML Document Structure 25 Copyright IBM Corp 1997 iii iv 2 973 HIME Syntax 2 74 be eit Yate adit Med bow de Rees 2 9 4 Creating Static HTML Pages 2 02004 295 Feedback lt q sine Ge eked ete a SE ieee Sede ode Boge Bae 2 10 Server Side Imagemap Support aaa 2 10 2 Server Side Image Maps Considerations 2 11 Netscape Microsoft IE IBM Web Explorer Spyglass 2 12 ILE Integrated Language Environment Programming Considerations 2 12 1 Overview of ILE Concepts 0 2 02000 2 12 2 ILE Compile and Bind Commands 2 12 3 OPM Compatibility Mode 2 0 2 0 20040 2 12 4 Activation Groups 2 0 0000 2 12 5 Activation Group Recommendations 2 12 6 Differences Between Default and Non Default Activat
33. 277 D 1 International Technical Support Organization Publications 277 D 2 Redbooks on CD ROMs 20000000 277 D 3 Other Publications 277 How to Get ITSO Redbooks 1 279 How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks 279 How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks 280 IBM Redbook Order Form 2 2 a 281 Contents Vii viii Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Figures DOT 02 INTE 0 1 A a A A A DA A A A W GW GW da I WI 0 WI WI WNNNNNDNNNN Na a da a Fe OD EOD 01 Re OO DOSE LO 00 AJ ON OO O O00 NOP OB CO re O 0 004 OP OF Ri OO NO 0 Copyright IBM Corp 1997 Internet World Map The Simple Web Modell The Interactive Web Modell The Distributed Web Modell The Enterprise Distributed Web Model Internet Application Design Overview HIME Document dii e e a BAM i amp ele ode HTML Document Displayed Through an OS 2 Web Browser Clickable World Map 2 2 Defining Hotspots and Associated URLS Image Map Coordinates 20 0 0 2 0048 Mapping of Image Map URL to HTTP Configuration AS 400 File Systems File Server and Integrated File System Interface JavaScript Library Test Page Part 1 JavaScript Library Test Page Part 2 Roadmap for Internet Application Design The Basic Idea of How the CGI is Working Way
34. 77 WSR LEN REQ PIC S9 9 BINARY 77 WSR LEN CVTD PIC S9 9 BINARY 77 WSR RSP CODE PIC S9 9 BINARY 77 WSR LEN RECEIVED PIC S9 9 BINARY 77 WSR LEN OUT PIC S9 9 BINARY 77 WSR LEN BUFF PIC S9 9 BINARY 01 ws ovrdbf cmd 05 pic x 53 value OVRDBF FILE CUSTPF TOFILE WEBDB CUSTPF MBR FIRST 05 pic x 15 value OVRSCOPE JOB 01 ws dltovr cmd 05 pic x 53 value DLTOVR FILE CUSTPF LVL JOB 01 WSR DB NAME 05 ws db name pic x 10 value CUSTPF 05 ws lib name pic x 10 value WEBDB kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Buffer used to convert the string data into fields kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 01 CUST BUFF COPY DDS CUSTREC of custpf COPY QUSEC OF QSYSINC QLBLSRC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk This group contains a Standard startup needed for HTML This is used as output to the user You should change ii the text between the lt title gt text lt title gt tags gt Hex 15 x 15 is the newline character and is gt REQUIRED between lines of output fi kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k 01 WS STANDARD HEADER 05 PIC X 23 VALUE Content type text html 05 PIC XX VALUE X 1515 05 pic x 6 value lt HTML gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 6 value lt HEAD gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 7
35. DDBActLn S 10I 0 INZ DDBRespCd S 10i 0 INZ DDATASTRUCT E DS Read environment variables Dprogram S 20A Figure 29 Part 1 of 2 RPG Source Code Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 87 88 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Mainline c eval Read output html page c callp qusbprv 16 gethtml fn 1ib mbr Get input data from POST or GET method C callp getinput indata indataln inactln indatatype J Format the input data into the externally described data structure c callp c Use getenvp to get the envi c eval Cc 7 checkr c exsr c eva CvtDb DBFileName InData InActLn datastruct DBDSLn DBActLn DBRespCd QUSEC ronment variables envrgsnm SCRIPT_NAME envrqsnm envrqsin getenvf program subst envrevr 1 envrspIn Setup data for writing standard output O exsr Write sections of HTML eva callp eva callp eva callp eva a eo ESENE Oe ee setvardata E section top wrtsection section varnm varval var1n section variab wrtsection section varnm varval var n section fini wrtsection section varnm varval var n inlr on kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Setvardata Sets va ues of variable names contents lengths kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
36. Enclose a directory list List Definition lt DL gt lt DL gt Enclose a list of terms List and definitions Definition lt DT gt No closing tag ltem of definition list list item Emphasis lt EM gt lt EM gt Emphasize enclosed text Form lt FORM gt lt FORM gt Define form of enclosed text Level 1 lt H1 gt lt H1 gt Enclose level 1 heading heading Level 2 lt H2 gt lt H2 gt Enclose level 2 heading heading Level 3 lt H3 gt lt H3 gt Enclose level 3 heading heading Level 4 lt H4 gt lt H4 gt Enclose level 4 heading heading Level 5 lt H5 gt lt H5 gt Enclose level 5 heading heading Level 6 lt H6 gt lt H6 gt Enclose level 6 heading heading Head lt HEAD gt lt HEAD gt Define the head of the document Horizontal lt HR gt No closing tag Insert horizontal line Rule HTML lt HTML gt lt HTML gt Define HTML document Italics lt l gt lt l gt Italicize enclosed text Image lt IMG gt No closing tag Embed an image Input lt INPUT gt lt INPUT gt Display entry field Index lt ISINDEX gt No closing tag Define searchable URL Keyboard lt KBD gt lt KBD gt Indicate user typed text List item lt LI gt No closing tag Item of Directory list Menu list Ordered list Unordered list Link lt LINK gt No closing tag Describe relationship between documents Menu lt MENU gt lt MENU gt Enclose a menu list Ordered lt OL gt lt OL gt Enclose an ordered lis
37. See Section 1 4 Why Attach an AS 400 System to the Internet on page 4 for more information 1 1 What is the Internet The Internet is the network of networks It is an interconnection of many smaller networks forming a larger network we call the Internet As the number of hosts and other networks connecting to the Internet grow so does the Internet Since the Internet s conception applications and protocols have been developed to utilize it The popularity of applications such as FTP and e mail caused a meteoric rise in the number of users connecting to the Internet More recently however the World Wide Web is the area of usage showing the most rapid growth Copyright IBM Corp 1997 1 No connectivity The original backbone of the Internet was provided by the U S Government science institutes and universities as a means of sharing research data As usage has outgrown the original infrastructure it has been continually upgraded by communications companies funded by the subscriptions of the end users Internet Bitnet no Internet fl E mail only ASCCHAA Figure 1 Internet World Map 1 2 This picture shows all of the current countries in the world and indicates by different shades of black through white the level of Internet access White indicates full Internet access which makes up most of this world map 2 History of Internet The Internet was born in the late
38. Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 3 5 POST Method When the POST method is being used the QUERY STRING environment variable contains a null string The null string makes the CGI program look for its input in the standard input stream See Figure 24 The CGI program can determine the method GET or POST from the REQUEST_METHOD environment variable Client METHOD POS HTTP SERVER HTML Doc or Redirection or other types of files CGI Program RPG COBOL PGM LA aa Figure 24 AS 400 CGI using the POST Method When the HTML document uses the lt FORM METHOD POST the form is submitted with the standard input data stream stdin The CGI program inspects the request method to determine if post data is available by reading the REQUEST_METHOD environment variable The CGI program can obtain other environment variables set by the HTTP server regardless of the request method To support environment variables the AS 400 HTTP server creates an environment variable user index that contains the name and value for each environment variable set by the server The index is named QTMHENVI in the QTEMP library Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 71 The reason why it is created in the QTEMP library is that it has to be unique for each child job that defines it So each child job creates the index that is accessible to the CGI programs that the server child job calls Each ti
39. and stay ahead of the competition The Net Commerce Administrator contains two data management applications the Site Manager and the Store Manager and a Web page design tool called the Template Designer 7 4 8 Site Manager and Store Manager 230 Merchants use the Site Manager to create and manage the infrastructure for their commercial Web site and the Store Manager to develop an online catalog and manage such other information as shipping options shopper groups and customer numbers Using simple displays that look the same as fill in the blank forms merchants enter information about the store or mall and merchandise into the Net Commerce database Updating the information is quick and easy Here are some examples of the information that merchants can store in the database and display on the Web pages e The store or mall name logo location contact person contact information mission statement policies types of services and products offered and currency used e The merchandise offered including descriptions product number or SKU stock keeping unit images prices availability dates dimensions or weight attributes such as size and color and shipping methods for each product e The product categories shipping companies and services that shoppers can select Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Shopper groups that the merchant can define for the store Other information can be stored in the database for
40. but has a name and a value that can be passed onto the script that processes the form input NAME An attribute of the lt INPUT gt lt SELECT gt and lt TEXTAREA gt tags Indicates the name of the variable that holds the eventual value of this element as submitted to the script VALUE SIZE MAXLENGTH An attribute of the lt INPUT gt tag indicating the default value for the form element if any or the value submitted with the NAME of the script For SUBMIT and RESET buttons VALUE indicates the label of the button An attribute of the lt INPUT gt tag used only when TYPE is TEXT Indicates the size of the text field in characters An attribute of the lt INPUT gt tag used only when TYPE is TEXT Indicates the maximum number of characters this text field accepts CHECKED An attribute of the lt INPUT gt tag used only when TYPE is CHECKBOX or RADIO Indicates that this element is selected by default lt SELECT gt NAME MULTIPLE A menu or scrolling list of items Individual items are indicated by the lt OPTION gt tag An attribute of the lt SELECT gt tag Indicates the name of the variable that holds the eventual value of this element as submitted to the script An attribute of the lt SELECT gt tag indicating that multiple items in the list can be selected Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 67 68 Unleashing AS 400 Applications
41. fully qualify the path to the files so Net Data can find them This sample shows three include files that get two time stamps using the REXX function time subtract the seconds and hundredths of seconds and show the results on the browser ram gt I RRKA KKK ERK EK KA KKK KKK EUNCTION SECTIONE ERRAR K KK k kkk kk d FUNCTION DTW_SQL QUERY1 OUT Mytable select from TABLE report INCLUDE TIMERFTN MBR BL REREKERAR INPUT SECTION HRRAREERKERAER ARK EEREE HTML INPUT lt HTML gt INCLUDE TIMERSTR MBR INCLUDE TIMEREND MBR Figure 61 Using Include Files The contents of the first INCLUDE file TIMERFTN sets up the REXX command time It is included from the FUNCTION SECTION of the macro unction dtw_rexx stimel out t1 tl time 1 Sf 5 function dtw_rexx etimel OUT t2 returns t2 t2 time 1 Figure 62 Include File TIMERFTN The contents of the second INCLUDE file TIMERSTR starts the timer Notice that the first function stime1 does not have a returns parameter so the start time is not displayed at the browser but is stored in the variable t1 to print later in the macro We are using the Net Data built in function DTW_DELSTR to Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet start at the first position of the string delete the next six positions and return the value of the deleted string to d1 stimel t1 DTW_D
42. or both benefits from the public key encryption scheme provided by the secure Web server and secure Web client The user login and password used for authentication are encrypted for transmission as well as all user inputs to the forms and the query results that are sent back to the user A secure Web server client combination is a must for protection of sensitive data e Firewall Net Data may be used with firewall products such as NetSP for IBM which protects both the Net Data machine and the corporate network from external Internet attacks For more information on protecting your assets see the Internet security list of frequently asked questions FAQ at this Web site http ww genome wi mit edu WW faqs ww security faq htm For the most secure access to DB2 data Net Data should be used in conjunction with both a secure Web server and a firewall 4 2 Writing Net Data Macro Files 114 When Net Data is used as a CGI application it calls the executable DB2WWW and one or more language environments Language environments are Net Data s interface to your data and applications Each language environment provides a specific interface For example Net Data provides language environments to access DB2 databases REXX C C RPG and COBOL applications Net Data also lets you build your own language environments The Web macro contains a series of macro language HTML and language environment specific statements Language environme
43. that this re tooling is gradual at best We therefore have a responsibility to support and extend the existing legacy applications by providing mechanisms to make them accessible over the Internet Some of these mechanisms allow this to happen transparently to the application Others require various degrees of modification to portions of the application We provide some of the following mechanisms to support our legacy applications 2 8 1 The 5250 Workstation Gateway 22 The 5250 workstation gateway is a specialized HTTP server that transforms the 5250 data stream into HTML on the fly With the gateway any browser can run any AS 400 application with no modification to that application Functionally this is the best Internet support we have for legacy applications It is completely transparent to the applications works with system programs as well as user programs and can be accessed from any browser on the Internet There is a price to pay for this functionality and transparency namely usability and performance Usability problems stem mainly from the fact that an Internet browser does not have the same functional capabilities as a 5250 terminal and Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet controller lt does not support function keys it does not support special field editing capabilities such as mandatory fill mandatory entry numeric only fields range checking and check digit and it does not maintain a persistent c
44. the source code of a program is written in the programming language of choice and compiled into the machine code understood by a particular set of computer hardware The Java compiler however does not generate machine code Instead it generates intermediate code called Java bytecodes These bytecodes are interpreted by the Java interpreter which executes the instructions on the particular hardware platform The Java interpreter and run time system are collectively called the Java Virtual Machine or JVM The bytecodes are what make Java programs portable A program written in Java is compiled into bytecodes These bytecodes can be transported across a network and executed on any system that implements a Java Virtual Machine 6 1 1 Java Applets An applet is a small Java program designed to be included in an HTML Web document The HTML document contains tags that specify the name of the Java applet and its Uniform Resource Locator URL The URL is the location at which the applet bytecodes reside on the Internet When an HTML document containing a Java applet tag is displayed a Java enabled Web browser downloads the Java bytecodes from the Internet and uses the JVM to execute the code from within the Web document These Java applets are what enable Web pages to contain animated graphics or interactive content Because Java applets can be downloaded from any system security mechanisms exist within the JVM to protect against malicious applets
45. title This is the title call sayh Content type text html H call sayh lt HTML gt call sayh lt HEAD gt call sayh lt TITLE gt title lt TITLE gt call sayh lt HEAD gt call sayh lt BODY gt call sayh Sample REXX procedure call sayh lt BODY gt call sayh lt HTML gt call sayh flush exit Figure 32 REXX Source Code Now we try explain the most important subroutines used in this sample Getparse subroutine This subroutine reads from standard input uses a call to STDIN RPG program that uses the QtmhRdStdin API until no more input and concatenates all of the input into variables When finished it converts any plus characters to blanks and separates variable value pairs Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 95 96 getparse if g ljobtype 1 then do say Enter standard input data parse pull alldata alldataln length alldata end else do alldata alldataln 0 g lcontent_length getenv CONTENT LENGTH g lrecvd 0 if g lcontent_length 1 then return Read from standard input Ke e e e e ke e e e e e e e e e e EERE RERERERE do while g lcontent_length gt 0 if g lcontent_length gt g 1maxparmlength then g ltoget g lmaxparmlength else g ltoget g lcontent_length Calls the RPG program KKKKKKKKKKKKK KAKA eke Ke keke ekek CALL PGM STDIN PARM amp
46. use STRPASTHR to connect to another remote host This function was not formally tested but it seems to work in the ITSO network Note It is not recommended that you enable this functionality for public Web sites 7 Never use previous and next page function in a Web browser as a way to jump into the application flow from that page We suggest turning off caching on the Web client to enforce this suggestion 8 No text assist is available 9 You cannot use applications that automatically update the 5250 display without the client using an aid key An example is the performance tools WRKSYSACT command when you use the automatic display refresh option 10 Style button The action bar top row of buttons has a style button that toggles the style used for the F1 F24 buttons One mode shows displays F1 F24 as two rows of buttons at the bottom of every display This takes up more display space but has the advantage of letting you quickly submit the form The other mode puts F1 F24 into a Function menu pull down next to the General menu pull down This makes submitting the F1 F24 keys a two step process select menu item then press Enter but has the advantage of less display clutter and a faster display by the browser 11 NLS code pages Special characters and code pages can be requested by each individual client Translation is usually from the EBCDIC CCSID of your AS 400 system to the ASCII CCSID specified in the CHGWSGA C
47. value countname a new value that adds a record to the data file CGICOUNT and returns the countvalue to the browser Typically you use the DEFINE countname PGCNTR1 to change this value tp Achasm02 cgi bin netdata Q5Y S LIB MNETDATAMA hW LIB NDMACROS FILE count MBRJinput 4 This page has been viewed 35 times i This pagez has been viewed 30 times Figure 53 REXX Calls RPG Program COUNT 4 4 3 Net Data Built In Functions Net Data provides a large library of predefined functions for use within your macros The use of these functions can simplify the construction of your dynamically created Web pages The built in functions fall into seven basic groups 1 General functions are a group of functions that Web builders can use to develop Web pages that can change data and give access to some system services that is date and time e DTW_ADDQUOTE DTW_rADDQUOTE DTW_mADDQUOTE e DTW_DATE DTW_rDATE e DTW_GETENV DTW_rGETENV e DTW_GETINIDATA DTW_rGETINIDATA Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 129 130 e DTW_HTMLENCODE DTW_rHTMLENCODE e DTW_QHTMLENCODE DTW_rQHTMLENCODE e DTW_SETENV DTW_rSETENV e DTW_TIME DTW_rTIME e DTW_URLESCSEQ DTW_rURLESCSEQ 2 Math functions allow you to do math functions within the macro without the need to call a high level language program This simplifies the writing of the Net Data macro The following math functions are currently supported e DTW_
48. 0 gt A what 0 amp Oxdf A 10 what 0 0 digit 16 digit what 1 gt A what 1 amp Oxdf A 10 what 1 0 return digit EI Makeword function At the end separate the name of the value char makeword char line char stop int x 0 y char word char malloc sizeof char strlen line 1 for x 0 line x amp amp line x stop xt word x line x word x 0 if line x x y 0 while line y line x return word 3 8 3 2 ILE C Program that Reads from QUERY_STRING GET Method In this example the GET method reads from QUERY_STRING using a getword function Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet RRRRRRRRERRRER EERE RER ERE REE ER ER ER ERE RR ER ERE RERER ERE hi SAMPLE USING GET METHOD Define struct for name value pairs EFE F k e ke Re e ke ke e he e e e ke he e ke e e e e e ke e e ke ke e e ke e e e RAR ERE RERERER typedef struct char name 128 char val 128 entry entry entries 10000 FEKKKEKKKAKKKKAKKKARKKARKKKAKKKKKKKKK KAKA ERE RERERERE Read QUERY STRING environment variable S 22 F ke e ke Re e ke e e ke e he de ke he e ke ke e ke e e ke e e He ke e e e e e e Ke e ke Ke e k ke ke keke ekee Ke cl getenv QUERY_STRING if cl NULL for x 0 c1 0 0 x M X3 getword entries x val cl amp
49. 156 hidden variable 150 implementation 111 initialization file 140 162 logical section 115 program object 160 table view 132 URL 165 net data macro file writing 114 Network Computing 3 AS 400 benefits for the Internet 4 AS 400 system and network computing 3 network centric computing 5 new versions of HTTP HTTP 1 1 228 numeric only fields 23 O option tag 29 ordered list tag 29 OUT variable 126 P paragraph tag 29 PASSWORD 142 143 144 PERL language 11 persistent connection 23 pre formatted text tag 29 predefined variable 151 programming alternatives 17 project manager 12 Q QTMHHTP1 user profile 139 143 164 R range checking 23 RCLACTGRP Reclaim Activation Group command 39 Reclaim Activation Group RCLACTGRP command 39 reclaiming activation group 39 relational database directory 117 141 relational database directory entries working with 117 relational database directory entry adding 141 report blocks 134 reports 112 REXX function 118 REXX language 11 REXX language environment variable 133 REXX program 118 RISC 243 road map 56 RPG language 11 RPG program 127 S sample tag 29 select box 154 select tag 29 sending multiple requests 12 service and support 168 service program creating 39 SHOWSQL 144 simple web model static web page 6 SQL_CODE 144 status of user request 14 string manipulation function 130 strong emphasis tag 29 synchronization 12 system function macro 145
50. 1960s as an effort to create a United States Department of Defense network called ARPANET The main purpose for it was to connect defense contractors and universities that were working on projects for the Department of Defense In 1973 the ARPANET established connections to England and Norway and in 1982 the TCP IP became the protocol suite for ARPANET This leads to one of the first references to an Internet of connected networks In 1983 the University of Wisconsin developed the name server that was introduced in 1984 In 1986 NFSNET was created with a backbone speed of 56 Kbps and upgraded to 1 1 544 Mbps in 1989 In 1989 the AS 400 system started supporting TCP IP on Release 2 0 of OS 400 This was even before we knew that this was version 1 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Gopher was introduced by the University of Minnesota in 1991 WWW World Wide Web was released by CERN in 1992 adding to established and popular applications such as Telnet e mail and FTP Today we have an estimated 4000000 hosts connected to the Internet and many more connected to internal intranets Network providers have upgraded the speeds of their backbones to T1 T2 T3 and so on to cope with the rising demand for bandwidth Now with the Internet on the verge of becoming a huge commercial marketplace the challenge is to create a suitable environment for secure electronic commerce Here are some interesting Int
51. 2 9 1 Hypertext Markup Language HTML 2 9 2 The HTML The Hypertext Markup Language HTML is a simple markup language used to create hypertext documents that are platform independent HTML documents are SGML Standard Generalized Markup Language documents with generic semantics that are appropriate for representing information from a wide range of domains SGML is an international standard for document markup conforming to ISO 8879 The latest defined version of HTML is HTML3 2 The major enhancements of HTML3 2 over HTML2 0 are e Split large documents across multiple servers e Support for tables e Support for mathematical formulae e Frame Support HTML is similar to a computer programming language without being a programming language There are commands called tags and syntax rules to be observed when writing in HTML HTML documents can be written using any word processor or text editor The way they look when seen with a Web browser however is quite different from what the writer sees when editing them It is not a What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG approach There are HTML editors currently available on the market that can be helpful and productive to use when writing your HTML documents HTML language provides support for the following features e Hypertext links to resources documents multimedia or data files e Menu and forms e Inline graphics e Text formatting Document Structure The HTML documents are co
52. 400 Applications on the Internet 5 7 1 1 Closing Confirmation Webulator 400 allows you to determine if the user should be given a Confirmation display after they press the Close Session command button You may want to set this value to YES if you want to protect users from accidentally pressing the Close Session button and losing their session data The Closing Confirmation display allows the user to return back to the previous display or to continue closing You may want to set this value to NO if you feel the likelihood of your users accidentally pressing the Close Session is remote or you find that they are less likely to close a session because of the extra step involved 5 7 1 2 Termination URL Webulator 400 allows you to specify a Termination URL that control is transferred to when the user ends a Webulator 400 session This allows a transparent way for the user to be returned to a meaningful URL when they are finished with their Webulator 400 session In addition to the URL a description must be entered that is used as the link text to your termination URL on all Webulator 400 error messages 5 7 1 3 Non Programmed Sign Off If your program does not permit a user sign off this presents us with a reasonable question How do end the application and the job when the Webulator 400 session is closed by the user Interestingly the answer to that question is to issue the SIGNOFF command This is not available to the user but fr
53. 5769 NCE International e 5769 NC1 U S https uses SSL Secure Sockets Layer unsecure secure Figure 95 Internet Connection Secure Server Preview 7 3 New Versions of HTTP The current version of the protocol today is HTTP 1 0 but it seems that HTTP 1 1 will introduce persistent connections A significant difference between HTTP 1 1 and earlier versions of HTTP is that persistent connections are the default behavior of any HTTP connection That is unless otherwise indicated the client may assume that the server will maintain a persistent connection HTTP 1 1 is currently in the state of an Internet draft 7 4 IBM Electronic Commerce Net Commerce Net Commerce provides a fully customizable virtual store front that allows secure commerce to take place over the Web Net Commerce comes with all of the software you need to build your first electronic store including a merchant server that manages the storefront interface to the customer and allows customers to browse through your catalog and place orders The store manager allows store personnel to keep prices and product information up to date The Secure Payment switch allows secure three way credit card authorizations 228 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 7 4 1 What Does Net Commerce Do If you have a commercial business Net Commerce has practical solutions for getting you into the cyber market Here is what Net Commerce can do for your business
54. Back Demo Figure 34 Document Returned from the Program CGIENVGET Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet cl The following figure shows the form for program CGIENVPOST Environment Variables with METHOD POST Form Environment T T a r i i i ITSO Company i i Demo CA A nter the SEARCH STRING HOME n R The following figure shows the HTML output from program CGIENVPOST Environment Yarlables with POST Back Demo Figure 36 Document Returned from the Program CGIENVPOST Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 101 3 12 ITSO Company Example Internet Connection for i gt B yD i L A j 4008 Bh Corporation _ ITSO Company Demonstrations eCGI Program GET Environment Variables Example CGi Program POST Environment variables Example eDemo ITSO Company CGI Frogram Method GET Example eCGI Program Method POST Example COrdering an IBM System 45 400 Method GET Ordering an IBM System 45 400 Method POST Crdering an IBM System 45 400 Method POST C Program IBM 451400 HOME Lo R R G Figure 37 Welcome to the ITSO Company Example Table 9 Overview Programs HTMLFILE INPUT Program Function Files HTML Mbr HTMLO Mbr Language CGIENVGET Environment ENVFILE FORMGETE CGIENVGETE ILE RPG Variables GET ENVGETDS
55. ClientIPaddr memcpy UserProfile memcpy Password memcpy ProgramLib memcpy ProgramName memcpy InitialMenu memcpy AllowOper else JOENORMAL JOENORMAL ITSOIC400 SHTMLR S Ao memcpy AllowOper 0 gt gt gt gt gt 9 5 100 111 SIZE SIZE SIZE SIZE SIZE 1 1 gt BRRRRRRRRAERRER ARERR ER ERE ERE KER ERR ER ERE KER EREER ERE EKER EREEREREERE Call function to write input parameters as received to file ERETTA AA ke k e ke RITA TIA RIA e e e e ke ERE KER e e EERE REE REREREEREREERE WriteParms OperSpecInfo_p Lgth_OperSpecInfo ClientIPaddr CCSID AllowOper UserProfile Password ProgramLib ProgramName InitialMenu return end of exitpgm End program exitpgm c Figure 102 Part 5 of 7 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples 269 Function Specification Feke k e ke e e e ke e e e e e e e e e e ERE REE KER ER EER ER ER EER ERERE Descriptive Name Write the input parameters as received to file Function Name WriteParms Notes Dependencies hi None Restrictions JE None Messages None Side Effects JE None Functions Macros called system sprintf IS TRACE Write one data Input char OperSpecInfo_p int
56. DB2WWW program out of the QTCP library it is not updated automatically by the PTF process or when you install a new release You need to have a good system management process in place to update the DB2WWW program when needed You can use the following untested suggestions as an alternative to moving DB2WWW program out of QTCP library r_ Security Alert If you choose to leave the DB2WWW program in the QTCP library you need to configure an EXEC statement to the QTCP library This can open a security hole that allows any browser to run any program in the library QTCP if a MAP or PASS statement to the QTCP library is in the HTTP configuration file One way to avoid this is shown in Alternative Setup to Leave DB2WWW in QTCP on page 161 The Net Data program DB2WWW should be copied to a CGI BIN library The DB2WWW program is located in the QTCP library You can copy the program object using the Create Duplicate Object CRTDUPOBJ command The DB2WWW program object s authority for PUBLIC users is set to EXCLUDE Change the DB2WWW program object in the CGI BIN directory so that the user profile that CGI programs run under QTMHHTP1 has access to the program object You can do this by changing the program object s authority for PUBLIC users to USE or by specifically giving the QTMHHTPI1 user profile USE access to the DB2WWW program object Add Net Data Directives to the HTTP configuration file Use option 1 A
57. ER ERR EKER ER EER ER ER EER ERERE Function Name exitpgm Descriptive Name Workstation Gateway Server WSG Logon exit This test exit program provides control over user authentication to a workstation gateway in the V3R2 release Notes Dependencies Workstation Gateway Logon exit point QIBM_QTMT_WSG was registered during WEB V3R2 installation Restrictions N one Messages N one Side Effects N one Functions Macros called Input char OperSpecInfo_p Lgth_OperSpecInfo int char int Outpu char char char char char char N t one ClientIPaddr CCSID AllowOper UserProfile Password ProgramLib ProgramName InitialMenu Exit Normal See OUTPUT Exit Error None End Function Specification static void exitpgm char OperSpecInfo_p Figure 102 Part 4 of Operation Specific Information Length in bytes of Operation Specific Information Client Internet Protocol Address CCSID of operation info Allow Operation 0 Reject 1 Accept User Profile to be used for sign on Password to be used for sign on Library of program to invoke Name of program to invoke Initial menu to invoke Entry point int Lgth_OperSpecInfo char ClientIPaddr 15 int CCSID char Allowoper 1 char UserProfile SIZE char
58. H plustospace entries x val E unescape_url entries x val getword entries x name entries x val Getword function This function reads from a string and looks for a character in our sample ampersand to equal characters If the character is found the function stops and returns the string void getword char word char line char stop int x 0 y for x 0 line x amp amp line x stop x word x line x word x 0 if line x x y 0 while line y line x FA Plustospace funtion This function is the same as the POST method The data format is the same for POST and GET methods only the way it is received is different Unescape_url funtion This function is the same as the POST method Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 81 3 9 Programming CGI BIN with ILE RPG 400 and ILE COBOL 400 APIs are provided to allow programs written in COBOL and RPG to read stdin write to stdout and read the environment variables These APIs are found in the QTMHCGI service program in the QTCP library The APIs to support ILE RPG and ILE COBOL are provided in source files The source files are e QCBLLESRC for ILE Cobol e QRPGLESRC for ILE RPG 3 9 1 Structure of RPG Program Using POST Method HTML Document RPG Program z CRTRPGMOD CRTPGM Neb client 3 Figure 27 CGI Programming with RPG Language using
59. HTMLO CGIENVPOST Environment ENVFILE FORMPOSE CGIENVPOSE ILE RPG Variables POST ENVPOSTDS HTMLO CGIGET Search Online INVFILE L04P040 ILE RPG Catalog QUERYDS CGIPOST Feedback Talk To Us TALKTOUS L04P060 ILE RPG TALKDS ORDAS400G Ordering an AS 400 ORDAS00F AS4FORMGE ORDAS400E ILE RPG GET ORDASDS HTMLO ORDAS400P Ordering an AS 400 ORDASOOF AS4FORMPE ORDAS400E ILE RPG POST ORDASDS HTMLO PARSECGIP Ordering an AS 400 RESIFORM ILE C POST 102 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 3 12 1 Source Code RPG Program ORDAS400G ILE RPG Program Example for the Method GET The information from the URL value name pairs is assigned to the environment variable QUERY_STRING This gateway program picks out the name value pairs of the variables from this QUERY_STRING through the API for ILE RPG The following example shows the Get Environment Variable QtmhGetEnv subroutine GETENV C_EJ kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Simple ILE RPG program ORDAS400G to test CGI Method GET 2 Create program ORDAS400G from module ORDAS400G PDM Option 26 1 Compile this source member as module ORDAS400G PDM Option 15 with PROMPT PF4 and BNDSRVPGM QTCP QTMHCGI Define your files here kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Order Database file kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
60. HTTP 2 CGI bin J Net Data i DBEWWW Relative Capacity Transaction Type Figure 98 AS 400 HTTP versus CGI Bin versus Net Data 8 5 Web Serving Performance Recommendations Throughput for Web serving is typically discussed in terms of the number of hits second connections second and transactions second mean the same Typically the CPU is the resource that limits capacity If a large AS 400 model is used with a single IOP the IOP may the limiting factor 242 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Note For more detailed information regarding specific AS 400 model Web serving capacity see your IBM Representative 8 5 1 CISC versus RISC The HTTP serving environment on RISC AS 400 models provides better performance per CPW than on CISC AS 400 models The hits sec CPW factor for RISC models is almost twice that of the CISC models This is due to the better RISC technology for C language environments and to recent performance improvements to TCP IP and IC 400 m Note Note that CPWs relative system performance metrics are derived from a commercial workload s capacity Therefore relative capacity ratios for Web serving may not track accordingly However they should be adequate for a high level capacity planning exercise 8 5 2 Response Time General User response time is made up of Web browser client work station time network time and server time The response times in measu
61. If it is specified at the outermost macro layer it has global scope and is active for all function calls executed in the Web macro If you defined more than one global MESSAGE block the last one defined is active Net Data uses these rules to process a RETURN_CODE from a function call 1 Check local MESSAGE block for an exact match exit or continue as specified 2 If RETURN_CODE is not 0 check local MESSAGE block for default or default depending on the sign of RETURN CODE exit or continue as specified 3 If RETURN CODE is not 0 check local MESSAGE block for default exit or continue as specified 4 Check global MESSAGE block for an exact match exit or continue as specified 5 If RETURN_CODE is not 0 check global MESSAGE block for defau t or default depending on the sign of RETURN CODE exit or continue as specified 6 If RETURN_CODE is not 0 check global MESSAGE block for default exit or continue as specified 7 If RETURN_CODE is not 0 issue Net Data internal default message and exit Here is an example Assume the following MESSAGE blocks are defined in your Web macro Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 137 global message block SMESSAGE 100 return code 100 message exit 100 return code 100 message continue default This a long message that spans more than one line You can use HTML tags including anchors and forms in this message also continue oe
62. Integrated File System You need to use a directory ina file system that supports long file names such as the Root on the IFS No special directory permissions are required as long as that directory is already configured to allow access from the Internet The HTTP server treats the applets the same as any other HTTP object such as gif or html files Note You may also want to use the QOpenSys part of the IFS this gives you the ability to use case sensitive names for your Java applets m Remember To access the IFS using FTP you need to change to naming format 71 To do this issue the following command from your FTP client quote site namefmt 1 This works for Windows 95 but some clients might only need site namefmt 1 You can now use the IFS naming convention to access the directories Note For more help on how to configure and use the FTP clients and servers on the AS 400 system refer to TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 3420 04 6 2 JavaScript This section describes how to implement and serve JavaScripts JavaScript can provide logic within static HTML and also field level validation Be aware that if the browser does not support JavaScript or if the feature is disabled the application CGl bin Net Data should perform the validation 222 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 6 2 1 What is JavaScript JavaScript is an HTML scripting language that allows HTML pages to interact with a bro
63. Internet functionality This is not true for existing AS 400 customers By using an HTML gateway function your current development tools work for creating Internet or Intranet applications Once your AS 400 applications are created you can start using the Internet s worldwide reach to open new marketing opportunities Existing AS 400 applications can run over the Web without modifying any code There is no conversion program to run Just install and configure the gateway and the applications on your AS 400 system are ready to go Why should a company use an HTML gateway Take the case of an typical company as shown in Figure 76 on page 170 the existing business situation can fully utilize existing applications and data on the Web with no coding required The HTML gateway provides a rapid way of taking advantage of the Internet This chapter describes the two HTML gateways that are available for the AS 400 system how to utilize them and describes some of the differences between them The final sections of this chapter provide pointers to additional sources of information on HTML gateways and discuss some of the pros and cons of application enablement versus the use of CGIl bin and Net Data programming Copyright IBM Corp 1997 169 eleMpleH uojeojddy 5250 Terminals PCs using 5250 Emulation PCa uaing 5250 Emulation A P 5250 Terminals gt m u
64. Java 52 whitepaper 48 AS 400 legacy programming model 22 AS 400 system facility 10 base tag 27 bibliography 277 blockquote tag 27 body tag 27 bold tag 27 built in function 129 C C language 11 C language 11 caching 12 caching control 13 caching strategy 13 calling function 125 calling high level language program 126 CCSID 819 16 CCSIDs and ISO character sets 16 CGI 10 check digit 23 citation tag 27 class browser 12 client server programming model persistent connection 21 sockets connection 21 COBOL language 11 code page 15 code tag 27 command CL Add Relational Database Directory Entry ADDRDBDIRE 141 ADDRDBDIRE Add Relational Database Directory Entry 141 Copy From Stream File CPYFRMSTMF 46 Copy To Stream File CPYTOSTMF 46 CPYFRMSTMF Copy From Stream File 46 CPYTOSTMF Copy To Stream File 46 Create Service Program CRTSRVPGM 39 CRTSRVPGM Create Service Program 39 RCLACTGRP Reclaim Activation Group 39 Reclaim Activation Group RCLACTGRP 39 Work with Relational Database Directory Entries WRKRDBDIRE 117 WRKRDBDIRE Work with Relational Database Directory Entries 117 commit 142 Common Gateway Interface CGI 7 communications LAN IOP 246 conditional logic 147 284 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet connections per second 237 connection rate 239 file size 239 WebStone 239 content authoring 11 content management 11 cookie 14 Copy From Stream File CPYFRMSTMF command 46 Cop
65. LIB MYLIB If you want the user to automatically take option 1 from the menu called MYMENU in the MYLIB library use the following URL www xyz com www5250 MENU MYMENU amp LIB MYLIB amp FIELD1 1 You can also use the FIELD1 keyword to call an initial program that accepts dynamic parameters Please be aware that to do this you must give the user access to a command line that may not always be desirable for security reasons Assume that the program MYPROG accepts parameters You can call this program with the following URL www xyz com www5250 FIELD1 CALL MYLIB MYPROG PARM PARM1 PARM2 5 6 3 2 Keyboard Plugin There is a browser plugin that provides keyboard support for Webulator 400 Because keyboard support is implemented as a Netscape plugin it is platform specific and must be tested with each browser The supported browsers are e Windows 3 x Netscape Navigator 2 0 Netscape Navigator 3 0 e Windows 95 NT Netscape Navigator 2 0 Netscape Navigator 3 0 Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 0 To complete the installation of the plugin you must 1 Ensure the server code is either Webulator 1 1a or you must install a Webulator PTF Note You can check your Webulator version by typing DSPDTAARA DTAARA WWWSERVER VERSIONWBL You can get the PTF from ftp ftp inetmi com pub webulate wb1110001 txt Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 Download the plugin You need to download
66. Lgth_OperSpecInfo char ClientIPaddr int CCSID char AllowOper char UserProfile char Password char ProgramLib char ProgramName char InitialMenu Output record to test results file Operation Specific Information Length in bytes of Operation Specific Information Client Internet Protocol Address CCSID of operation information Allow Operation 0 Reject 1 Accept User Profile to be used for sign on Password to be used for sign on Library of program to invoke Name of program to invoke Initial menu to invoke A single serial data record written to the test results file Exit Normal See OUTPUT Exit Error None I Wi ui EI ues ek z we WI x End Function Specification Fk k e ke e he ARK KRER ERE KER ERE KER EREREEREREERE static void WriteParms char OperSpecInfo_p int Lgth OperSpecInfo char ClientIPaddr 15 int CCSID char char char char char char AllowOper 1 UserProfile SIZE Password SIZE ProgramLib SIZE ProgramName SIZE InitialMenu SIZE Entry point Figure 102 Part 6 of 7 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway 270 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet ERRATA AAA ARIA AAA RIA IAA ATA IA RARI ER REEREREEKERER
67. OVRARR 24 C MOVEA OVRARR CMD 80 Cc Z ADD 80 L 15 5 Cc CALL QCMDEXC c PARM CMD C PARM L c open HTMLO kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Move FORM Input to Database fields kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c MOVEL NAME NAME_X c MOVEL ADDRESS ADDRESS_X c MOVEL TYPE TYPE_X c MOVEL SERV SERV_X KAK AKK KK KK K KI KK KKK KK KK K KK K K KK K KK KK KK KKK KK KKK KK KE KKK KK KKK KK KK KKK KKK IK Write Database record file ORDASOOF kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c WRITE ORDASR If you had multiple values for the same field you would have lost all but the first You need another technique for this situation Figure 38 Part 3 of 5 ILE RPG Program ORDAS400G Method GET Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 105 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Create the HTML Output Write HTML Required control records ADD NewLine append after 80 to 120 characters to OutBuff kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk C DO 9 I 50 C READ HTMLOUT 98 c OutBuff cat SRCDTA 0 OutBuff OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff Prepare variable OUTPUT C I ifeq 9 OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff cat NAME 0 OutBuff c OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff cat ADDRESS 0 Ou
68. P gt Welcome lt B gt name lt B gt variab lt TABLE Border Width 45 center gt lt CAPTION gt lt B gt Here are some environment variables lt B gt lt CAPTION gt lt TR gt lt TH ALIGN left gt Variable lt TH gt lt TH ALIGN left gt Content lt TH gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN 1eft gt SERVER_NAME lt TD gt lt TD ALIGN LEFT gt program lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt lt HR gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt This page has two special words that show the program where it should write the sections and where it should write the variables identified by e section variable A Getinput procedure In our sample we call the getinput procedure with these parameters a Variables for getinput subprocedure DInData S 32767A DInDataLn S 10I 0 INZ BufSize DInActLn S 101 0 DInDataType S 5 Call to getinput subprocedure c callp getinput indata indataln inactIn indatatype This function gets the REQUEST_METHOD environment variable to determine the method used and reads input data from stdin POST method or using a QtnhRdStin API or reads from QUERY_STRING environment variable GET method using a QtnhGetEnv API This program also changes the escape sequences and special characters using the cgiparse procedure and keeps the data in the getinput variables For a GET method the subprocedure calls the getenvf procedure to read the QUERY_STRING environm
69. PERL for the AS 400 system PERL is a popular scripting language used to create Web Common Gateway Interface CGI applications running on a variety of operating systems including UNIX Windows 95 and Windows NT As part of IBM s commitment to Web enable the AS 400 system IBM contracted with MKS to port PERL to the AS 400 system Although IBM could charge for PERL the original PERL authors guaranteed in their licensing agreement that anyone can freely distribute any version of PERL and the PERL source code This is a boon to users of course although it usually means that once the initial port is accomplished users are left on their own for technical support There are many resources available to PERL programmers from news groups and books 50 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 14 5 1 What Is PERL PERL s author Larry Wall describes PERL this way PERL is an interpreted language optimized for scanning arbitrary text files extracting information from those text files and printing reports based on that information It is also a good language for many system management tasks The language is intended to be practical easy to use efficient and complete rather than beautiful tiny elegant and minimal It combines in the author s opinion anyway some of the best features of C sed awk and sh so people familiar with those languages should have little difficulty with it Language historians also note some
70. POST Method 1 Itis the same structure as the C program The HTML form is sent to the client 2 ltis the same structure as the C program The user selects the Submit button e Call QtmhRdStin which places the entire input string read from stdin into a receiver variable of type pointer to character e Call QtmhCvtDb which parses the string of named variables and values and places all of the data into a database file formatted by DDS e Processing anything that you want to do including access to DB2 400 data 82 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet e The processing of your CGI application must generate the HTML output that is sent back to the client e Call QtmhWrStout to write the HTML to standard out stdout 3 When your application ends whatever you wrote to stdout is sent back to the Web client All APIs use a data structure for error reporting This data structure is in e QSYSINC QRPGLESRC QUSEC and QSYSINC QRPGSRC QUSEC for RPG programs m Note This for RPG and COBOL For the CRTPGM you must always specify the BNDSRVPGM QTCP QTMHCGI to ensure the module import for QtmhGetEnv QtmhRdStin QtmhWrStout and QtmhCvtDb are satisfied If you forget to include the SRVPGM you receive a message similar to the following example Definition not found for symbol QtmhRdStin e QSYSINC QCBLLESRC QUSEC and QSYSINC QLBLSRC QUSEC for COBOL programs DQUSEC DS D D QUSBPRV 1 4B 0 D
71. Password SIZE char ProgramLib SIZE char ProgramName SIZE char InitialMenu SIZE exitpgm start from here 268 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Feke k e ke e he ERE RRERERREERERERERKERER EER RARA 7 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway BRRRRRRRRRRRER RITIRATA ke ke he e e ke IAA RITA ER EER EREERERERREREREERE You can design your own logical flow here to check if user is authorized to bypass sign on screen Following are some examples 1 Validate Client IP address 2 Parse the OperSpecInfo_p input string Then Return AllowOper of 0 Reject this clients request Return AllowOper of 1 Accept this clients request Set related return values for client browser if BRERRRERRRAERRER ERE KERR EER ERR EKER ERE ER ERE KER ER EER ERE ERE REEREREREERE Be sure to modify below for your environment Following is an example by checking client IP address JE Accept the following IP address for AS 400 sign on bypass x 9 5 100 110 9 5 100 111 9 5 100 112 Then assign the user id password and program name program library EFE E eke k k ekeke ke e eke ke ke e e Re he IAA ke e he e e ke e e e e ke e e e e ke e H e AAA AIA kke k k kkk kk kkk change here for your logical char Accept_IP 9 5 100 110 if strstr Accept_IP
72. QtmhWrStout StdHdr OutLn QUSEC OutLn SIZE OutInf QtmhWrStout OutInf OutLn QUSEC OutLn SIZE OutMsg QtmhWrStout OutMsg OutLn QUSEC OutLn SIZE StdTr1 QtmhWrStout StdTr OutLn QUSEC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk F F F Point to the Database file in the WEBDB Library Open the database file Write the data that the user entered to the Database File Close the database file Delete the Override F F HF kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk EVAL CALL Parm Parm OPEN WRITE CLOSE EVAL CALL Parm Parm seton CmdLen SIZE OVRCMD QCMDEXC OVRCMD CmdLen CUSTPF custrec CUSTPF CmdLen SIZE DLTOVR QCMDEXC DLTOVR CmdLen Appendix A lr ILE RPG and ILE COBOL Sample CGI Programs 255 A 2 ILE Cobol Sample CGI Program CUSTINFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PROCESS APOST NOMONOPRC IDENTIFICATION DIVISION NOMONOPRC is required so that the called procedure names are not changed to UPPERCASE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Program Prompt user for mailing info and response Language ILE Cobol Description This program is used to process an HTML Form as input and add a record to a database It is a SAMPLE program APIs Used QtmhRdStin Read from Standard Input This
73. Running 159 4 9 1 Example URL Calling Net Data Macro 165 4 10 Migrating from DB2 WWW Connection to Net Data 166 4 11 Debug HTTP Server Setup for Net Data 166 4 12 Service and Support aoaaa aaa 168 Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 169 5 1 What is an HTML Gateway aaa aaa 170 5 2 Using the HTML Gateway in Application Development 172 5 3 IBM Workstation Gateway WSG aaaea aaa 173 5 9 1 Getting Started 4 20 ged tienes wh eee eRe ek ee aai 173 5 3 2 Workstation Gateway Server Jobs 177 5 3 3 Using Workstation Gateway 177 Contents V 5 4 Application Development with Workstation Gateway 181 5 4 1 Existing Applications Display Files 182 5 4 2 DDS to HTML Conversion 200000004 186 5 4 3 DDS HTML Supporto 187 5 4 4 Logon Exit Programs 191 5 5 Tips for using Workstation Gateway aoaaa aaa 194 5 6 I NET s Webulator 400 2 0 2 0 00000 196 5 6 1 Getting Started 2 4 6 ee ee Le ee E e we Oe ee eres Ge eo Es 196 5 6 2 Webulator 400 Sign On Methods 200 5 6 3 Using Webulator 400 aoaaa aaa 22 00 00 2042 201 5 7 Application Development with Webulator 400 2 204 57 Signing Off 2 0224 PALE bee 204 5 7 2 Existing Applications 2 0 0 0 0000004 207 5 7 3 DDS HTML Supporto 208 5 7 4 Additional Customization of Webulator
74. The AS 400 system runs CGI programs under the QTMHHTP1 user profile The QTMHHTP1 user profile must have authority to access all the objects accessed by the CGI programs Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 3 3 1 HTML Form Tags The following table contains a quick summary of tags and attributes you can use in your HTML documents inside FORM tag Tag lt FORM gt lt FORM gt Table 2 Page 1 of 2 HTML Form Tags Use A form You can have multiple forms within a document but forms cannot be nested METHOD An attribute of the lt FORM gt tag indicating the method with which the form input is given to the script that processes the form input Possible values are GET and POST ACTION lt INPUT gt TYPE An attribute of the lt FORM gt tag indicating the script to process the form input Contains a relative path or URL to the CGI program A form element An attribute of the lt INPUT gt tag indicating the type of form element Possible values are SUBMIT RESET TEXT RADIO CHECKBOX PASSWORD and HIDDEN SUBMIT creates a button to submit the form to the script that processes the input RESET creates a button that resets the default values of the form if any TEXT creates a single line text field RADIO creates a radio button CHECKBOX creates a check box PASSWORD creates a single line text field but the text is shown in encrypted form HIDDEN creates a form element that is not shown
75. The Java run time system verifies the bytecodes as they are downloaded from the network to ensure they are valid bytecodes and that the code does not violate any of the restrictions placed on Java applets by the JVM Java applets are restricted in what operations they can perform how they access memory and how they use the JVM The restrictions are in place to prevent a Java applet from gaining access to underlying operating system or data on the system Copyright IBM Corp 1997 221 6 1 2 Java Applications This section describes how to implement and serve Java applications 6 1 3 How Do I Serve Java Applets from the AS 400 System Once you have found or written an appropriate applet you can use it on your site There are three types of files available for downloading java files These are text files that contain the source code These are not required if you have the class files and do not want to modify the code class files These are binary files that contain the compiled Java source code bytecodes Each applet may require several class files Other files These are the various assorted files required to support the applet If you have obtained your applet from the Web the documentation should list these files Make sure you download all of them To serve the Java applet from your AS 400 system you can use either FTP or shared folders to place all of the class and supporting files into an AS 400 directory on the IFS
76. The Network File System This file system provides the user with access to data and objects that are stored on a remote NFS server Network file systems can be exported from an NFS server and dynamically mounted by NFS clients QNetWare The QNetWare file system This file system provides access to local or remote data and objects that are stored on a server that runs Novell NetWare 3 12 or 4 10 A user can dynamically mount NetWare file systems over existing local file systems Users and application programs can interact with any of the file systems through a common integrated file system interface This interface is optimized for the input output of stream data in contrast to the record input output provided through the data management interfaces A set of user interfaces commands menus and displays and application program interfaces APIs is provided for interacting with the file systems through this common interface 2 13 2 Which AS 400 File System Works Best 44 IBM s HTTP server can serve documents from the following file systems The AS 400 library system QSYS LIB e QDLS e The integrated file system root directory e QOpenSys You can also serve files from all other Integrated files systems installed on your AS 400 system for example QLANSrv However these file systems are more sophisticated to configure and we do not recommend them unless you have a burning need to do so We cannot provide a simple answe
77. WBLMACC CFG that is shipped with Webulator 400 contains a root directory entry with a sign on method of sign on display Note Sign on display was chosen because of its ease of setup but it does have some potential security considerations If you are not comfortable having a sign on display available even for a short period of time you should change the sign on type to a different value before restarting or reconfiguring Web Server 400 This value can be set through the sign on method field through option 10 of the WRKWWWDIR command or directly through the CHGWBLCFG command Valid Sign On Methods Method Result SIGN ON DISPLAY The standard AS 400 sign on display is shown USEAUTHENTICATION Presents a dialog box asking for your USERID and password These values are encoded before being sent to the server using the base64 encoding of MIME UUENCODED USER Automatically logs onto a specific user profile The first display for that AS 400 user profile is shown DISABLED Prevents logging in An error message is sent to the browser when you try to access the URL Add Additional Webulator 400 Directory Entries The sample Directory Based Configuration file WWWSERV CFG WBLMACC CFG that is shipped with Webulator 400 contains only the Webulator 400 root directory entry and no child directories You can optionally add more Webulator 400 directory entries by running the WRKWWWDIR command Note All Webulator 400 di
78. Webulator 400 configuration values are set to their default values when using this file b Set the Webulator 400 User File Path Field WBLUSRFILE You must set the path of the Webulator 400 user file if you plan to take advantage of the automatic sign on capabilities of Webulator 400 The easiest way to set up Webulator 400 to use automatic sign on is to reference the sample user file that is shipped with the Webulator 400 product This file can be used by setting the Webulator 400 User File Path field to WWWSERV CFG AUTH WBLUSR CFG Note This file is shipped with no entries since it is not possible to know the USERIDs or passwords on your system You must add your own entries to this file using the WRKWBLUSR command before it is useable by Webulator 400 Note It is beneficial to use the sample user file because of the authority settings that are shipped with this file c Set the Maximum Webulator 400 Sessions Field WBLMAXSSN You can optionally set the maximum number of simultaneous Webulator 400 sessions that are allowed If you do not specify this entry a default of 20 sessions is used d Set the Disable Webulator 400 Field DISABLEWBL You must set the Disable Webulator 400 entry to NO to configure the server to automatically start Webulator 400 during its startup process 4 Evaluate the Sign on Method Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 197 198 The sample Directory Based Configuration file WWWSERV CFG
79. Workstation Gateway The default is a TCP port of 5061 Note lt appears that this port number cannot be changed 5 3 1 2 Further Workstation Gateway Configuration This section discusses some specific configuration and software requirements for Workstation Gateway For more complete documentation of the detailed installation or configuration of the product you should refer to the following publications 1 TCP IP Configuration and Reference Version 3 SC41 3420 04 2 Cool Title About the AS 400 and the Internet SG24 4815 01 5 3 1 3 Configure TCP IP WSG CFGTCPWSG Main Menu The easiest way to configure the Workstation Gateway is to use the menus The following examples show the sequence of the configuration commands The following display appears if the CFGTCPWSG command is entered on the command line or if CFGTCPAPP option 15 is selected m Configure TCP IP Workstation Gateway System SYSNMO11 Select one of the following 1 Change workstation gateway attributes Related options 10 Configure HTTP 11 Work with auto configure virtual devices 12 Work with limit security officer device access Selection or command gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel Figure 79 CFGTCPWSG Display e Option 1 Prompts the CHGWSGA CL command e Option 10 Calls the CFGTCPHTTP CL command e Option 11 Calls WRKSYSVAL SYSVAL QAUTOVRT e Option 12 Calls WRKSYSVAL SYSVAL QLMTSECOFR Chapter 5 HT
80. accessed in the specified mode function function_name Registry registry_name already exists A call to a system function failed This is an internal error reported to Net Data that may require user interaction or it may be a temporary system error that is not appropriate for Net Data to handle If this problem persists report the problem to your software service representative A flat file interface built in function could not access the specified file because it was in use by this or another process and could not be shared in the specified mode A Web registry built in function could not create a Web registry because the specified registry already existed 3002 function function_name Registry registry_name is in use by another process or does not exist A Web registry built in function could not delete the specified registry The registry was in use by another process The registry could not be found 3003 3004 3005 function function_name Registry entry registry_entry already exists function function_name Registry entry registry_entry cannot be found function function_name Registry registry_name cannot be found A Web registry built in function could not add an entry to the specified registry because the specified entry already existed A Web registry built in function could not remove or retrieve an entry from the specified registr
81. action cgi bin custinfo pgm gt lt h1 gt Customer Information Satisfaction Survey lt h1 gt lt br gt lt hr gt Name lt INPUT type text name name SIZE 30 gt lt br gt Address1 lt INPUT type text name addr1 SIZE 30 gt lt br gt Address2 lt INPUT type text name addr2 SIZE 30 gt lt br gt City lt INPUT type text name city SIZE 25 gt lt br gt State lt INPUT type text name state SIZE 2 gt Zip lt Input type text name zip size 5 gt lt Input type text name zipp4 size 4 gt lt br gt Phone lt input type text name phac size 3 gt lt input type text name phpre size 3 gt lt input type text name phnum size 4 gt Ext lt input type text name phext size 4 gt lt br gt E Mail Address lt input type text name eaddr size 45 gt lt br gt I would like to correspond via lt input type radio name mai l Value E Checked gt E Mail lt input type radio name mail Value S gt Surface Mail lt input type radio name mai l Value P gt Phone Call lt hr gt If you have used our service in the past please complete the following form lt br gt How satisfied are you with our service to date lt br gt lt s gt lt li gt lt input type radio name sat value 1 gt Very Satisfied lt li gt lt input type radio name sat value 2 gt Satisfied lt li gt lt
82. already there add the Enable GET and Enable POST H directives to the section of the configuration file where you enable methods With the directives in the file your display is similar to the display shown in the following figure Work with HTTP Configuration System SYSNAMO1 Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 13 Insert Sequence Opt Number Entry 00010 e RK RK RR KK KK RK RK RK KK KK RK RK KK KK Kk A 00020 HTTP CONFIGURATION FOR NET DATA TESTING 00030 00040 HostName sysnam01 location company com 00050 Port 80 00060 00070 Methods Enabled 00080 00090 Enable GET 00100 Enable POST H 00110 00120 finn ad EEE EEE E EA More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print List F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom F19 Edit Sequence Figure 72 Get and Post Statements Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 161 162 Add the Map and Exec statements shown in Figure 73 on page 162 This display shows the directives after they have been added Work with HTTP Configuration System SYSNAMO1 Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 13 Insert Sequence Opt Number Entry 00130 00140 Mapping Pass Rules Executables 00150 00160 EJ Map cgi bin db2www QSYS LIB CGI LIB DB2WWW PGM 00170 Map CGI BIN DB2WWW QSYS LIB CGI LIB DB2WWW PGM 00180 00190
83. and well known companies are a favorite target for intruders Being a small company should be of no consolation Intruders know that small businesses are less likely to be Internet savvy Tools widely available on the Internet enable new systems to be discovered quickly The threat is serious and no company should attach a system to the Internet without understanding the risks involved Most of the Internet servers run on UNIX based systems And it is widely accepted that the AS 400 system has strong security features Do these capabilities make the AS 400 system immune from attacks from the Internet Unfortunately networks in general and TCP IP protocols and applications used by the Internet in particular have inherent security issues that are problematic to all kind of systems Technical insufficiency is one source that makes an Internet server vulnerable However bear in mind that another source of threats is human errors such as incorrect configuration or careless handling of passwords And those risks are independent from any hardware platform 2 15 1 Related Publications Securing Your AS 400 from Harm on the Internet SG24 4929 discusses security considerations when attaching an AS 400 system to the Internet Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet SG24 4815 helps you to understand how to use and implement functions and features available with OS 400 V3R2 and V3R7 and the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities 400 also known as Internet
84. and you want it to be called during the OnLoad event Your custom HTML header should look similar to this lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Webulator 400 Demo lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY OnLoad InitForm gt lt SCRIPT LANGUAGE JAVASCRIPT gt lt a function InitForm some JavaScript statements SetFocus return 1 gt lt SCRIPT gt If you choose to create a custom plain text header file Webulator 400 uses the standard Webulator 400 header followed immediately by the plain text header in a Preformatted text section 5 7 3 4 HTML Footers The standard Webulator 400 header contains the lt BODY gt and lt HTML gt entries e Webulator 400 allows you to replace the standard footer with either an HTML or plain text custom footer This feature allows you to control what appears below the 5250 terminal data in the HTML forms For example you can include a link to your company s home page or an address for sending e mail If you choose to create a custom HTML footer file it must include the following tags Optional BODY elements lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Note All embedded file references must be qualified to the Web Server 400 document root by including a leading slash in the file name Failure to do this may result in broken links m Example The following example footer places a link to a home page and a mail address for the local WebMaster lt
85. attached workstation running its own JVM The workstation can interpret and display the java awt graphical components This allows AS 400 programs to have graphical interfaces using the standard Java language on the AS 400 system In addition plans include integration of other Java packages with OS 400 components for both ease of use and improved performance All of the integration and performance work is being done under the covers of OS 400 without compromising portability of the Java code Some AS 400 specific classes are also planned that are not part of the JDK itself but are supplied as a convenience to programmers who want to access more traditional AS 400 application environments from Java These classes provide access to unique AS 400 features such as data queues record level database I O and traditional programming languages such as CL and RPG The unique single level store architecture is also being exploited to give Java objects on the AS 400 system an advantage not available on any other platform Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview 235 7 5 4 Summary Java objects on the AS 400 system will be full fledged system objects allowing them to be persistent shared secure backed up and restored This allows the AS 400 system to offer persistent Java objects with performance and support that is unparalleled in the industry The AS 400 single level store technology permits Java objects to be stored in their object fo
86. c CALL QCMDEXC PARM c PARM c MOVE ON IN99 99 OutBuff OutBuffLn OVRARR CMD 80 CMD L INLR These are the APIs used in subroutines to keep the main processing simple They do not need to be SUBRs Subroutine to Get Environment Variable c GETENV BEGSR Cc CALLB APIEnVar c parm c parm C parm c parm c parm c parm c ENDSR gt Gl C Parse subroutine PARSE BEGSR E CALLB APICvtDB Cc parm c parm c parm Remember to code your External DS name ENBuff ENBuffLn ENActLn ENVarName ENVarLn QUSEC DBFileName DBBuf f DBBuffLn The API returns your data in this structure The field names are in the structure kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c parm ORDASDS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk parm parm parm parm ENDSR This is the STD OUT SUBR Cc STDOUT BEGSR c callb c parm c c AE e APIStdOut parm parm c ENDSR CTDATA OVRDBF DBDSLn DBActLn DBRespCd QUSEC OUTBuff OUTBuffLn QUSEC OVRDBF FILE HTMLO MBR 1234567890 LVLCHK NO OVRSCOPE JOB DLTOVR FILE HTMLO LVL JOB Figure 38 Part 5 of 5 ILE RPG Program ORDAS400G Method GET 3 12 2 Source Code RPG Program ORDAS400P ILE RPG Program Example for the Method POST The logic of this program is identical with the program in Figure 38 on page 103 Only three parts are replaced Hi by H O
87. can be created without having to consider green screen output Further details of the methods of application enhancement are discussed in Section 5 4 Application Development with Workstation Gateway on page 181 and Section 5 7 Application Development with Webulator 400 on page 204 5 3 IBM Workstation Gateway WSG Workstation Gateway is the 5250 HTML gateway from IBM available on the AS 400 You can use your current applications or even develop new Web applications using such tools as RPG COBOL DDS ILE C etc 5 3 1 Getting Started This section explores the WSG support available on the AS 400 It describes in details how to configure and use the WSG to build your Web applications 5 3 1 1 Starting the Workstation Gateway Server Important Note Some of the examples discussed here are taken from the redbook Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet SG24 4815 01 You might first want to install the ITSO Company demonstration and other AS 400 Web based applications from the CD ROM that came with this redbook Please see Appendix A Installing the ITSO Company Demo in the Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet for instructions on how to get your AS 400 system up and running right away Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 173 174 m Important Note Install the following PTFs for licensed program 5763 TC1 before using the Workstation Gateway e For V3R2 apply SF37790 e For V3R7 appl
88. column value was passed that was less than or equal to zero Return Code 1008 Message Text function function_name Value parm_value is outside of table bounds Error Condition One of these conditions exists A program attempted to modify a table s row or column value but the row or column value received was less than 0 or greater than the maximum number of rows allowed in the table e A row or column value was received as input to a built in function but the value received was less than 0 or greater than the current number of rows or columns in the table 1009 function function name Variable string is not in the correct format The syntax of the data returned by a system or Perl program is not correct One of these conditions exists An equal sign was not found A beginning quote was not found An ending quote was not found A space separator between values was not found 1010 2000 2001 function function_name Not all requested data could be returned function function_name The requested file filename was not found function function_name The requested file filename could not be opened in the specified mode A table was specified as an output parameter but the number of rows of data returned by the language environment was greater than the maximum number of rows allowed for the table Data was written to the table unti
89. com www5250 the syntax is similar to this www xyz com www5250 KEYWORD1 VALUE amp KEYWORD2 VALUE Spaces are not allowed inside the query string you must substitute a for all embedding spaces The following query string keywords are available PGM Allows you to specify a value for the initial program to run MENU Allows you to specify a value for the initial menu to run LIB Allows you to specify a value for the initial library FIELD1 Allows you to specify the value that is returned to the AS 400 system for the first input capable field that is encountered When this keyword is specified Webulator 400 simulates pressing ENTER for all displays up to and including the first display with an input field It is your responsibility to ensure that the first display with an input field can properly handle the value being passed to it Restrictions The Sign on Method value must be one of USER ALLOWSIGNONOVERRIDE or USEAUTHENTICATION ALLOWSIGNONOVERRIDE for Webulator 400 to recognize the PGM MENU or LIB query string keywords There are no restrictions on using the FIELD1 keyword Considerations Care should be taken before enabling the ALLOWSIGNONOVERRIDE feature When this feature is enabled it allows you to override any of the initial sign on values based on an HTML link This may be useful if you want to create a series of HTML links to some of your most popular applications but you do not want to create separate user profiles
90. data displayed before table row data 2 ROW block Contains HTML and table variables displayed once per row of the table 3 Footer Contains data displayed after table row data If you do not want to display any table output from the ROW block just leave it empty When Net Data processes a FUNCTION block a call is made to a language environment and data is returned Net Data processes the REPORT block Inside the REPORT block several implicitly defined variables are made available to you to access the data in the Web macro table that is used in the report These variables are described in Table 12 on page 132 Header and footer information is not explicitly specified as such in a REPORT block Net Data simply assumes that everything it finds before a ROW block is header information and everything it finds after the ROW block is footer information As with the HTML block the Web macro processor treats everything in the header ROW block and footer sections as HTML and sends that data to the browser unless it recognizes the data as a Web macro construct 1 The header information is processed and displayed once 2 ROW block information is processed once for each row in the table 3 The footer information is processed and displayed once You can decide not to display any data by specifying an empty REPORT block this way REPORT 0 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Or you can display a def
91. different files for Windows 3 1 or Windows 95 The download can be found at the following URL http ww inetmi com pubs webulate keyplug htm 3 Follow the instructions provided in the documentation at the preceding site and with the downloaded files Note You must close your browser for the plugin to be recognized 4 Configure Web Server 400 as described in the documentation Using the Plugin When you enter a URL to send your browser to a Webulator session add the query string KEYBOARD Y to activate the plugin An example URL might be host www5250 KEYBOARD Y For usability it is recommended that you enable JavaScript for any Webulator URLs for which you plan to use the keyboard plugin This attempts to automatically set the keyboard focus to the correct form control reducing your need to use the mouse The keys F1 to F24 work as normal press shift to use F12 F24 To cause the AS 400 system to roll up or down hold the Control key while pressing the Page up or Page down key Also when in a multi line edit control text area you must hold down the Control key for the Enter key to be recognized Press the Escape key for attention and hold the Shift key down while pressing Escape for system request You see a combo box a push button and the Webulator keyboard icon when using the plugin The combo box contains the virtual keys you have defined for the current URL You can still limit the keys available to a user or change de
92. elements are passed back to the HTTP server using standard output Thus in its simplest form a CGI program can be defined as a program that 1 Can be called as an executable and run as achild process of the HTTP server this does not preclude the use of interpretive languages such as REXX and PERL In this case their respective interpreters run as child processes of the HTTP server Note The CGI program on the AS 400 system runs within the same job as the HTTP server 2 Is able to read from the standard input 3 Is able to access environment variables 4 Is able to write to the standard output 5 Is able to access command line arguments passed to main CGI programs can be as simple or as complex as the programmer wants to make them but clearly the intent of the interface is to allow simple programs or scripts to be developed quickly Given this definition of the CGI interface the following characteristics are for CGI programs Copyright IBM Corp 1997 57 58 They can be written in compiled programming languages or interpreted scripts They can be simple five or six line programs that serve a specialized function or generalized business applications that do complex calculations and database transactions for example order processing applications They are portable As with any programming model portability is a matter of degree To the extent that the program uses any operating system unique interfac
93. enforcing I T security policy and minimizing the opportunity for security configuration errors e Provides privacy by preventing internal network information form being accessed through the Internet e Logs traffic to and from the Internet allowing network use and misuse to be monitored e Provides flexible firewall configuration enabling support for various security policies The administrator decides which services should be permitted and which should be blocked 7 1 2 The AS 400 Advantage Most security experts agree that it is best to run firewall functions on a separate processor from other system functions In the past that meant a separate system had to be introduced into the network The unique AS 400 firewall technology is based upon an Integrated PC Server which provides processor separation without requiring the introduction of a new system into the network Copyright IBM Corp 1997 225 AS 400 Integrated Firewall cc Internal Secure Network Public Web Server Optional Figure 94 AS 400 Firewall Technology Preview 7 1 3 AS 400 Technology Advantages 226 Application programs and security programs are run on separate processor which eliminates the possibility of processors interfering with each other Compromised security programs running on the firewall cannot directly affect the main processor The software and configuration information used by the firewall processor resides on a read only disk Thi
94. following commands need to be issued CHGAUT OBJ WWW USER QTMHHTP1 DTAAUT RX CHGAUT OBJ WWW macro USER QTMHHTP1 DTAAUT RX CHGAUT OBJ WWW macro USER QTMHHTP1 DTAAUT RX CHGAUT OBJ QSYS LIB WWW LIB USER QTMHHTP1 DTAAUT RX CHGAUT OBJ QSYS LIB WWW LIB MACRO FILE USER QTMHHTP1 DTAAUT RX Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 4 9 1 Example URL Calling Net Data Macro This is how the AS 400 HTTP server configuration and the Net Data configuration work together to build the path to the Macro and which HTML section the Macro will execute Netscape Web Macro Template tip wwe yoursys com nd NDMACRO MBR INFUT Net Data looks in the INI file DB2WWW mbr for the MACRO_PATH entry then appends this to it Path to the HTTP Server Maps and Passes the path to the Net Data Program DB2WWW PGM Work with HTTP Configuration 340 map nd QSYS LIB NDCGI LIB DB2WWW PGM 350 map ND QSYS LIB NDCGI LIB DB2WWW PGM The exec Statement allows the HTTP Server to run the DB2WWW PGM 360 exec QSYS LIB NDCGI LIB NDCGI INI DB2WWW 0001 00 INCLUDE_PATH QSYS LIB NDMACROS LIB NDMACROS FILE 0002 00 MACRO_PATH QSYS LIB NDMACROS LIB NDMACROS FILE 0003 00 EXEC_PATH OSYS LIB QSYS LIB NDCGI LIB 0004 00 ENVIRONMENT DTW_REXX QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHREXX SRVPGM 0005 00 ENVIRONMENT DTW_SQL QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHSQL SRVPGM 000
95. g lparm amp g ltoget amp g 1recvd alldataln alldataln g lrecvd alldata alldata substr g 1parm 1 g 1recvd g lcontent_length g lcontent_length g ltoget end end If the stdin is empty KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKAKKKAA if alldata alldata then do alldata alldataln 0 return end Translate to blank KKXKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKAX alldata translate alldata g lwork alldata copy input data to work data 0 0 Separate the variable value pairs ampersand character and separate the variable and value equal character KR Ae e e Ae KERR RRR KEE EKER ERE RRR ER ER ER ERE RK ER ERERERERERERERERERE vr do i 1 while g lwork lt gt parse var g lwork data i amp g lwork parse va value pairs parse var data i varname i value i parse var and value data 0 data 0 1 increment variable count end return A Sayh subroutine This subroutine writes the data to standard out by calling the subroutine stdout First it checks the line length and if it is larger than the maximum number of characters allowed in a line without a newline the sayh subroutine cuts the line and calls the stdout function to insert a newline character at the end of the line and write the string Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet If the option FLUSH appears in the argument list see the stdout subroutine called by sayh This
96. imagemap file Parameters passed to application 2xy Figure 12 Mapping of Image Map URL to HTTP Configuration Note More information on image mapping and image map requests on the AS 400 system is available in the TCP IP Configuration and Reference Version 3 SC41 3420 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 10 2 Server Side Image Maps Considerations More and more browsers do support client side image maps today so the urgency for providing this on the server is almost gone However a server such as the AS 400 system especially some of the faster server models 50S 53S can provide a much faster solution for image maps than a typical PC can do On the other hand if there are many of these kinds of requests the server is quite busy doing these operations and it might be worthwhile to move this to the browsers 2 11 Netscape Microsoft IE IBM Web Explorer Spyglass Currently the most popular browser for the World Wide Web is Netscape s Navigator developed by Netscape Communications Corporation Netscape has become so popular that using Netscape and using the Web have become synonymous to many people However despite the fact that Netscape has the lion s share of the market it is not the only browser on the Web It is important for you as an Internet application programmer to make a distinction between the information on the Web and the browser used to view it Assuming Netscape is the only browser in u
97. in the local variable set and then in the global variable set If the variable exists in both sets for example it was specified as a function parameter and on a previous DEFINE the local set takes precedence Function calls in the executable text of the FUNCTION block are processed The context of the function call does not matter to Net Data within executable text For example if your executable text contains conditional logic and a Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 125 126 function call exists within a particular leg of that conditional logic it is processed by Net Data regardless of the logic This is because Net Data processes the function call before the executable text 5 The variables in the local set are passed to the language environment along with the text of the executable statements The language environment is responsible for passing the IN and INOUT variables to the language processor interpreting the executable statements or invoking the language processor to execute the statements and retrieving any OUT or INOUT variables back from the language processor when the program completes 6 When the language environment returns to Net Data any OUT or INOUT parameters are obtained from the parameter list and their values are used to replace the values of their corresponding arguments in the local and global variable sets If there is a RETURNS clause the value of the return variable is saved with the FUNCTION block in
98. input defined as a series of keywords and their values into a buffer that is formatted according to a DDS file specification Table 8 Convert to DB QtmhCvtDb API Description 1 0 Type Example Qualified database file name Input Char 20 FILESAMPL LIBLSAMPLE Input string Char name fred amp addrees center street Length of input string Input Binary 4 31 Response variable Output Char FILESAMPL Length of response variable Input Binary 4 length of FILESAMPL Length of response Output Binary 4 Size required to contain the entire response available Response code output binary 4 0 AIl keywords translated 1 The database file contains extra fields 2 The CGI input contains extra fields 3 Combination of 1 and 2 4 Different data types Error code I O Char QUSEC data structure see Figure 28 on page 83 The following display shows a piece of RPG code using the QtmhCvtDb API Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 85 Copy QUSEC structure copy qsysinc qrpglesrc qusec D QUSEDO1 17 116 Variables for QtmhCvtDb DDbFi 1 eName S DInData S 32767 options varsize DInActLn S 10i 0 DDSBuf fer S 32767 options varsize DDBDSLn S 10i 0 DDBActLn S 10i 0 DDBRespCd S 10i 0 Cc eval qusbprv 16 Format the input data into the externally described data structure c CALLB QtmhCvtDb parm DDbFileName Cc parm DInData Cc parm DInActLn Cc parm DDSBuffer
99. into the 5250 data stream by various display I O commands such as the EXFMT command in RPG Note Webulator 400 is also unable to support AS 400 break messages AS 400 break messages are messages that interrupt the current display and require some sort of response at a minimum an Enter key to return to the previous display Break messages cause Webulator 400 to be out of synchronization with the AS 400 system and cause unpredictable results Extra displays are occasionally sent to the browser Some host programs send a write read screen I O request followed immediately by a cancel read operation The end result of these operations are the same as a write request These requests are handled seamlessly by traditional emulators because of their constant communication link with the AS 400 system Webulator 400 has a little more difficulty handling these I O requests Webulator 400 verifies that no Cancel requests have been generated by the AS 400 system before sending a display to the browser Unfortunately there is no guarantee that the Cancel request is received before the display is sent to the browser This means that certain write read cancel requests get past Webulator 400 s checking and are sent to the browser If this happens all you have to do is press a Virtual Keyboard button and the next display is sent to the browser Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 9 AS 400 Cursor Control Keywords are ignored Since Webulat
100. is compatible with UNIX based open system standards such as POSIX and XPG Similar to the root file system it takes advantage of the stream file and directory support that is provided by the integrated file system In addition it supports case sensitive object names QSYS LIB The library file system This file system supports the AS 400 library structure This file system provides access to database files and all of the other AS 400 object types that the library support manages This is also the only file system where AS 400 executable objects can be stored Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 43 QDLS The document library services file system This file system supports the folders structure It provides access to documents and folders QLANSrv The LAN Server file system This file system provides access to the same directories and files that are accessible through the LAN Server licensed program It allows users of the 0S 400 file server and AS 400 applications to use the same data as LAN Server clients QOPT The QOPT file system This file system provides access to stream data that is stored on optical media QFileSvr 400 The QFileSvr 400 file system This file system provides access to other file systems that reside on remote AS 400 systems UDFS The user defined file system This file system resides on the Auxiliary Storage Pool ASP of the user s choice The user creates and manages this file system NFS
101. like a normal read from a screen Refer to the TCP IP Configuration manual for API Parms F F F F E F kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c EVAL DBRecLn SIZE DBBuff c CALLB QtmhCvtDb c Parm DBFILE c Parm INBuff c Parm INActLn c Parm DBBuff c Parm DBRecLn c Parm DBCvtLn c Parm RspCode c Parm QUSEC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Setup the output message based on the mail selection MOVE the input data to the output buffer to format it kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c SELECT c when MAIL E c MOVEL P EMAILM omsg c when MAIL S c MOVEL P SMAILM omsg c when MAIL P c MOVEL P PMAILM omsg c ENDSL 254 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 00 000000 NnNNO 00000900000 N00NNNnA_ONnAOAO_aADAONN 0000000 NnNnNnOnNN NAME NAMEo ADDR1 ADDR1o ADDR2 ADDR20 CITY CITYo STATE STATEO ZIP ZIPo ZIPP4 ZIPP40 PHAC PHACo PHPRE PHPREo PHNUM PHNUMo PHEXT PHEXTo EADDR EADDRo kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Write the data to the user Write the standard header the user data and the standard trailer kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk EVAL CALLB Parm Parm Parm EVAL CALLB Parm Parm Parm EVAL CALLB Parm Parm Parm EVAL CALLB Parm Parm Parm OutLn SIZE StdHdr
102. limit on the number of rows this table can contain To specify a table with no limit on the number of rows use the default or specify ALL as shown in these examples DEFINE myTable2 TABLE DEFINE myTable3 TABLE ALL A table can be passed between functions by referring to the table variable name The individual elements of a table can be referred to in a REPORT block of a function Table variables are usually used for output from an SQL function and input to a report but you can pass them as IN OUT or INOUT parameters to any Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 131 non SQL function Tables can only be passed to SQL functions as OUT parameters A table can be represented graphically Row 1 Value 1 1 ku Value 1 P Value i j Row N Value N 1 cen Value N P Fedi FedPp Figure 54 Net Data Table View The column names and field values in a table are addressed as array elements with an origin index of 1 rather than the standard C and C language convention of starting arrays at an index of 0 4 4 5 Implicitly Defined Variables Defining a table variable causes Net Data to implicitly define two sets of variables that you can use to refer to the column names and field contents of the table One set of these implicit variables is referred to in the REPORT block of a FUNCTION block in a Web macro and the other set is referred to in 132 programs called from variables in any o
103. method POST action main2 gt lt Push current panel onto my queue in case gt lt we need to find our way back gt myPush mainl mainQ lt input type hidden name mainQ value mainQ gt Your First Name lt input type text name firstName maxlength 12 size 12 value firstName gt lt p gt lt This table horizontally aligns the buttons gt lt TABLE gt lt TR gt lt TD gt lt POST hidden variables gt lt input type hidden name astName value lastName gt lt input type hidden name Serial value Serial gt lt input type submit name nextButton value Next gt lt form gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt This is the back form gt myPop prevPanel tempQ lt form method POST action prevPanel gt lt input type hidden name mainQ value tempQ gt lt POST hidden variables gt SINCLUDE itsoexm2 mbr lt input type submit name backButton value Back gt lt form gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt lt body gt lt html gt o kkkkkkkkkkkkk HTML Section main2 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SHTML main2 lt html gt lt head gt lt META HTTP EQUIV Expires CONTENT Mon 01 Jan 1990 13 00 00 GMT gt lt TITLE gt Last Screen lt TITLE gt lt head gt lt body bgcolor ffffff gt lt b gt Last Screen lt b gt assign mainQ tempQ
104. on the Internet Table 2 Page 2 of 2 HTML Form Tags Tag Use SIZE An attribute of the lt SELECT gt tag that causes the list of items to be displayed as a scrolling list with the number of items indicated by SIZE visible lt OPTION gt Individual items within a lt SELECT gt element SELECTED An attribute of the lt OPTION gt tag indicating that this item is selected by default lt TEXTAREA gt A text entry field with multiple lines NAME An attribute of the lt TEXTAREA gt tag Indicates the name of the variable that holds the eventual value of this element as submitted to the script ROWS An attribute of the lt TEXTAREA gt tag indicating the height of the text field in rows COLS An attribute of the lt TEXTAREA gt tag indicating the width of the text field in characters 3 4 GET Method lt HTML gt lt METHOD GET HTTP SERVER Environment 4 Variables HTML Doc or Redirection or other types of files Env Variable Query_string d P stdout stdout CGI BiSa RPG COBOL PGM fo ca ssaa Figure 23 AS 400 CGI Using the GET Method As you can see in Figure 23 the flow is the same as in the basic chart for CGI Figure 17 on page 59 The HTML document displayed by the browser uses lt FORM METHOD GET When the GET method is used the input parameters are passed to the called CGI program in one of two ways 1 In command line parameters program call
105. on your server 32 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Beginning of data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 001 00 circle 101 123 42 ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm SAMERICA 002 00 circle 56 46 45 ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm NAMERICA 003 00 circle 180 98 41 ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm AFRICA 004 00 circle 265 50 47 ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm ASIA 005 00 poly 218 10 215 58 138 49 ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm EUROPE 006 00 poly 346 68 184 170 347 170 ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm OCEANIA 007 00 rect 4 3 351 177 ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm OCEANIA 008 00 default ITSOIC 400 imvh301 htm OCEANIA kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk End of data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Figure 11 Image Map Coordinates This example shows circular polygon and rectangular shapes and their defined URLs The server takes the coordinates from a user s mouse click and steps through the map file to determine if the click is within any hotspots As soon as the first match is found the corresponding URL is used to redirect a document to the user s Web browser If no matches are found a default URL that you specify in the image map file is returned Notice that the last line in the file is a default statement This might be helpful so that if a user clicks on a part of the image that has not been mapped the user is sent to a defined default area It is normal to mix and match circles polygons and rectangles in the same map file Although you should try t
106. p gt rexx1 input_data This line contains a call to function rexx1 passing the argument input_data lt p gt lt hr gt lt p gt lt a href gt Home page lt a href input gt Previous page lt body gt lt html gt o Figure 48 HTML Section Output The same as the INPUT section this section is standard HTML enhanced with macro statements to substitute variables and a function call Again the page_ title variable is substituted into the title statement And as before this section contains a function call In this case it calls the function rexx1 and passes to it the contents of the variable input_data that it received from the INPUT form You can pass any number of variables to and from a function The function definition determines the number of variables passed and their type This is the output as displayed in the browser Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 121 Netscape Web Macro Template ttp Awe yoursys comlnd INDIMACRO MBR output Output Page Horns page Previous page Figure 49 Browser View of HTML Output 4 3 Generating HTML in a Web Macro The ability to access data and applications and to present that information as HTML on a Web browser is what makes Net Data so powerful 4 3 1 HTML Blocks 122 The HTML block and the functions that get invoked from the HTML block are the sections of the Web macro that generate HTML output to
107. parameters Parameters are passed to the CGI program using command line arguments program call parameters only when the data in the request URL beyond the first question mark contains no equal signs This is called an ISINDEX In the URL for an ISINDEX request the CGI parameters are positional being separated by plus signs The server parses the parameters and puts each parameter according to its position in the string into corresponding parameters of the CGI program call Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 69 70 An example of a URL is http sysnm003 sysnmaa ibm com CGILIB INDEX PGM valuel value2 value3 2 In the environment variable QUERY_STRING If the parameter string of the URL beyond the first question mark contains an equal sign the entire parameter string is put into the QUERY_STRING environment variable This is the most normal case An example for the URL is http sysnm003 sysnmaa ibm com CGILIB FORM PGM kwd1 value1l amp kwd2 value2 amp kwd3 va ue3 Note The assumption is made that CGILIB has been mapped to a library in QSYS LIB containing CGI programs with the MAP and Exec directives for the AS 400 HTTP server The mapping directives allow the Web Administrator on the AS 400 system to define a virtual hierarchy of Web resources that is presented by the AS 400 HTTP server This virtual hierarchy is independent of the physical file system or systems on w
108. performance of the technology preview is slower than what is seen on comparable platforms using JIT or other optimizing technology The technology preview is not intended for application deployment But because Java can be written on any platform and deployed on any other platform the preview can be used to run programs written on other platforms without modification or recompilation The true portability of Java is highlighted as the code moves from any platform and executes without change on the AS 400 system Java applications can also be written on client workstations today that access AS 400 programs and data There are a number of different options available to do this Client applets or applications can use Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet JDBC to access AS 400 database The java net sockets to access server applications on the AS 400 system e Native methods to call out to other client server access services At this time many of these options entail writing middleware to connect to the AS 400 system Java client extensions will be available in the future that can be used to access AS 400 programs and data from a Java applet or application on the client For information on other object oriented or network computing options available for the AS 400 system today visit the AS 400 Partners In Development Web page 7 5 3 1 Strategy and Direction for Java on the AS 400 System Java is a key application development l
109. process the function call There are three special values that can be specified for return_code default If RETURN_CODE is greater than 0 and an exact match is not specified the information in this message statement is used to process the function call default If RETURN CODE is less than 0 and an exact match is not specified the information in this message statement is used to process the function call default If RETURN_CODE does not equal 0 and an exact match is not specified and the default for RETURN_CODE greater than 0 or default for RETURN_CODE less than 0 value is not specified the information in this message statement is used to process the function call This string is sent to the Web browser if the RETURN_CODE matches the return_code value in this message s message statement Message_text Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Table 15 Page 2 of 2 Message Block Definitions Action This determines what action Net Data takes if the RETURN_CODE matches the return_code in this message statement There are two valid values exit Net Data exits immediately continue Net Data continues processing the Web macro in the function block it was calling This is optional If no action is specified the default is exit A MESSAGE block can have a global or a local scope If the MESSAGE block is defined in a FUNCTION block it is scoped locally to that FUNCTION block
110. set correctly Use WRKWWDIR to check the entry e Everything looks fine but pressing a key just elicits a beep You probably have loaded the beta version of the plugin but are still running against the test version of PTF WBL110001 Get the latest PTF installed on your AS 400 system The beta version of the plugin is only compatible with the release version of PTF WBL110001 5 7 Application Development with Webulator 400 There are a few things you should keep in mind when preparing to include your AS 400 application on the Internet They all involve the access and availability of your system and its objects to the general Internet public Keep in mind that this applies only if you are planning to allow access outside your business through the Internet or any other means If you are maintaining a closed Intranet system you can follow your normal security precautions First you probably want to restrict users who sign on through Webulator 400 to the applications that you have selected for their use This means that the user should not be given a command line The command line allows users to enter commands including commands that you may not want them to execute such as the CALL command to call a program or STRPASTHR to access another system At minimum the SNDMSG command in the wrong user s hands can be a real nuisance This includes the availability of the command line on some IBM provided displays An operation as simple as th
111. that have those applications as their initial program In this case you can use the query string keywords to override which application is called based on the HTML link regardless of the user profile that was used to sign on Note This flexibility does not come without additional security considerations If you enable the ALLOWSIGNONOVERRIDE feature any user that has access to that URL can also override the query string keywords to run any program that Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 201 202 their user profile has access to Please keep this in mind before enabling this feature There are no security considerations associated with the FIELD1 query string keyword The inclusion of this keyword on the query string is the equivalent to the user typing it in themselves They are not able to get access to any additional AS 400 programs or functions by using this feature You may find this feature useful if you have a URL with a sign on method of USER that brings up an AS 400 menu as its first display In this case you can create a series of HTML links to the same URL but with a different query string FIELD1 value that automatically selects the appropriate menu option for the user r__ Examples The following examples assume that your Webulator 400 URL is www xyz com www5250 If you want the user to automatically start the program called MYPROG in the MYLIB library use the following URL www xyz com www5250 PGM MYPROG amp
112. the browser Whenever Net Data is invoked an HTML block must be specified What is contained in this block controls the rest of the Net Data invocation Any valid HTML may appear in an HTML block In addition INCLUDE statements function calls and variable references can be in an HTML block A common use of HTML blocks in a Web macro is shown by this sample Web macro FEI IO IIE I Define Section FOI IA IK EEE EEEE EEE DEFINE DATABASE LOCAL TABLE ASOLIB HARDWARE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HTML Section Input RRAERRERAEAERKER KER EERE HTML INPUT lt H1 gt Hardware Query Form lt H1 gt lt HR gt lt FORM METHOD POST ACTION OUTPUT gt lt dl gt lt dt gt What hardware do you want to list lt dd gt lt input type radio name hdware value MON checked gt Monitors lt dd gt lt input type radio name hdware value PNT gt Pointing devices lt dd gt lt input type radio name hdware value wr s PRT gt Printers Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet wr s lt dd gt lt input type radio name hdware value SCN gt Scanners lt d1 gt lt input type submit value Submit gt lt FORM gt o FUNCTION DTW_SQL queryHardware SELECT MODNO COST DESCRIP FROM TABLE WHERE TYPE hdware REPORT lt B gt Here is the list you requested lt B gt lt BR gt ROW lt HR gt N1 V1 N2 V
113. the language processor Function name This is the name of the FUNCTION block The FUNCTION block is executed by referencing this name elsewhere in the Web macro preceded by an at sign Multiple FUNCTION blocks can exist with the same name They must all have identical parameter lists When the function is called all FUNCTION blocks with the same name are executed in the order that they are defined in the Web macro Usage IN OUT or INOUT This indicates whether the parameter is passed into or received back from the FUNCTION block or both The usage type applies to all of the following parameters in the parameter list until changed by another usage type The default type is IN Parameter The name of a locally scoped variable that is replaced with the value of a corresponding argument specified on a function call Parameter references for example parm1 in the executable statements or report section are replaced with the actual value of the parameter In addition parameters are passed to the language environment and are accessible to the executable statements using the natural syntax of that language or as environment variables Parameter variable references are not valid outside the FUNCTION block You can also pass implicit parameters on a function call of a type you specify You must define the parameters in the ENVIRONMENT statement in the initialization file Parameters can only be specified once in the paramet
114. the merchant to view and use such as e Customer contact information demographic data shipping addresses and a customer number e Information about the managers who have access to the store s database e Administrative information required to manage shipping prices and tasks enabled through APIs 7 4 9 Template Designer Merchants can use the Template Designer to design Web pages Its graphical look drag and drop capabilities and quick testing function help to create and test the pages The design is laid out on a template that merchants can use to produce as many Web pages as they want They can create different templates for different Web pages such as one for regular priced products and another for products on sale This way related elements can be visually consistent and unique elements visually distinct Merchants can create the following types of Web pages with the Template Designer e A home page for a mall or store with links to the inside A page listing product categories from which shoppers select a category to browse A page displaying the contents of a product category from which shoppers select a product to view in detail A page showing a product with a description price image and attributes such as color or size that shoppers can select and a button that shoppers click to add the product to their shopping cart e Unique category and product pages for members of shopper groups 7 5 Java for
115. to store temporarily Note Not all browsers support cookies so it violates the rule of being a browser independent application A program can test for HTTP_USER_AGENT and use cookies if supported or else use hidden fields or other available mechanisms This is useful by having the browser remember some specific information that the Web server can later retrieve For example when you browse through a virtual shopping mall and add items to your shopping cart as you browse a list of the items you pick up is stored by your browser so that you can pay for all of the items at once when you are finished shopping It is much more efficient for each browser to keep track of information instead of expecting the Web server to remember which browser of the thousands of browsers that might be using it at a time bought what As you browse the Web cookies sent to your browser are stored in memory When you quit the browser any cookies that have not expired are written to a cookie file so they can be reloaded the next time you run the browser On a Mac this file is named MagicCookie on UNIX it is cookies and on Windows it is cookies txt Contrary to popular belief a cookie file is not a secret way for a Web server to find out everything about you and what you have on your hard drive The only way that any private information is in your cookie file is if you personally gave that information t
116. until the client s request data is received by the Workstation Gateway hat happens when the application is abruptly ended Hitting the close button is the equivalent to signing off the Telnet session Also if a timeout occurs the session is ended It is expected that good programming techniques can trap for this error condition and indeed other errors conditions allow the application to end gracefully This is discussed further in Section 5 7 1 3 Non Programmed Sign Off on page 205 Jumping to another link does not end your session but if your history list becomes too large you cannot get back to your session The keys to your session are lost if your last Workstation Gateway window drops off your history list your session will time out You can bookmark the page and jump back to it if the session has not timed out However the bookmark is only good for the duration of the Workstation Gateway session 5 3 2 Workstation G The The ateway Server Jobs Workstation Gateway server is organized into A single parent job that listens and accepts connections from HTTP browser clients It is important to note that the port used by Workstation Gateway is different from the port of the HTTP server because the Workstation Gateway Server is a new type of server for which there is no well known port The parent job has only one function to hand off connection requests to child jobs One or more child jobs A chi
117. utilizes the IOP more than other communications environments Use the performance monitor STRPFRMON and the component report PRTCPTRPT to measure IOP utilization Attempt to keep the average IOP utilization at 60 or less for best performance Use the data in Figure 100 to estimate 2619 TRLAN IOP capacity 2617 Ethernet IOP capacities are similar IOP capacity depends on file size and MTU size make sure you increase the maximum MTU size parameter On larger AS 400 models the comm LAN IOP may become the bottleneck before the CPU does If additional HTTP capacity is needed multiple IOPs with unique IP addresses can be configured The overall workload must be manually balanced by Web browsers requesting documents from a set of interfaces The load can also be balanced across multiple IP addresses by using a distributed name server 8 6 Net Data and DB2WWW 246 e Since Net Data is the follow on to DB2WWW version 1 ensure that you have the right PTFs applied to get the new version See http www as400 ibm com netdata for the latest code levels and more product information e Net Data performs significantly better than DB2WWW version 1 Note from the data in Figure 99 on page 245 that the relative capacity improved by more than a factor of two Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet e Net Data is more disk I O intensive than typical HTTP transactions Therefore more HTTP server jobs may be needed to provide the
118. x val 2 unescape_url entries x val J entries x name makeword entries x val 7 E Fmakeword function This function reads a var value pairs from stdin Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet char fmakeword FILE f char stop int cl int wsize char word int 11 wsize 102400 11 0 word char malloc sizeof char wsize 1 while 1 word 11 char fgetc f if 11 wsize word 11 1 0 wsize 102400 word char realloc word sizeof char wsize 1 cl if word 11 stop feof f c1 if word 11 stop 11 word 11 0 return word 11 FA Plustospace function This function changes the plus characters to space characters void plustospace char str register int x for x 0 str x xt if str x str x 7 Unescape_url function When you write a special character in the browser the HTTP server decodes it in the xx form The unescape_url function looks for the special characters and if it finds them calls the x2c function to decode them Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 79 80 void unescape_url char url register int x y for x 0 y 0 ur1 y x y if url x url y url x x2c amp url y 1 y 2 url x 0 char x2c char what register char digit digit what
119. 0 Java Virtual Machine A prototype of the Java virtual machine for the AS 400 system is available as a technology preview that you can download from http www ibm com java http ncc hursley ibm com javainfo download index htm 2 14 3 1 What Is a Technology Preview This technical preview is an early demonstration of Java technology on the AS 400 system It is intended to give developers a chance to try out Java on an AS 400 system This technology preview is a port of Sun s JDK 1 0 2 and can be used for prototyping or testing Java applications on the AS 400 system This technology preview does not include a JIT Just In Time compiler 48 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 14 3 2 Capabilities of the Current Technology Preview The technology preview provides run time support for Java on the AS 400 system Development of Java applications can be done on any Java workstation and be ported onto the AS 400 system without modification Alternatively the javac compiler is also being made available in this release of the technology preview This allows the compilation of Java code on the AS 400 system Even though the Java byte code compiler is included in Technology Preview T1 the recommended way to develop Java code for the AS 400 system is to create and compile the code on a PC based client machine and transfer it to OS 400 The best way of doing this is to use Client Access 400 because it provides an easy way of t
120. 0 Programming Guide V3R7 SC09 2072 e ILE COBOL 400 Programming Reference V3R7 SC09 2073 ILE RPG 400 Programming Guide V3R7 SC09 2074 ILE RPG 400 Programming Reference V3R7 SC09 2077 e AS 400 REXX 400 Programmers Guide SC24 5553 e AS 400 REXX 400 Reference SC24 5552 Copyright IBM Corp 1997 277 278 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet How to Get ITSO Redbooks This section explains how both customers and IBM employees can find out about ITSO redbooks CD ROMs workshops and residencies A form for ordering books and CD ROMs is also provided This information was current at the time of publication but is continually subject to change The latest information may be found at URL http www redbooks ibm com How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks Employees may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways PUBORDER to order hardcopies in United States GOPHER link to the Internet type GOPHER WTSCPOK ITSO IBM COM Tools disks To get LIST3820s of redbooks type one of the following commands TOOLS SENDTO EHONE4 TOOLS2 REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE TOOLS SENDTO CANVM2 TOOLS REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE Canadian users only To get BookManager BOOKs of redbooks type the following command TOOLCAT REDBOOKS To get lists of redbooks TOOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET ITSOCAT TXT T
121. 0 sessions This is done as a way to prevent the Webulator 400 s appearance and functionality from changing from one display to another Note The user profile of the person starting or reconfiguring the server must have read access to all configuration files The user profile of the server does not need read access to any configuration files If the configuration commands are used to change the configuration the user that runs them must have write access to the configuration files as well as the temporary tmp and backup bak that are created by those commands 5 8 Hints for Using Webulator 400 212 The following list describes some of the known limitations and offers possible ways to work around them 1 Nothing happens when the Enter key is pressed Some browsers recognize the Enter key and return the form data only if there is one and only one input field available on the form If there are none or multiple input fields the user must press the Enter submit button instead 2 Nothing happens when a Function key is pressed Since the browser is handling the user input functions it traps the Function keys for its own use and not for Webulator 400 This means that when you press one of the function keys for example F1 it either ignores you or performs a browser function Neither one of these is what you want You must press the browser submit button that corresponds to the desired Function key 3 Columns do not line
122. 00 system The IFS is a base support for Internet application development on the AS 400 systems 2 13 1 Short Overview of Various File Systems in IFS A file system provides the support that allows users and applications to access specific segments of storage that are organized as logical units These logical units are files directories libraries and objects Each file system has a set of logical structures and rules for interacting with information in storage These structures and rules may be different from one file system to another In fact from the perspective of structures and rules the OS 400 support for accessing database files and various other object types through libraries can be thought of as a file system Similarly the OS 400 support for accessing documents which are really stream files through the folders structure may be thought of as a separate file system The integrated file system does indeed treat the library support and folders support as separate file systems Other types of file management support that have differing capabilities are also treated as separate file systems The file systems are root The file system This file system takes full advantage of the stream file support and hierarchical directory structure of the integrated file system The root file system has the characteristics of the Disk Operating System DOS and 05 2 file systems QOpenSys The open systems file system This file system
123. 00200 EJ Exec QSYS LIB CGI LIB 00210 Pass WWW htm1 00220 More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print List F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom F19 Edit Sequence Figure 73 Map and Exec Statements The Map directives map entries in the form cgi bin db2www to the library where the Net Data program resides on your system The asterisk at the end of the string refers to anything that follows the string Both upper case and lower case map statements are included because the directives are case sensitive In this example both Map statements map to the same location The Exec directive J enables the HTTP server to execute any CGI programs in the CGI library Specify the library where the program resides not the program itself on the directive To prevent other PGM objects in the CGI library from being executed exclude PUBLIC and QTMHHTP1 from object access You must restart the HTTP server for changes to the configuration file to take effect 3 Create the Net Data initialization file The creation of the Net Data initialization file is optional If an initialization file is not created Net Data runs as if an initialization file with only the default language environment statements in the file had been configured All macro include and executable references need to be fully qualified If an initialization file is created and updated you do not need to end or resta
124. 1 S 5i 0 Write sections of HTML C eval section top c callp wrtsection section varnm varval varln C eval section variab c callp wrtsection section varnm varval varln C eval section fini c callp wrtsection section varnm varval varln The fini section is not included in the HTML page because it is used only for the wrtsection procedure to ensure that all output HTML that has been buffered gets output This procedure calls the QtmhWrStout API to write in the standard output For RPG Programmers We recommended using a debug in all of your programs In the address http www as400 ibm com workshop webbuild htm there is a good sample using a debugger 3 10 Programming CGI with REXX Language REXX programs cannot be used directly because REXX and the AS 400 Internet Connection HTTP server do not handle standard input and standard output compatibly The REXX pull and say commands should not be used in CGI scripts If they are used unpredictable results can occur including function checks in the HTTP server Because REXX procedures are not program objects they cannot be invoked as CGI programs A CL program is invoked with a parameter containing the name of the REXX procedure to be run in your form tag lt form method POST action CGILIB CLREXX PGM SAMPLE gt The CL program CLREXX PGM uses the STRREXPRC command to call the REXX procedure In this case the REXXPROC varia
125. 1004 function function_name Parameter parm_name contains a null string function function _name The number of parameters passed is not correct function function_name Parameter parm_name is not a table An input parameter contained a string value which consisted of the null terminating character The number of parameters passed on a function call either exceeded the maximum number allowed or was less than the minimum number required by the function being called A parameter was passed on a function call which was required to be a Web macro table variable but was instead a string variable 1005 function function_name Parameter parm_name is not a string A parameter was passed ona function call which was required to be a Web macro string variable but was instead a table variable 1006 1007 function function_name Parameter parm_name is not an output parameter function function_name Parameter parm_name contains a value which is not valid Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet A literal string was passed on a function call for a parameter which was required to be an output parameter One of these conditions exists e A value was passed that exceeded the maximum supported value e A value was passed that was less than the minimum supported value A value was passed that was not one of the supported choices A table row or
126. 15 IFEQ 0 ORD CHAINCUSREC 99 IN99 IFEQ 0 EXFMTCUSFLDS ENDIF ENDIF ENDDO MOVE 1 INLR Subroutine to display title and PF key line HEADNG BEGSR WRITECUSFTG WRITECUSHDG ENDSR DADNDANADAAAND Pie Mei 272 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet AFFEKKKKKKKKKK A FILE NAME CUSMSTP A FILE DESCRIPTION Customer Master File A DATE 07 15 96 AFFEKKKKKK A A R CUSREC A ORD must be unique A ORD 5 TEXT Order number A COLHDG Order Number A NAME 20 TEXT Customer Name A COLHDG Customer Name A STAT 10 TEXT Status A COLHDG Status A K ORD Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples 273 A TS SD 19960716 130224 MARIAN REL V3R1MO 5763 PW1 AERRRREKERERERER EERE ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ERERERERERERERERER A FILE NAME CUSFMT A DESCRIPTION DISPLAY FILE FOR ENTERING ORDER STATUS AAA KAKAK KEKA KKK EERE ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ERERERERERERERKEK A EC DSPSIZ 24 80 DS3 CHGINPDFT CS CA03 15 End PRINT INDARA R CUSHDG OVERLAY 1 27 Check Order Status DSPATR HI R CUSFTG 23 2 F3 Exit COLOR BLU R CUSPMT OVERLAY 3 2 Type selection press Enter COLOR BLU ORD 5A I 5 39DSPATR PC DSPATR HI 99 ERRMSG No orders found try 0 9 99 COLOR WHT 5 2 Order number R CUSFLDS OVERLAY 2 Customer Name 37 2 Order Number 37 2 StatUs
127. 2 lt P gt kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HTML Section Output KEEFEEEKKKKEKKEEKRKKEAKEAIT HTML OUTPUT lt H1 gt Hardware Query Results lt H1 gt lt HR gt queryHardware lt HR gt lt A href http www ibm com cgi bin db2ww equip st mbr input gt List of hardware lt A gt o The Web macro might initially be invoked from an anchor reference such as the following example lt A href http www ibm com cgi bin db2www equip st mbr input gt List of hardware lt A gt When the application user clicks on this reference Net Data is invoked and Net Data parses the Web macro file When it gets to the HTML block specified on the invocation in this case the HTML INPUT block it begins to process the text inside the block Anything that is not recognized by Net Data as a Web macro language construct is assumed to be HTML and is sent to the browser to be displayed After a selection is made and the Submit button pressed the ACTION part of the HTML lt FORM gt element is executed which specifies a call to the Web macro s HTML OUTPUT block The HTML OUTPUT block is processed just as the HTML INPUT block was All data up to the queryHardware function call is output to the browser as HTML The queryHardware function call is processed which in turn invokes the SQL FUNCTION block After the hdware variable reference is replaced in the SQL statement with the value returned in the input for
128. 227 7 3 New Versions of HTTP 228 7 4 IBM Electronic Commerce Net Commerce 228 7 4 1 What Does Net Commerce Do 0 229 7 4 2 Construct a Site for Your Business 229 7 4 3 Create a Dynamic Shopping Experience 229 7 4 4 Manage the Shopping Process End to End 229 7 4 5 Help Manage Your Store 230 7 4 6 Protect Your Information and Your Shoppers 230 7 4 7 The IBM Net Commerce Administrator 230 vi Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 7 4 8 Site Manager and Store Manager 230 7 4 9 Template Designer 231 7 5 Java for the AS 400 A White Paper 231 TSA Java Overview ce i A ee A A ee aii gen a coe a 231 7 5 2 Why Java for the AS 400 System 233 7 5 3 Java on the AS 400 System Today 234 75 4 Summaty 2 prada pre A LELE RS oi 236 Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 237 8 1 Internet Application Performance Overview 237 8 1 1 How Fast Can a Web Site Go 2 ee ee 237 8 1 2 How Many Connections per Second is Enough 237 8 2 Internet Connection Performance for AS 400 System 239 8 3 AS 400 Commercial Processing Workload CPW 240 8 3 1 AS 400 Advanced Server Models V3R7 240 8 4 Web Serving with the HTTP Server 242 8 4 1 Web Serving Performance Measurements 242 8
129. 29 lt MENU gt 29 lt OL gt 29 lt OPTION gt 29 lt P gt 29 lt PRE gt 29 lt SAMP gt 29 Copyright IBM Corp 1997 lt SELECT gt 29 lt STRONG gt 29 lt TEXTAREA gt 29 lt TITLE gt 29 lt TT gt 29 lt U gt 29 lt UL gt 29 lt VAR gt 29 Numerics 5250 workstation gateway 22 5250 HTML workstation gateway 247 AS 400 model selection 249 communications lines and IOPs 249 workstation gateway configuration 248 workstation gateway memory 249 workstation gateway response time 248 A activation group reclaiming 39 Add Relational Database Directory Entry ADDRDBDIRE command 141 adding relational database directory entry 141 ADDRDBDIRE Add Relational Database Directory Entry command 141 address tag 27 anchors 27 API application programming interface 126 application access 10 application programming interface API 126 application security 53 AS 400 commercial processing workload 240 relative system performance metric 243 AS 400 HTTP server performance CGl bin 242 HTTP 242 Net Data 242 AS 400 internet application scenario extranet 5 Internet access 5 internet accessible 5 intranet 5 public internet presence 5 AS 400 Java virtual machine 48 client server programming model 21 netrexx to create Java applet 49 NetRexxC 50 performance 48 persistent connection 21 sockets connection 21 technology preview 48 283 AS 400 Java virtual machine continued Using Perl to create Java applet 50 VisualAge for
130. 4 2 AS 400 HTTP Server Performance 242 8 5 Web Serving Performance Recommendations 242 8 5 1 CISC versus RISCE Lina Cos eee nn hl ee a 243 8 5 2 Response Time General 2 002 000 002 e 243 8 5 3 HTTP and TCP IP Configuration Tips 243 8 5 4 HTTP Server Memory Requirements 244 8 5 5 AS 400 Model Selection 244 8 5 6 File System Considerations 244 8 5 7 File Size Considerations 0 0 245 8 5 8 Communications LAN IOPs 246 8 6 Net Data and DB2WWW 2 246 8 7 5250 HTML Workstation Gateway 247 8 7 1 Workstation Gateway Performance Recommendations 248 8 8 Net Data Performance Hints and Tips 249 8 9 CGI Bin Performance Hints and Tips 249 8 10 Workstation Gateway Hints and Tips 250 Appendix A ILE RPG and ILE COBOL Sample CGI Programs 251 A 1 ILE RPG Sample CGI Program CUSTINFO 251 A 2 ILE Cobol Sample CGI Program CUSTINFO 256 A 3 HTML Input Form for CUSTINFO 0 261 A 4 DDS for the CUSTPF file 262 Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples 263 B 1 HTML Field Overlap Examples 263 B 2 Logon Exit Code Examples for Workstation Gateway 265 Appendix C Special Notices 1 275 Appendix D Related Publications
131. 400 212 5 8 Hints for Using Webulator 400 aaa aa aa 212 5 9 Other Implementation Tips 2 000000 00 200 215 5 10 HTML Gateway Comparison 0 2000500505 216 5 11 Further Information o 216 5 11 1 Workstation Gateway 216 5 11 2 Webulator 400 0 217 5 11 3 Additional Publications on the Web 217 5 12 HTML Gateway versus Other Methods 218 5 13 Future Developments 0 218 5 13 1 Workstation Gateway 218 5 13 2 Webulator 400 oa pa ceca e E i E gor A 218 5 14 Conclusions clean pel ete A Moe perio e Ra 218 Chapter 6 Further Enhancing Your AS 400 HTML Pages 221 Clie SAV cir Be hea ook Sg eo eS A Be a 221 6 1 1 Java Applets 2 0 5 5866 ee i et por ee 221 6 1 2 Java Applications 222 6 1 3 How Do I Serve Java Applets from the AS 400 System 222 6 27 Javascript soli ol tile beet Ae ee eee 4 222 6 2 1 What is JavaScript caei a a ri a a 00 0002 D a ee 223 6 2 2 Webulator 400 and JavaScript 223 6 2 3 Why Disable JavaScript aoaaa aaa a 223 6 3 Further Java JavaScript Information 223 Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview 225 7 1 AS 400 Firewall Technology 225 7 1 1 AS 400 Firewall Benefits 225 7 1 2 The AS 400 Advantage 0 225 7 1 3 AS 400 Technology Advantages 0 226 7 1 4 AS 400 Firewall Technology Components 227 7 2 Internet Connection Secure Server 400 ICSS 400
132. 4125F 3B35D6E8 BUT AME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 c VALUE F12 gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 AME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 e VALUE F14 gt lt INPU TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 g VAL VALUE F17 gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUT AME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 j VALUE F19 gt lt INPU TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 1 VAL VALUE F22 gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUT AME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 0 VALUE F24 gt lt PRE gt lt FORM gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Figure 86 A Portion of the HTML Automatically Generated by the HTML Gateway Finally let s see how this looks on a Netscape Web browser and also an example of how a subfile window looks Note The result you see on a Web browser is totally dependent upon how you configured the browser If you choose another font another background color or another font size the actual appearance of your HTML data stream on your PC might look quite different from our example Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Important Workstation Gateway displays messages to the client using white colored text if the user changes the browser background to white no systems
133. 6 00 ENVIRONMENT DTW_SYSTEM QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHSYS SRVPGM FERRER RR ee End of data eee RR RRR e e e eee e e de e e e dee de de de e e ee ee http www yoursys com QSYS LIB NDCGI LIB DB2WWW PGM QSYS LIB NDMACROS LIB NDMACROS FILE NDMACRO MBR INPUT Figure 75 Sample Net Data URL Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 165 4 10 Migrating from DB2 WWW Connection to Net Data If you are using DB2 WWW Version 1 and want to migrate to Net Data DB2WWW Version 2 read Section 4 9 Getting Net Data Up and Running on page 159 After reading the section you may need to create a Net Data initialization file As explained in the section Getting Net Data Up and Running you need to create an initialization file for URLs that reference Web macros that are not fully qualified in the Web macro If you need to create a configuration file you need to add the SQL language environment statement in the configuration file SQL DTW_SQL or SQL Language Environment For information on the syntax of the SQL language environment statement see Section 4 6 2 SQL DTW_SQL or SQL Language Environment on page 141 With DB2 WWW Connection Version 1 you needed an initialization file in every library in which macro files resided This is no longer true with Net Data If you choose to create a Net Data initialization file and you use the MACRO_PATH configuration statement in your DB2 WWW Version 1 initialization files you need to combine
134. 7 4 2 Construct a Site for Your Business Whether your business is a small shop or a large department store whether you offer products or services wholesale or retail you can put your business on the Web with Net Commerce And Net Commerce opens opportunities for commercial Web site developers to offer complete Web site packages to merchants You can build one store or a mall that showcases several stores Choose a simple method of store creation and use the processes and Web pages that come supplied with Net Commerce or customize your store and incorporate legacy systems 7 4 3 Create a Dynamic Shopping Experience Because information about your merchandise is dynamically extracted from the database each time a shopper views your online store you can quickly and easily tailor your store to changing markets and profit from emerging trends You can also construct shopper profiles with information you collect from your shoppers electronically and develop and implement consumer centered direct marketing strategies in your online store A handy design tool is provided to create visually appealing displays or pages to showcase your store and its products You can include special effects on these pages such as 3D graphics animation sound and Java applets 7 4 4 Manage the Shopping Process End to End Net Commerce contains task macros and application program interface API functions that manage shopping tasks automatically Shoppers register
135. 71 Copy to Stream File with ASCII Conversion The APIs to support the Net Data language environment interface are in the QTMHLE service program in library QTCP An ILE C language header file provides the prototypes required to call the Net Data APIs in ILE C Documentation about the interface can be found at http www as400 ibm com netdata To get the necessary prototypes include the header file as follows include lt dtwle h gt The QTMHLE SRVPGM object is included in the QTCP library The QSYSINC library contains header files and is optionally installable Make sure QSYSINC is on your system before compiling programs that use these header files If you have problems getting a language environment to function properly look in the job log of the HTTP server job to see if any messages were issued that may indicate the cause of the problem When debugging newly created language environments it is best to have the minimum and maximum number of server jobs set to two so that Net Data requests are funneled through one HTTP server job This allows you to easily look at the job log of the server to see if any messages are being logged In addition every time a language environment service program is updated you must end the HTTP server and restart it so that Net Data can activate the updated service program The OS 400 implementation of Net Data did not support the following Net Data features when this was published They may be suppor
136. ADD DTW_rADD e DTW DIVIDE DTW_rDIVIDE e DTW_DIVREM DTW_rDIVREM e DTW_FORMAT DTW_rFORMAT e DTW_INTDIV DTW_rINTDIV e DTW_MULTIPLY DTW_rMULTIPLY DTW_POWER DTW_rPOWER e DTW_SUBTRACT DTW_rSUBTRACT 3 String manipulation functions provide functions to modify character strings Net Data supports the following functions e DTW_ASSIGN e DTW_CONCAT DTW_rCONCAT e DTW_DELSTR DTW_rDELSTR DTW_INSERT DTW_rINSERT e DTW_LASTPOS DTW_rLASTPOS e DTW_LENGTH DTW_rLENGTH e DTW_LOWERCASE DTW_rLOWERCASE DTW_mLOWERCASE DTW_POS DTW_rPOS DTW_REVERSE DTW_rREVERSE e DTW_STRIP DTW_rSTRIP e DTW_SUBSTR DTW_rSUBSTR DTW_TRANSLATE DTW_rTRANSLATE e DTW_UPPERCASE DTW_rUPPERCASE DTW_mUPPERCASE 4 Word manipulation functions allow you to manipulate words in a character string The following functions are supported e DTW_DELWORD DTW_rDELWORD DTW_SUBWORD DTW_rSUBWORD DTW_WORD DTW_rWORD e DTW_WORDINDEX DTW_rWORDINDEX e DTW_WORDLENGTH DTW_rWORDLENGTH e DTW_WORDPOS DTW_rWORDPOS DTW_WORDS DTW_rWORDS 5 Table manipulation functions allow you to manipulate tables and easily build Web forms with dynamic data These functions allow you to build select blocks radio buttons and so on and fill them automatically with data from the AS 400 database The table manipulation functions supported by Net Data are e DTW_TB_DLIST DTW_TB_DUMPH lt DTW_TB_DUMPV e DTW_TB_HTMLENCODE e DTW_TB_INPUT_CHECK
137. ALLB APIStdIn c parm INData c parm INDataLn C parm INActLn c parm QUSEC c ENDSR kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Figure 39 ILE RPG Program ORDAS400P Method POST 3 12 3 Source Code C Program PARSECGIP 108 ILE C Program Example for the Method POST This is the program for Ordering an AS 400 system in the C Language m C Programs include qp0z1170 h The qp0z1170 h must included to get the getenv and putenv functions which are not part of the stdio h at this time The qp0z1170 h is a member in the file H in the library QSYSINC Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet EFE ER R H k kekeke ke e ke ERR EER e ke e he e ERE ERE RITA ER EER ERE RERER EER EREERERERE Simple ILE C program PARSECGIP to test CGI Method POST EFE ER R H k keke keke e ke ERR EER e ke e EKER ERR ER AREER ERR EKER EER ERE EKER ER EER ER EER ERERE include lt stdio h gt include lt string h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt qp0z1170 h gt define MAX_ENTRIES 10000 typedef struct char name char val entry char makeword char line char stop char fmakeword FILE f char stop int len char x2c char what void unescape_url char url void plustospace char str main int argc char argv entry entries MAX_ENTRIES register int x m 0 int cl printf Content type text htm1 n n if strcmp getenv
138. API is used to read the input Data from the user QtmhCvtDb Convert to DB This API takes the Stdin input and converts it into a group data structure that can be processed by a cobol pgm The field names in the DDS must match the names in the HTML Form QtmhWrStout Write to Standard Output This API writes the output to the user The Output Must be in the correct HTML format and it MUST have a MIME Header QCMDEXC Execute a CL Command from within a High Level Langauge Program Used to Override the output database file After the MODULE is created a CRTPGM command is required to build the program You must include the Service Program QTMHCGI from the library QTCP E FF F F O SO F F HF F F AO A I E F F I SI F A HF F F HF HF E E HF HF F kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PROGRAM ID CUSTINFOCB ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SOURCE COMPUTER IBM AS400 OBJECT COMPUTER IBM AS400 INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT CUSTINF ASSIGN TO DATABASE CUSTPF ORGANIZATION IS sequential ACCESS IS sequential FILE STATUS IS custinf stat DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD custinf 01 custinf record COPY DDS custrec OF custpf 256 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 WORKING STORAGE SECTION 77 WS CMD LEN PIC S9 10 v9 5 comp 77 CUSTINF STAT pic xx 77 WSR STDIN DATA PIC X 32768
139. B program PGM The HTTP server does not execute a user defined CGI program unless the HTTP server administrator has explicitly enabled it by coding an Exec directive The HTTP server administrator can for example limit CGI requests to a specific library in QSYS LIB Example If you want the actual library specified where the program is stored Exec QSYS LIB CGISAMPLE LIB That is specified in the URL http hostname QSYS LIB CGISAMPLE LIB SAMPLE PGM If you want the URL mapped into the library where the program is stored Exec cgipgm QSYS LIB CGISAMPLE LIB That is specified in the URL http hostname cgipgm SAMPLE PGM Note The minimum directives that you need to execute a CGI program are a Pass and Exec directive Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet The enable and disable directives cause the HTTP server to accept or reject incoming request URLs based on the method coded in the URL These methods are described in the HTTP 1 0 specification The AS 400 HTTP server supports the GET POST and HEAD methods Example Enable GET Disable POST The AS 400 system runs CGI programs under the QTMHHTP1 user profile The QTMHHTP1 user profile must have authority to access all of the objects accessed by the CGI programs PGM 3 2 1 Required Configuration You need e TCP IP configuration for the TCP IP HTTP Server e Configuration of the AS 400 HTTP Server directives HTTP Configuration 1
140. BOX e DTW_TB_INPUT_RADIO Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet DTW_TB_INPUT_TEXT DTW_TB LIST e DTW_TB_SELECT DTW_TB_TABLE DTW_TB_TEXTAREA 6 Flat file interface functions are not currently supported on the AS 400 system It is planned that support for these functions will be included in a future release of the operating system As defined by Net Data the flat file interface functions are e DTWF_APPEND e DTWF_CLOSE DTWF_DELETE e DTWF_INSERT e DTWF_OPEN e DTWF_READ e DTWF_REMOVE e DTWF_SEARCH DTWF_UPDATE e DTWF_WRITE 7 Web registry functions are not currently supported on the AS 400 system It is planned that support for these functions will be included in a future release of the operating system As defined by Net Data the Web registry functions are e DTWR_ADDENTRY e DTWR_DELENTRY e DTWR_DELREG DTWR_LISTREG e DTWR_LISTSUB DTWR_RTVENTRY DTWR_rRTVENTRY e DTWR_UPDATEENTRY For detailed information on any of the built in functions you should see the online Net Data Reference Guide at http ww software ibm com data net data docs dtwref htm 4 4 4 Table Variables The table variable defines a collection of related data within Net Data It contains an array of identical records or rows and an array of column names describing the fields in each row A table is defined in the Web macro with a statement such as this DEFINE myTable TABLE 30 The number following TABLE is the
141. CGIDEV DDBDSLn S 10I 0 INZ DtaStrSize DDBActLn S 10I 0 INZ DDBRespCd S 10i 0 INZ DDATASTRUCT E DS Format the input data into the externally described data structure C callp CvtDb DBFileName amp colonInData InActLn amp colondatastruct DBDSLn amp col onDBActLn amp col onDBRespCd amp col onQUSEC The CvtDb procedure calls the QtmhCvtDb API m gt CvtDb pr extproc QtmhCvtDb DbFileName 20 InData 32767 options varsize InActLn 10i 0 DSBuf fer 32767 options varsize DBDSLn 10i 0 DBActLn 10i 0 DBRespCd 10i 0 qusec 16 E Getenvf subroutine The subroutine returns in the envrcvr variable the SCRIPT_NAME environment variable Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 91 92 Variables for getenvf subprocedure Denvrevr S 32767 Denvrevrin s 10i 0 inz size envrevr Denvrspln S 10i 0 Denvrqsnm S 30 DenvrqsIn S 10i 0 Read environment variables Dprogram S 20A Use getenvp to get the environment variables c eval envrqsnm SCRIPT_NAME Cc aa checkr envrqsnm envrqsIn C exsr getenvf Cc eval program subst envrevr l envrspIn kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk GETENVF Call the QtmhGetEnv API kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk C getenvf begsr c callb QtmhGetEnv parm envrevr Cc parm envrevrin Cc parm envrspIn C parm envrqsnm C parm envrqs n C parm QUSEC c endsr
142. CSID parameter So if the CHGWSGA CCSID parameter is changed the EBCDIC CCSID default value also changes since we get the best fit EBCDIC CCSID from the configured ASCII CCSID This default can be overridden by each user Examples for Sweden are No user exit http as400 endicott ibm com 5061 WSG SWB http as400 endicott ibm com 5061 WSG SWI http as400 endicott ibm com 5061 WSG SFI User exit http as400 endicott ibm com 5061 WSG SWB QAPP0100 http as400 endicott ibm com 5061 WSG SWI QAPP0100 any_string_data http as400 endicott ibm com 5061 WSG SFI QAPP0100 Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 195 Refer to Appendix C in the National Language Support SC41 3101 for a table of supported keyboard strings that can be used Here are the rules to which the Workstation Gateway converts EBCDIC to ASCII e The Workstation Gateway builds the HTML in code page 037 using only invariant characters for the tags and control words e The 5250 application sends the data character in the code page that it determines independent of the Workstation Gateway e Once the document is built it is converted to ASCII in the CCSID specified in the following order a MIME header specified by the remote browser b Overridden by the interactive subsystem WSG xxx c WSG attribute CHGWSGA command d The system default CCSID 12 If the remote Web client is signing on to the AS 400 system with a unique user profile not a shared anon
143. CTION QSYS LIB HTML LIB ORDAS400 PGM gt Name lt INPUT TYPE TEXT NAME NAME SIZE 307 MAXLENGTH 40 gt lt P gt Address lt TEXTAREA NAME ADDRESS ROWS 2 COLS 30 gt lt TEXTAREA gt lt P gt lt B gt Which AS 400 would you like to order lt B gt lt BR gt lt INPUT TYPE RADIO NAME P1 VALUE P1 gt Portable lt INPUT TYPE RADIO NAME P1 VALUE P2 gt Server lt INPUT TYPE RADIO NAME P1 VALUE P3 gt System lt P gt lt B gt Do you want the Support Line Service lt B gt lt BR gt lt INPUT TYPE CHECKBOX NAME w17 VALUE w gt Yes lt INPUT TYPE CHECKBOX NAME w2 VALUE f gt No lt P gt Thanks for ordering lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE 0rder gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE More Information gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Cancel gt lt FORM gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Figure 7 HTML Document If the HTML document is displayed with a browser for example Web browser for OS 2 you see that the title in the head part is displayed in the title bar of Figure 8 on page 27 26 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Address PLEASE FILL IN THE FOLLOWING Which AS 400 would you like to order a Portable 2 Server i System Do you want the Support Line Service Vas Mo Thanks for ordering Figure 8 HTML Document Displayed Through an OS 2 Web Browser
144. Cc parm DDBDSLn c parm DDBActLn C parm DDBRespCd C parm QUSEC 3 9 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE COBOL 400 or RPG 400 86 IBM has provided a service program routine by the name QtmhCvtDb to automatically parse the name value string and place the results in an externally defined physical file externally defined by DDS of course This makes the job of parsing this rather complex string easy for ILE COBOL 400 and ILE RPG 400 programmers as it is trivial to define and read in the fields associated with the DDS file in RPG as an example This is the good news The bad news is that the QtmhCvtDb as shipped with V3R2 of the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities 400 has a bug in it at the time of the writing of this redbook that causes it to make a mistake in the translation of the special escape sequences such a 2C into the EBCDIC equivalent The root cause of the mistake lies in the same problem described in Section 3 8 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE C 400 on page 77 Here are some circumventions to the problem that can be used until IBM fixes QtmhCvtDb 1 Use the C sample program as mentioned in Section 3 8 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE C 400 on page 77 to parse the string of name value pairs This code is useful if you need to make some modification to the code for your environment You may find for example the translation table that we use to convert ASCII to EBCDIC may not work for your environment 2 Y
145. Connection for AS 400 Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 53 IBM SecureWay AS 400 and the Internet G325 6321 provides general security information when you are thinking about connecting the AS 400 system to the Internet The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this document Manuals e AS 400 TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 3420 e Tips and Tools for Securing Your AS 400 SC41 3300 e AS 400 Internet SecureWay G325 6321 ITSO Publications Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet SG24 4815 Building a Firewall with the IBM Internet Connection Secured Network Gateway SG24 2577 e www security How to Build a Secure WWW Connection SG24 4564 TCP IP Tutorial and Technical Overview GG24 3376 Paperbacks can be ordered through IBM e Implementing Internet Security Frederic J Cooper Published by New Riders 1995 SR28 5744 e Internet Firewalls and Network Security Kranajit Sijan Published by New Riders 1995 SR28 5685 e Network and Internet Security Vijay Ahuja Published by Academic Press 1996 SR23 7465 2 16 Internet URL References for More Information Do you want to get more information For the latest detailed product specific information visit the VisualAge for Smalltalk Web site at URL http ww software ibm com software ad vastub htm or the VisualAge for C site at http w
146. E e TIME USER The HTML keyword is not allowed on a field in a subfile record 5 4 4 Logon Exit Programs An application logon exit program QAPP0100 allows us to bypass the AS 400 Sign on display and invoke an application program directly without the client browser having to send a user profile or password This allows the customer the option of providing any application to client browsers without requiring a sign on This has the added benefit of removing the command line for this client This is done by calling a customer program that authenticates the client request and provides sign on information to the Workstation Gateway Server The Workstation Gateway Server uses the output of the customer s user exit and performs the sign on action on behalf of the client browser When the user exit is given control it may perform any desired validation using the supplied Internet Protocol address and any of the supplied operation specific information extracted after the WSG QAPP0100 string in the URL Setting the Allow Operation output determines whether the automatic logon is performed or whether an error message is returned to the client browser If the operation is allowed the user exit must return the user profile password current library and program All output must be non NULL or else an error is returned to the client browser Only one exit program can be registered for the exit point QAPP0100 The TCP IP Configur
147. EEEREREGL DEFINE page_title Web Macro Template X X 9 DEFINE DATABASE LOCAL TABLE LIB FILE Mytable TABLE ALL Figure 44 Define Section of Web Macro The first line is a comment The format of a comment is one or more comment lines Comments usually appear before each macro section They cannot appear in a macro section The next statement starts a DEFINE section You can define multiple variables in one define section In this example only one variable page_title is defined Once defined this variable can be referenced anywhere in the macro using the syntax page_ title Using variables makes it easy to make global changes to your macro later The second DEFINE establishes what database to connect to it can be local or remote The database must be defined in the Relational Database Directory using the WRKRDBDIRE command The last line of this section identifies the end of the DEFINE section Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 117 4 2 2 Function Definition Section 118 The function definition section allows you to define the language environments you use and what parameters are passed to the language environment m kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Function Definition Section ERKEEEEREREKA KARA EEE AES FUNCTION DTW_REXX rexx1 IN input returns result TThis function accepts one parameter and returns a result which is substituted for the associated functio
148. ELSTR t1 1 6 d1 Figure 63 INCLUDE File TIMERSTR The contents of the third INCLUDE file TIMEREND gets another time stamp and parses the time stamp to remove the hours and the colons from the time string t2 We use the built in Net Data math functions to return the elapsed time in seconds to the browser TE lt table gt lt TR gt lt TD gt The end time was lt TD gt etimel t2 lt TR gt DTW_DELSTR t2 1 6 d2 DTW_ SUBTRACT d2 d1 d3 lt TR gt lt TD gt The start time was lt TD gt t1 lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt The total time was lt TD align right gt d3 lt TR gt lt table gt Figure 64 INCLUDE File TIMEREND The output on the browser display looks similar to this The end time was 15 16 43 506000 The start time was 15 16 42 726000 The total time was 0 780000 Notice that in this example we are only subtracting the seconds and tenths of seconds Parsing the string can be changed to include the minutes and hours 4 7 3 Conditional Logic The IF ELIF ELSE ENDIF block using conditional logic in your Net Data macros is one of the more powerful functions of the macro language This allows the macro writer to dynamically change the HTML in the macro that is returned to the browser When you think of it imagine all the stuff you can do with this function IF ROW_NUM lt MAX_ROWS lt P gt The table is not full yet lt BR gt ELIF ROW_NUM MAX_ROWS
149. F LEN STOP RUN Figure 93 COBOL Program Example These examples show the logic that you may want to include in your application to ensure the closeout of the application and completion of the job Obviously 206 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet other steps that may be required to complete or close a transaction in your application are not shown here The contents of the QDEVRCYACN system value also determines how the application program is informed of the session termination and may inhibit the return of error indications to the program 5 7 2 Existing Applications Webulator 400 allows you to choose if the AS 400 display data should be sent as HTML preformatted text or as an HTML table 5 7 2 1 HTML Preformatted Text HTML preformatted text is the default method Webulator 400 sends preformatted text when the Tables Enabled configuration value is set to NO Preformatted text has the following characteristics lt instructs the browser to use a fixed width font This means that all characters including spaces on the display are the same width This results in the characters going across a line have the same spacing as ina traditional emulation program lt produces the smallest size HTML file It is fast for the browser to render on the display The width of input fields and submit buttons are larger than the number of characters that they hold This means that the columns of any line that have input fiel
150. HTML displayed on Web client only Utilize existing tools and skills to develop new Web applications Clients are no longer restricted to a particular emulator or operating system 218 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Complex Web applications that need to save state through a series of steps can easily be done in DDS and 5250 Ability to run AS 400 applications using Web browsers running on multiple platforms Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 219 220 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Chapter 6 Further Enhancing Your AS 400 HTML Pages This chapter describes the use of Java Applets and JavaScripts to further enhance your Web applications for better usability 6 1 Java Java is an object oriented programming language developed by Sun Microsystems It was originally designed for programming consumer electronics The language was designed to be architecture neutral so that it could run on the different computer chips used in various consumer electronic devices But Sun soon realized that the language had the potential to become much more The architecture neutral aspect of Java makes it ideal for programming on the Internet It allows a user to receive software from a remote system and execute it on a local system regardless of the underlying hardware or operating system This is possible because of the interpreted nature of the language and the Java Virtual Machine Traditionally
151. International Technical Support Organization Publications For information on ordering these ITSO publications see How to Get ITSO Redbooks on page 279 e Using the Information Super Highway SG24 2499 e Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet SG24 4815 D 2 Redbooks on CD ROMs Redbooks are also available on CD ROMs Order a subscription and receive updates 2 4 times a year at significant savings CD ROM Title Subscription Collection Kit Number Number System 390 Redbooks Collection SBOF 7201 SK2T 2177 Networking and Systems Management Redbooks Collection SBOF 7370 SK2T 6022 Transaction Processing and Data Management Redbook SBOF 7240 SK2T 8038 AS 400 Redbooks Collection SBOF 7270 SK2T 2849 RS 6000 Redbooks Collection HTML BkMgr SBOF 7230 SK2T 8040 RS 6000 Redbooks Collection PostScript SBOF 7205 SK2T 8041 Application Development Redbooks Collection SBOF 7290 SK2T 8037 Personal Systems Redbooks Collection SBOF 7250 SK2T 8042 D 3 Other Publications These publications are also relevant as further information sources TCP IP Configuration amp Reference V3R7 SC41 3420 TCP IP Fastpath Setup Version 3 SC41 3430 AS 400 Sockets Programming V3R7 SC41 4422 e AS 400 System API Reference V3R7 SC41 4801 e AS 400 Integrated File System Introduction V3R7 SC41 4711 e AS 400 NLS Planning Guide GC41 9877 e ILE C 400 Programming Guide V3R7 SC09 2069 ILE C 400 Programming Reference V3R7 SC09 2070 e ILE COBOL 40
152. Internet and Intranet capabilities of the AS 400 system In this redbook we have tried to provide code snippets or examples that can be used to cut through the tangle of the Web and enhance your applications The following URL offers other examples and samples of code that have made implementing solutions simpler These tools and techniques for untangling some of the mysteries of the Web were created by various groups within IBM s AS 400 community Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet http as400 rochester ibm com workshop snippets snippets htm It is anticipated that this site will be updated with new snippets as they become available 5 11 1 3 Additional Publications Further IBM material that might be of interest Tips and Tools for Securing Your AS 400 SC41 3300 00 A Guide to the Internet Connection Servers SG24 4805 00 5 11 2 Webulator 400 Webulator 400 additional information 5 11 2 1 Support Pages on the Internet The Webulator 400 Frequently Asked Questions can be found at the following URL http www inetmi com products webulate wbl faq htm Other support for the Webulator 400 product can be found at the following URL http www inetmi com products webulate webulate sht Webulator 400 users also have the opportunity to join an electronic mailing list dedicated to discussions on Web Server 400 and Webulator 400 I NET hosts a customer mailing list List Server that allows all participants to disc
153. KKEKKEKKEK S HTML input lt HTML gt lt FORM METHOD POST ACTION OUTPUT gt Enter input for the RPGPGM here lt br gt lt INPUT TYPE text NAME prod gt lt INPUT TYPE submit gt lt FORM gt lt HTML gt 0 G FAFAKKKKX REPORT RERERERERERED o Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 127 128 HTML OUTPUT lt HTML gt We will now call the RPG program and pass the parameter lt P gt prod lt P gt lt HR gt The output of the RPG program is lt P gt rpgpgm prod lt HTML gt o This is the input window where you enter the value to be passed to the RPG program S FILE pomsam MBR input p farchasm2 cgi binJnetdata 54 S LIBVNET DAT AW Wi LIB NDMACROS FILE ogmsam MER input Enter input for the RPGPGM here This is my input with Figure 51 RPG Program Input Window When the user presses the Submit Query button Net Data parses the Report HTML section and runs the program RPGPGM PGM passing the value entered in the INPUT HTML section and returns the modified value to the browser We will now call the RPG program and pass the parameter This is my input with The out put of the RPG program is This is my input with Text added to the buffer Figure 52 RPG Program Report Window An alternative way to call a high level program and pass parameters is through the REXX language environment as demonstrat
154. L documents to return information back to your server or let the readers retrieve certain kinds of information from your server through the execution of special programs The mechanism for doing these or other similar functions is called the Common Gateway Interface CGI A programmer creates a gateway program and places it in the CGI BIN directory of the server A user of a Web page selects the gateway program URL as part of using a Web page link FORM or ISINDEX query box In response to the user request the gateway program executes and returns the results to the client 3 1 HTTP CGI Programming Model The HTTP Common Gateway Interface CGI programming model provides a simple interface for running programs external to the HTTP server in a platform independent manner This interface has been in use by the World Wide Web since 1993 A good document that describes this interface can be found at URL http hoohoo ncsa uiuc edu cgi interface htm The purpose of CGI is to extend the capability of an HTTP server by providing framework in which the HTTP server can interface with a program that is specified on a URL The format of the URL allows parameters to be passed to the CGI program On the server side the interface describes how the program is started by the HTTP server and how parameters for the program are passed using a combination of standard input and environment variables It also describes how output information usually HTML
155. L http hostname domainname 5061 WSG QAPP0100 You can bypass the sign on display and go into the command entry display Note Please see Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples on page 263 for the code listings of exit programs in C RPG and CL languages 5 5 Tips for using Workstation Gateway 194 The following tips or hints might help you make better use of Workstation Gateway function 1 The Workstation Gateway function is not a substitute for an original workstation connection 2 The performance of using Workstation Gateway is not as good as using a traditional 5250 connection such as tn5250 through Telnet Care should be given when sizing an AS 400 system as this kind of 5250 to HTML conversion is not done without extra cost in CPU terms See Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance on page 237 for more details on Workstation Gateway performance statistics and possible improvements tuning Performance Tip Preformatted text is rendered on the screen faster by the browser than formatted text for example tables In addition preformatted text produces a smaller HTML file that can be transferred quicker 3 With the exception of the character input fields always use the mouse to click on the function key you want instead of using a key on the keyboard such as Enter or F3 4 Context sensitive help versus general help The AS 400 system considers the character as the first character of an i
156. LECTED VALUE NONE gt Gener VALUE C gt Clear lt OPTION VALUE A lt gt Record Back lt OPTION VALUE x gt PA1 VALUE A C gt Test Request lt OPTION VALUE S E gt Host print screen lt OPTION VALUE A H90 E gt Sign off lt OPTION VALUE c gt F12 lt OPTION VALUE 3 gt F3 lt VALUE H gt Hel p lt SELECT gt ITSO Company Customer Comment Inquiry System Name Vera Small E mail vsmall www net com Addressl 123 South Center Street Address2 City Rochester State MN Zipcode 12345 Country USA Phone 507 2895300 Comment This is only a simple test We can use e to show you how easily you can use Workstation Gateway in the Internet is great for all of the AS 400 customers Press ENTER to inquiry again lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 v VALUE Page Down gt Up gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 AME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 2 VALUE F2 gt lt INPU TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 4 VAL VALUE F5 gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUT AME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 7 VALUE F7 gt lt INPU TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 9 VAL VALUE F10 gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB5770
157. ML such as tables and frames the simple Web model remains a static model The user s only interactive options are limited to clicking on a link to visit another page or requesting a page reload Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Figure 2 Open Connectlon Request Page Send Page Close Connection The Simple Web Model 2 3 2 Interactive Web Model In the interactive Web model pages can contain forms fields and buttons that allow users to enter data and choices When they complete the forms and make their choices the browser opens a connection with the server to allow the data and choices to be transmitted The Web server passes the information to a custom server program or script that makes an inquiry or does calculations and passes back a new page for the browser to display The connection is closed The interactive Web model supports a simple form of client server computing using Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP as the middleware and the Web server s Common Gateway Interface CGI that calls a custom server program or script This model works well for simple interactions that do not require high inter activity between the client and server However it is quite expensive in terms of server resources and time when establishing a connection between the browser and the server for each interaction Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 7 oo pal sae al Ja lente Mesa Lava ppi dvelepec
158. ML Gateway Implementation 175 5 3 1 4 Change Workstation Gateway Attributes CHGWSGA Command Prompt The following display appears if the CHGWSGA command is prompted from the command line or if CFGTCPWSG option 1 is selected The values shown are the current values as determined by the Prompt Override Program for CHGWSGA ee Change Workstation Gateway Attributes CHGWSGA System SYSNMO11 Type choices press Enter Autostart fap anm Saleen cel oe oer de NO NO YES SAME Number of clients per server job 20 1 50 SAME DFT Inactivity timeout 10 0 60 minutes SAME DFT Data request timeout 10 1 1200 seconds SAME DFT Display sign on panel YES SAME NO YES Access logging NO SAME NO YES Top banner URL NONE Bottom banner URL NONE F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Figure 80 Change Workstation Gateway Attributes Display Since many clients can be expected to use the Workstation Gateway Server it is important to try to always have free servers waiting for new connect requests To stay ahead of potential load demands jobs are pre started to avoid SBMJOB latency when a new server job is close to being needed When we say pre started we mean that we submit a new child server with the SBMJOB when the number of available jobs remember we are multiplexing connections within a single batch serv
159. N SCOPE SHOWSQL DB_CASE OUT DTWTABLE SQL_CODE ENVIRONMENT DTW_SYSTEM QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHSYS SRVPGM Figure 74 Contents of Net Data Initialization INI File Net Data on the AS 400 system recognizes three special path statements It uses these statements to determine where to look for files to process e MACRO_PATH e EXEC_PATH INCLUDE_PATH These path statements identify a set of directories that are searched by the Web macro processor for Web macros include files and executable files Each directory specified is delimited by a semi colon Forward slashes and backward slashes are treated the same The multiple path capability of the MACRO_PATH EXEC_PATH INCLUDE_PATH and HTML_PATH statements enable different products using Net Data to be isolated to their own directories The format of the MACRO_PATH statement is MACRO_PATH pathname pathname The MACRO_PATH statement identifies one or more directories to search in the order in which they are specified for a Net Data macro file Net Data uses the PATH_INFO environment variable when resolving to a Web macro For example if the following URL was used to send a Net Data request http hostname cgi bin db2ww WWW macro SQLM report the portion of the URL that Net Data considers to be the Web macro name is IWWW macro SQLM Net Data appends the path to the paths in the MACRO_PATH configuration statement from left to right
160. NCTION DIW_SYSTEM EXEC1 FUNCTION DTW_SQL QUERY1 OUT Mytable FEET INPUT SECTION REREREERE ES HTML INPUT lt HTML gt lt H1 gt PRICE QUOTE lt h1 gt QUERY1 Mytable lt P gt The results of the REXX program OUTPUT SECTION 9 HTML OUTPUT lt HTML gt SSS Programs Figure 43 Net Data Macro Files Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 115 116 Notice that the following macro consists of four major logical sections the Define section the Function Definition section the HTML Input section and the HTML Output section You can have several HTML sections but this simple example only has two Also notice that the two HTML sections contain familiar HTML tags which makes writing Web macros easy If you are familiar with HTML building a macro simply involves adding macro statements to be processed dynamically at the server Although the macro file looks similar to an HTML document the Web server accesses it through Net Data as a CGI program Net Data expects two parameters the name of the macro to process and the HTML section in that macro to display To understand what happens when a macro is executed let s go through the following example macro section by section and see what each statement means kkkkkkkk Defi ne Section RERERARERE SDEFINE page title Web Macro Template DEFINE DATABASE LOCAL TABLE LIB FILE Myt
161. NZ Ln of EnVar name 0020 00 These are used for APIStdOut 0021 00 DOutBuff S 100A Area for output 0022 00 DOutBuffLn S 9B 0 INZ 100 Length of Output ar 0023 00 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0024 00 C MOVEL parm ENVarName 0025 00 C Z ADD 05 ENVarLn 0026 00 C CALLB QtmhGetEnv 0027 00 C parm ENBuff Input buffer 0028 00 C parm ENBuffLn Input buffer max In 0029 00 C parm ENActLn StdIn actual length 0030 00 C parm ENVarName 0031 00 C parm ENVarLn 0032 00 C parm QUSEC 0033 00 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0034 00 Upon return your Query_String data is in ENBuff with the length 0035 00 of the data returned in ENActLn 0036 00 Move this data to the DBCvt parms 0037 00 C eval outbuff amp subst enbuff 1 enactIn txt eo 0038 00 C as checkr outbuff outbuffln 0039 00 C callb QtmhWrStout 0040 00 C parm OUTBuff Output buffer 0041 00 C parm OUTBuffLn Output buffer len h 0042 00 C parm QUSEC 0043 00 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0044 00 C eval inlr on 0045 00 C return Figure 50 RPG Program Called from Net Data This macro calls the RPG program and returns the result to the browser SL RRKKKKRKE Function RRKRRREREEG FUNCTION DTW_SYSTEM rpgpgm in parml EXEC QSYS LIB NDCGI LIB rpgpgm pgm serene INPUT KKK
162. OOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET LISTSERV PACKAGE To register for information on workshops residencies and redbooks TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ITSOREGI 1996 For a list of product area specialists in the ITSO TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ORGCARD PACKAGE Redbooks Home Page on the World Wide Web http w3 itso ibm com redbooks IBM Direct Publications Catalog on the World Wide Web http www elink ibmlink ibm com pb1 pbl IBM employees may obtain LIST3820s of redbooks from this page REDBOOKS category on INEWS Online send orders to USIB6FPL at IBMMAIL or DKIBMBSH at IBMMAIL Internet Listserver With an Internet e mail address anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an e mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note leave the subject line blank A category form and detailed instructions will be sent to you Copyright IBM Corp 1997 279 How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks Customers may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways 280 Online Orders Do not send credit card information over the Internet send orders to IBMMAIL Internet In United States usib6fpl at ibmmail usib6fpl ibmmail com In Canada caibmbkz at ibmmail Imannix vnet ibm com Outside North America dkibmbsh at ibmmail bookshop dk
163. ORM Tag When the Web browser displays the HTML document it is similar to the following figure Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 63 64 Ordering an AS 400 A rdering an IBM System A5 400 j Elease Hi in th Following j 2 Name Rolf Busch _ aiie 22297 Hamburg 2 Ueberseering 24 m a i Which 45 400 would you like to order i 5 Portable 4 Server System Do you want the Support Line Service Yes No g j Please order A Figure 20 The HTML Document Using the FORM Tag Displayed by the Browser A Form basically consist of three elements 1 The Form method lt FORM METHOD GET ACTION BonusCGI ORDAS400G PGM gt or lt FORM METHOD POST ACTION BonusCGI ORDAS400P PGM gt 2 The Input tags text textarea checkbox radiobutton options 3 Submit button All three elements are used in Figure 19 on page 63 Note that the action keyword contains the URL address to send the input data to when the Submit button is pressed In this case action BonusCGI ORDAS400x PGM A match with an EXEC directive in our HTTP configuration enables the HTTP server to execute a CGI program on behalf of the client In our case action BonusCGI ORDAS400x PGM is mapped with EXEC BonusCGI QSYS LIB ITSCOIC400 LIB m Note This Please note that only programs in the QSYS LIB library may be the target for the input data This i
164. OVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk This sample use a two external functions kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Prototype definitions for gethtml and wrtsection functions copy prototypes Data structure for error reporting copy qsysinc qrpglesrc qusec Constants DBufSize C 32767 DOutBufSize S 5i 0 inz 30000 DDtaStrSize 55 Variables for gethtml Is the name of the file containing output HTML code with sections amp variables see fig x Dfn Ss 10 INZ HTMLSRC Dlib S 10 INZ CGIDEV Dmbr S 10 INZ OUTRPG Names values and lengths arrays for writing standard output Used in setvardata subroutine and wrtsection function Dsection S 10 Dvarnm S 10 dim 50 Dvarval S 500 dim 50 Dvarln S 5I 0 dim 50 Dv1 S 5i 0 Variables for getenvf subprocedure Denvrcvr s 32767 Denvrcvrin s 10i 0 inz size envrevr Denvrspln s 10i 0 Denvrqsnm s 30 DenvrqsIn s 10i 0 Variables for getinf subprocedure DInData S 32767A DInDataLn S 101 0 INZ BufSize DInActLn S 101 0 DInDataType S 5 Variables for cvtdbf subprocedure DbFileName MUST be UPPERCASE DDBFileName S 20A INZ DATASTRYCTCGIDEV DDBDSLn S 10I 0 INZ DtaStrSize
165. P gt lt A HREF home htm gt Home lt A gt lt A HREF mailto webmaster xyz com gt WebMaster lt A gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt If you choose to create a custom plain text footer file Webulator 400 inserts the plain text footer in a Preformatted text section followed immediately by the standard Webulator 400 footer Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 211 5 7 4 Additional Customization of Webulator 400 The Webulator 400 User Manual has a more detailed discussion of the following customization configuration items e AS 400 terminal size e Screen background e Virtual keyboard buttons e Input field characteristics e Output characteristics e Screen text colors e Graphical menus e Converting keywords to buttons identifying screen keywords Embedding HTML in the 5250 data stream e Default configuration values e Sample directory based configuration files e Webulator 400 commands 5 7 4 1 Reconfiguring Webulator 400 You may dynamically reconfigure Webulator 400 to use the latest configuration values at any time the Web Server 400 is active by running the Set WWW Configuration Values SETWWWCFG command or by setting the Update executing RPs UPDATE parameter on any of the configuration commands to IMMED It is important to note that when you reconfigure the Webulator 400 settings the new settings take effect for all future sessions and do not change any currently active Webulator 40
166. REREREERE Local Variables Hf BRRRRRRRRAERRER ERE KER AA ke e ke RIA ER EER ERE EKER ER EER ER EER ERERREREREERE char loc_buff FWIDTH Local TRACE buffer ERRATA AAA ARIA EER ERE EKER ER IAA RITA AIAR REE REREREEREREERE Create a database file to write the logon attempt results to BRRRRRRRRRRRERERER IAA AA TIA e ke e e de ke ke ER ER EER AAA IAA AIRIS AIA k kkk kk kkk system QSYS CRTPF FILE QUSRSYS EXITPGM RCDLEN 240 SIZE NOMAX EFE kE ke He He eke ke ke k e ke ke ke e e Re he ke e ke e he e ke ke he e e ke e He IAA RITA ER EER ERERKEREEREREREERE Build up the qualified database file name ERETTA AAA A RIA e ke he e e ke e he AIAR KER EREER AIRIS k kkk kk kkk sprintf file name s QUSRSYS EXITPGM EFFE keke He He ekeke ke ke eke ke ke e e Re he ke e e e he e ke ke he KER ER EER ERR ER ERE EER ERE RERERREREREERE Open database file for permanent log of test results mode a ppend b inary 128 byte fixed length records BRBRRRREREREREER ERE RR A e e de ke e ER IAA REE KER ER IRA RARI AAA EEREREREERER test_file fopen file_name ab lrecl 240 type record recfm f ERETTA AAA RIA IAA IATA AAA ERE ER ERE EKER ERR ER ERE ER EREREEREREERE Build up the input record for the test results database file Write parameters that were passed in to the output file EFE Ekk H H ekeke ke k eke keke e e kehe ke e ke e he e e ke he e de ke e
167. RL for the child would be http www xyz com WwWwW5250 STATUS 3 Check for expected configuration values to ensure that the Webulator 400 URLs are using the configuration values you are expecting Note If any are not they are either using a default value or are inheriting a value from one of their parent directories If a directory entry is inheriting an undesirable configuration value you must define a new value in the current Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 199 directory to override the inherited value These values can be set through options 8 9 and 10 of the WRKWWWDIR command or directly using the WRKWBLROW WRKWBLPRS and CHGWBLCFG commands 5 6 2 Webulator 400 Sign On Methods 200 The following section describes the detail for configuring the sign on parameters The parameters are Method This can be one of User Screen UseAuthentication or Disabled e User causes the system to automatically sign on with a specific user name This is the most secure way to configure Webulator 400 because you have control over what AS 400 user profiles people are allowed to sign on with If this is specified it must be followed by a UserName which is described later Screen causes users to be presented with an AS 400 sign on display They may type in the AS 400 user and password they want to use to sign on This is less secure because the AS 400 user and password are sent over the TCP IP network between the browse
168. RR EERE EER ER ERR ER ERE KERR EER ER EER EREREEREREERE static void exitpgm char int char int char char char char char char static void WriteParms char int char int char char char char char char EFE R H k eke ke ke k e ke ke he AREER ER AAA e eke ke e e e ke He ke e e e ke e e Re EER ER EER EREREEREREERE All file scoped variable declarations go here EFE R H k e ke keke k e ke ke he e e ke ke he deke e He e e ke e RISATA ERE KER ER EERE KIRA IRA ke kekek char file_name FNAME Output results database file name FILE test_file Output results database file pointer char file_buff FWIDTH Output results file buffer Figure 102 Part 2 of 7 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway 266 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Function Specification Feke ke e ke he e e ke e e e e He AREER ER ERE KER ER REEREREREERERERE Function Name Main TR Descriptive Name Application Logon exit program sample program This test exit program provides control over signon panels via the WSG server in the V3R2 release eg Notes For V3R2 the argv parameters are char by definition Reference integers as int argv 1 for example J Consider the method for passing them back to the caller VE Dependencies WSG Application Logon exit point QIBM_QTMT_WSG format QAPP0100 was regis
169. RVPGM you receive a message similar to the following example Definition not found for symbol QtmhRdStin m Case Sensitive Alert The service program APIs of QtmhGetEnv QtmhRdStin QtmhWrStout and QtmhCvtDb are case sensitive If you misspell one of them or if the case is wrong for just one of the letters you receive the following message after your CRTPGM the binding step fails Message ID CPD5D1D Severity 20 Message type Diagnostic Date sent 10 30 96 Time sent 14 33 Message SRVPGM object QZDMMDTA in library QSOC not found Cause SRVPGM object QZDMMDTA in library QSOC was specified binding directory QUSAPIBD in library LIBL but was not found for bind Recovery Contact your application provider or service representative This message is seemingly not related at all to the source of the problem The APIs are provided to simplify parsing form data from either stdin or from the environment variable QUERY STRING The CGI program is expected to provide the name of the DDS file specification that identifies the anticipated form variables and their attributes The server times the operation CGI programs and terminates child server jobs exceeding the time limit There are three timeout keywords for input timeout output timeout and script timeout Also the server protects itself from CGI program exceptions by providing exception handling tha
170. S We Figure 13 AS 400 File Systems File Server and Integrated File System Interface The OS 400 file server also uses part of the Integrated File System interface This file server provides file serving capabilities equivalent to shared folders but allows PC clients to access information in any of the file systems The PC clients use their own interfaces to interact with the file systems rather than the Integrated File System user interfaces and APIs PC clients using the LAN Server requestor or Novell NetWare requestor interact with the Integrated PC Server File Server I O Processor directly rather than the Integrated File System interface The Integrated PC Server provides even higher rates of access to its files 2 13 3 How to Exchange Data Between the Root or QOpenSys and QSYS LIB 46 There are two commands available to transfer data between the AS 400 library file system and any other IFS file system e CPYFRMSTMF Copy from Stream File e CPYTOSTMF Copy to Stream File However you can also use your file manager in OS 2 or in Windows95 and Client Access to copy edit and manage your files in the IFS on the AS 400 system For more information refer to the following topics and publications Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet e OS 400 file server 05 400 Server Concepts and Administration SC41 3740 LAN Server LAN Server for OS 400 Administration SC41 3423 e NetWare 05 400 NetWare Integr
171. S 400 Programming Languages Supported 3 7 Decoding the Parameters from the Remote Web Client 3 7 1 CGI Parameter String Syntax 20 2048 3 8 Programming CGI BIN with ILE C 400 2 2 0202 0200 3 8 1 Structure of C Program with POST Method 3 8 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE C 400 3 8 3 ILE C Sample Programs using POST and GET Methods 3 9 Programming CGI BIN with ILE RPG 400 and ILE COBOL 400 3 9 1 Structure of RPG Program Using POST Method 3 9 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE COBOL 400 or RPG 400 3 9 3 ILE RPG Program Using the POST and GET Methods 3 10 Programming CGI with REXX Language 3 10 1 Structure of REXX Program Using POST Method 3 11 Examples for Environment Variables Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 3 12 ITSO Company Example 102 3 12 1 Source Code RPG Program ORDAS400G 103 3 12 2 Source Code RPG Program ORDAS400P 107 3 12 3 Source Code C Program PARSECGIP aaa aaa aaa 108 Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 111 4 1 An Overview of Net Data for AS 400 System 111 4 1 1 Beyond DB2WWW Connection o 112 4 1 2 Features and Functions 112 4 1 3 Generalized Data Sources 113 4 1 4 Advanced Macro Language 113 4 1 5 Net Data and Internet Security 114 4 2 Writing Net Da
172. SG24 4935 00 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet June 1997 International Technical Support Organization Rochester Center International Technical Support Organization RESO Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet June 1997 Take Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information in Appendix C Special Notices on page 275 First Edition June 1997 This edition applies to Version 3 Release 2 and Version 3 Release 7 of the Operating System 400 5763 SS1 and 5716 SS1 Comments may be addressed to IBM Corporation International Technical Support Organization Dept JLU Building 107 2 3605 Highway 52N Rochester Minnesota 55901 7829 When you send information to IBM you grant IBM a non exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1997 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Figures lt p iii ale ha he e ee eed eae Bda ix Tables tor lele tia siii Mag e eee i xi Preface picca Sa Ate amp ng om eh oe a oe Go ns xiii The Team That Wrote This Redbook xiii Comments Welcome 1
173. SYSTEM language environment variable 133 T table manipulation function 130 table variables 131 textarea tag 29 title tag 29 to stream file copying 46 transaction context 12 TRANSACTION_SCOPE 144 transactions 12 typetype tag 29 U underline text tag 29 underlined tag 29 unordered list tag 29 user ID 143 user profile QTMHHTP1 139 143 164 using include file 146 V variable 117 121 125 variable tag 29 variables 112 visual builder 12 visual web manager 11 VisualAge Java for AS 400 12 W Web registry function 131 Web serving capacity 242 word manipulation function 130 Work with Relational Database Directory Entries WRKRDBDIRE command 117 working with relational database directory entries 117 writing net data macro file 114 WRKRDBDIRE Work with Relational Database Directory Entries command 117 Index 287 288 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet ITSO Redbook Evaluation Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet SG24 4935 00 Your feedback is very important to help us maintain the quality of ITSO redbooks questionnaire and return it using one of the following methods e Use the online evaluation form found at http www redbooks com Fax this form to USA International Access Code 1 914 432 8264 Send your comments in an Internet note to redeval vnet ibm com Please rate your overall satisfaction with this book using the scale 1 very good 2 good 3 average 4
174. Section Output 0 Browser View of HTML Output RPG Program Called from Net Data 0 RPG Program Input Window x 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 RPG Program Report Window 128 REXX Calls RPG Program COUNT 129 Net Data Table View 132 Message Block Macro 138 Macro REXXM ir i e e LA i eee aa 140 REXX Source of TREXX MBR ooa aaa 140 Contents of QGPL QSQCLIPKG 2 00040 141 Simple SQL Command Function aaa aaa 143 System Function Macro 145 Using Include Files 146 Include File TIMERFTN 0 000000 00200038 146 INCLUDE File TIMERSTR 00 0000 0 000084 147 INCLUDE File TIMEREND 2 0 0 00000000008 147 Net Data Environment Variables Macro 151 Sample of Net Data Environment Variables 151 Macro to Get Environment Variables 152 Sample Output of Environment Variables 2 2 2 152 Net Data Select Box Macro 153 Sample Select BOX 154 Copy to Stream File with ASCII Conversion 155 Get and Post Statements 0 161 Map and Exec Statements oaa aaa 162 Contents of Net Data Initialization INI File 163 Sample Net Data URLO 165 A
175. Set the ENVarLn to this length 12 In This Case C MOVEL BLANKS ENBuff c MOVEL QUERY_STRING ENVarName kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Z ADD 12 ENVarLn c EXSR GETENV Upon return your Query_String data is in ENBuff with the len of the data returned in ENActLn Move this data to the DBCvt parms kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c Z ADD 103 DBDSLn F H A A k e e A e e k k de Ae A e e e A Ae A e k k e e e e e e TI CCI CITI e IR RI ICICI RR I k k I RR k k K A K k k KK c MOVEL ENBuff DBBuff c Z ADD ENActLn DBBuffLn kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Circumvention for HIDDEN fields find out MEMBER NAME for HTMLO kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c MOVEL ENBuff M14 14 C MOVE M14 M10 10 c Se XLATE M10 MBR 10 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk END Circumvention kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Parse using the CvtDB API c EXSR PARSE The field names in your Ext DS now contain the Values passed in the POST data Move them to the DB file fields kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OVR HTMLOUT with MEMBER ORDAS400 and open file c MOVEA OVRDBF 1 OVRARR c MOVEA MBR
176. Typical Company Showing the HTML Gateway Link to the Internet 170 Workstation Gateway 171 5250 HTML Gateway Implementation Route 172 CFGTCPWSG Display 175 Change Workstation Gateway Attributes Display 176 The AS 400 Sign on Display Seen by the Workstation Gateway 178 The Command Entry Display Seen by the Workstation Gateway 180 The Work with Active Jobs Display Seen by the Workstation Gateway 181 DDS Source for Customer Comment Inquiry Display 182 Customer Comment Inquiry DDS on the Traditional Text 5250 Display 183 A Portion of the HTML Automatically Generated by the HTML Gateway 184 Display of Customer Master Record through Workstation Gateway 185 Display of Subfile Record through 5250 HTML Gateway 186 Sample 5250 DDS Enhanced with the HTML Tag 188 Link Table and Images Imbedded in DDS 189 CL Program Example 205 RPG Program Example 206 COBOL Program Example 2 00000 eee 206 AS 400 Firewall Technology Preview 226 Internet Connection Secure Server Preview 228 Distribution of Connections aaa aaa 238 AS 400 Relative Performance CPW for Advanced Server Models V3R7 241 AS 400 HTTP versus CGI Bin versus Net Data 242 AS 400 HTTP Server Performance Simple Page Serving 245 AS 400 File Size Variation aaa aa a 246 5250 HTML Workstation Gateway Comparison
177. Up to 50 databases can be accessed either local or remote The connections to the databases are kept active by the SQL language environment for the life of the HTTP server job that Net Data is running under This results in fast database access after the initial connection to the database When the SQL language environment establishes a connection to a remote system it associates a user ID with the connection If on a subsequent Net Data query the user ID does not match those associated with the connection the connection is ended and a new connection to the database is established this only occurs if transaction scope is SINGLE Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet If a language environment is created that uses the database access class library or the SQL call level interface and the language environment is referenced in a macro the SQL language environment cannot be used e The QTMHHTPI1 user profile must have the proper authority to access the database on the machine where the HTTP server resides For remote databases the user ID and password is used to determine what database resources can be accessed Performance Tip If performance is a concern Web macro writers should hard code or use the same user ID when issuing SQL statements to a remote database For local database access the user ID and password are ignored e SQL statements cannot be passed to the SQL language environment on an EXEC statement The
178. Use the WRKHTTPCFG command to change the HTTP server configuration or CHGHTTPA command to change the HTTP server attributes 2 Refer to the following books to help you in configuring the HTTP server e OS 400 TCP IP Configuration and Reference V3 SC41 3420 e Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet SG24 4815 3 2 2 Overview of the Communication Between CGI Programs and the Server The AS 400 HTTP server provides the means for a CGI program to read post data from environment variables and standard input stream stdin The server also provides the means for a CGI program to return data in the standard output stream stdout Necessary APIs Application Program Interfaces are available on the AS 400 system to support the environment variables the standard input stream the standard output stream for RPG and COBOL programs and also for C language programs using SAA C language library APIs The server and the CGI program communicates in four major ways all supported by the AS 400 system Environment variables e The command line e Standard input e Standard output Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 61 Figure 18 Ways of Communication for CGI Programs 62 Web Browser Client Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Input Input Data Stream HTTP server Environment Variables 3 3 CGI BIN Programming Usually the FORM tag is used to start the CGI program based on varia
179. Webulator 400 and operates in conjunction with I NET s AS 400 Web server products either Web Server 400 or Commerce Server 400 I NET s products are available at a cost but can be used with earlier versions of OS 400 So how is it done AS 400 applications are inherently display oriented That means each application creates a series of displays for use in its application These displays are normally sent out in a 5250 data stream to the workstation or emulator which shows the text The HTML gateway intercepts this 5250 data stream and converts it to HTML a language the Web understands Any Web browser used for accessing the World Wide Web can work with the application Workstation Gateway Application Sales Inventory 5250 Data Stream x s Order Status A E SARAAAR als etc cA Text based a Ea workstations SA a amp emulators Na ae Sl get Ms Figure 77 Workstation Gateway An HTML gateway means your business does not need to rely on one specific client platform Any PC that has a Web browser installed can run AS 400 applications There is no additional connection configuration Just point your Web browser to the AS 400 system and you are in business If your company writes AS 400 applications using an HTML gateway means a wealth of new applications on the Internet You do not need to retrain your programmers They can continue using their existing development tools RPG COBOL C and DDS
180. Will Contact you via E Mail DSMAILM C We Will Contact you via Surface d Mail DPMAILM C We Will Contact you via Phone kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k Buffer used for standard API Error handling Copied from QSYSINC QRPGLESRC QUSEC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DQUSEC DS D Qus EC D QUSBPRV 1 4B 0 D Bytes Provided D QUSBAVL 5 8B 0 inz 16 D Bytes Available D QUSEI 9 15 D Exception Id D QUSERVED 16 16 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k This DS contains a Standard startup needed for HTML This is used as output to the user You should change the text between the lt title gt text lt title gt tags gt Hex 15 x 15 is the newline character and is gt REQUIRED between lines of output bi gt A Line of output may not exceed 120 Characters kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk dStdHdr DS inz Content type text html inz x 1515 inz lt HTML gt inz x 15 inz lt head gt inz x 15 inz lt title gt inz x 15 inz Thank you for your input inz lt title gt inz x 15 inz lt body gt inz x 15 inz lt hr gt 1 inz x 15 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk QqoQaqaqqqQqoqQqoaQqoqaQqoqQqaqaqaqqQqaqaq
181. aan BPR DFPOBRrPENKF DEAD W This DS contains a Standard trailer needed for HTML This is used as output to the user kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk dStdTr1 DS d 7 inz lt body gt d 1 inz x 15 d 7 inz lt htm1 gt d 1 inz x 15 252 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet ee eS ERO eee ee RR IO IRR EAT E O e kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk This DS contains the user output data It should change sg from program to program kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk dOutInf DS d 6 inz Name dnameo like Name d 4 inz lt BR gt d 1 inz x 15 d 7 inz Addrl daddrlo like addr1 d 4 inz lt BR gt d 1 inz x 15 d 7 inz Addr2 daddr2o like addr2 d 4 inz lt BR gt d 1 inz x 15 d 6 inz City 7 dcityo like city d 1 inz dstateo like state d 1 inz dzipo like zip d 1 inz dzipp4o like zipp4 d 4 inz lt BR gt d 1 inz x 15 d 8 inz Phone dphaco like phac d 2 inz dphpreo like phpre d 1 inz dphnumo like phnum d 5 inz Ext dphexto like phext d 4 inz lt BR gt d 1 inz x 15 d 7 inz EMail deaddro like eaddr d 4 inz lt BR gt d 1 inz x 15 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
182. able TABLE ALL Function Definition Section FUNCTION DTW_REXX rexx1 IN input returns result EXEC qsys 1ib netdatawww 1ib qrexsrc file ompsamp mbr o KI o 4 oe a FUNCTION DTW_REXX today RETURNS result result date als HTML Section Input 44 SHTML INPUT lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt page_title lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Input Form lt h1 gt lt hr gt Today is today lt FORM METHOD post ACTION output gt Type some data to pass to a REXX program lt INPUT NAME input_data TYPE text SIZE 30 gt lt p gt lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE Enter gt lt FORM gt lt hr gt lt p gt lt a href gt Home page lt a gt Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet lt body gt lt html gt o 2 ARERR HTML Section Output RERERAEERED SHTML OUTPUT lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt page_title lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt 0utput Page lt h1 gt lt hr gt lt p gt rexx1 input_data lt p gt lt hr gt lt p gt lt a href gt Home page lt a gt lt a href input gt Previous page lt a gt lt body gt lt html gt di 0 4 2 1 Define Section The Define section allows you to set up the variables that are used in the macro o kkkkkkkk Define Section RR
183. ablishes a connection if a connection has not already been established to the database specified in this variable The following example shows how this variable can be set ina Web macro DEFINE DATABASE HOSTNAME e LOGIN and PASSWORD If the DATABASE parameter references a remote database the user ID and password specified in the LOGIN and PASSWORD variables are used when connecting to a database These parameters are ignored when accessing the local database and the user profile that CGI BIN programs run under TMHHTP1 must be given access to any files that are accessed DEFINE LOGIN MYUSERID DEFINE PASSWORD DB2WWW e TRANSACTION_SCOPE Specifies the transaction scope for SQL commands If the variable is not defined the default action is MULTIPLE which means to COMMIT only after all SQL commands in an HTML block complete successfully An unsuccessful SQL command causes all previously executed SQL commands in that block to be rolled back Specifying SINGLE means that a COMMIT is made after each successful SQL command in an HTML block DEFINE TRANSACTION SCOPE SINGLE e SHOWSQL Hide or display the SQL command that was executed The default is not to display the SQL command that was executed DEFINE SHOWSQL YES e DB CASE Specifies what case the SQL command should be in before executing the command The default is to do no conversion Specify UPPER or LOWER to force all c
184. advantage of the HTTP mapping rules For example we use the following URL to do the same thing Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 33 34 lt A HREF cgi bin imagemap map1 mbr gt lt IMG SRC wor d gif ISMAP gt lt A gt Where you see cgi bin imagemap we used the HTTP Map configuration statement to reference the longer URL The following lines must be added to the HTTP configuration to make it work Map cgi bin imagemap qsys lib qtcp lib qtmhimag pgm qsys lib itsoic400 1ib imagemap file Pass qsys lib itsoic400 1ib imagemap file Exec qsys lib qtcp lib To access the HTTP configuration file type WRKHTTPCFG on an AS 400 command line Add the Map Pass and Exec statements noted previously By using the Map directive in our HTTP configuration we are able to use shorter URLs in our HTML documents The Pass statement is there to pass the image map files from the server There must also be an Exec statement to call the qtmhimag program from the qtcp library URL for image map lt A href egi bin imagemap mapk mbr gt lt IMG SRC imvg300 gif ISMAP gt lt a gt te HTTP config Map cgi bin imagemap qsys lib qtep lib qtmhimag pgm qsys lib itsoic400 lib imagemap file a Program to execu qsys lib qtep lib qtmhimag pgm HTTP config Exec qsys lib qtcp Image map source qsys lib itsoic400 lib imagemap file mapk mbr HTTP config Pass qsys lib itsoic400 lib
185. ag 29 hidden field 14 how used 15 hidden variables 147 history mechanism 12 horizontal tag 29 how fast can web site go 237 HTML blocks 122 HTML forms tag 27 HTML section 115 119 121 HTML syntax 27 HTML tag 29 HTML3 2 25 HTTP CGI programming model 18 CGI program parameter data 20 58 connectionless 20 58 environment variable 19 57 named activation group 20 58 performance 20 58 pre started server job 20 58 standard input 19 57 HTTP CGI programming model continued Stdin Stdout 20 58 ILE integrated language environment 35 image tag 29 imagemap 30 IN variable 126 INCLUDE_PATH 146 163 index tag 29 INOUT variable 126 input tag 29 integrated file system 155 integrated file system consideration application 45 environment 45 flexibility 45 NFS 44 performance 45 QDLS 43 qfilesvr 400 44 QLANSrv 43 QNetWare 44 qopensys 43 QOPT 43 QSYS LIB 43 root 43 UDFS 44 integrated language environment CALLER activation group 37 NEW activation group 37 SRVPGM 35 ACTGRP CALLER 39 activation group 39 activation groups 37 bind by copy 35 bind by reference 35 binding directory 38 CRTSRCPF 42 default activation group 39 exception handling 42 modules and programs 35 NAMED activation group 37 procedures 35 program entry procedure PEP 38 QRPGLESRC 42 RCLRSC 42 RPG III source 42 RPG IV source 42 scoping 42 static binding 35 static storage 42 system named activation group NEW 40 user named activation
186. age Environments Net Data is designed to allow new language and database interfaces to be added in a pluggable fashion These language environments are accessed as service programs The name of the service program is configured in the Net Data initialization file and associated with a language environment name Each language environment must support a standard set of interfaces defined by Net Data Net Data for OS 400 provides the following language environments REXX Allows external REXX programs or inline REXX statements in a Web macro function block to be interpreted by the REXX interpreter SQL Allows SQL statements to be processed by DB2 System Allows external programs C RPG COBOL to be run The following sections describe the language environments previously listed 4 6 1 REXX DTW_REXX Language Environment The REXX language environment can interpret internal REXX programs that are specified in a FUNCTION block of the Web macro or it can execute external REXX programs stored in a separate file Some of the characteristics of the REXX language environments are The QREXX REXX application program interface API is used by the language environment to start the REXX interpreter for a REXX program e The QREXVAR REXX API is used by the REXX language environment to pass data to a REXX program and to read data from a REXX program Thus REXX programs can directly manipulate the Net Data parameter variables specif
187. ample take a look at the FORM tag see Figure 25 The first input field is a hidden field which simply means that the end user does not see this field nor is the user given the opportunity to modify the value associated with it The second named field is querydata which is presented to the end user with the possibility to update The input that is entered by the end user for each input field is called the value m gt lt FORM METHOD GET ACTION BonusCGI CGIENVGET PGM gt lt INPUT type hidden name MBR value CGIENVGETE size 10 gt lt INPUT TYPE text NAME querydata MAXLENGTH 20 VALUE gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Send Request gt lt INPUT TYPE RESET VALUE Clear Your Input gt lt FORM gt Figure 25 Two Named Input Fields Defined in the HTML Form lt is this stream of name value pairs that flow back to your CGI application running on the AS 400 system when the user selects the Submit button with the mouse These are the name value pairs that you are reading either from standard in or the QUERY_STRING environment variable One more thing must be mentioned A well behaved Web client can modify the format of the parameter string Each name value pair is separated by the ampersand amp character Also each name value pair is URL encoded which means spaces are changed into pluses and some characters are encoded into hexadecimal Agai
188. and all data flows clearly over the net no encryption for Telnet available today The same is true for Personal Communication of Client Access 400 although it has some nice features that distinguish it from using plain Telnet tn5250 Personal Communication allows you to copy and paste between an AS 400 session and any other PC session allows you to record and playback keystrokes transfers files between the host and the PC and some more functions to assist a workstation session configuration and customization 2 9 HTML Programming Considerations 24 The following sections do not try to teach you how to program HTML but rather give some basic information and some hints on writing HTML We strongly recommend that you buy one of the many available books on the market about HTML and Web Publishing Note A good reference book and book to learn about HTML is Teach yourself Web Publishing with HTML 3 x from Laura Lemay published by sams net There are a lot of nice HTML tools available that makes HTML coding easy in fact so easy that you do not even have to do know about any HTML statement AII of it is done through templates and prepared forms and wizards Because of this there is no need to learn all about HTML but the is no harm in knowing about the basics The following section gives you an introduction to HTML and some references to more detailed information Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet
189. anging the CPU only affects the CPU component of the workload If you know the CPU component for a particular workload you can estimate an improvement in the CPU component by using the Relative Performance Rating Note The preceding method does not take into account wait time for queues in the system for CPU DASD or other system components that are a function of utilization and cannot easily be modeled by hand Capacity planning should be done with a capacity planning tool such as BEST 1 for OS 400 Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 241 8 4 Web Serving with the HTTP Server The Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP server allows AS 400 systems attached to a TCP IP network to provide objects to any Web browser At a high level the connection is made the request is received and processed a file system is accessed or a CGI program is accessed the data is sent to the browser and the connection is ended The HTTP server jobs and the communications router tasks are the primary jobs tasks involved there is not a separate user job for each attached user 8 4 1 Web Serving Performance Measurements The following charts provide a summary of the measured performance data Results listed here do not represent any particular customer environment Actual performance may vary significantly from what is provided here 8 4 2 AS 400 HTTP Server Performance AS 400 HTTP Server Performance Simple Transactions
190. anguage for the AS 400 system As the Java technology evolves from Sun the AS 400 system will take advantage of the new functions and features of the language There is an exciting future for Java on the AS 400 system This section describes the current plans for Java technology but is not a commitment to the function or performance of future products on the AS 400 system This document will be updated as these plans change in the future Currently an effort is underway to integrate Java technology with OS 400 A Java Virtual Machine that resides below the TIMI is planned to enable fast interpretation and execution of Java code on the AS 400 system In addition a direct execution static compiler is being developed that can generate RISC machine code as well as the portable Java bytecodes This will allow Java code to directly execute on the AS 400 system without the overhead of interpretation High performance garbage collection is also being developed for the AS 400 system to improve both the performance and the scalability of Java The high level of integration and tuning of Java on the AS 400 system will meet the objective of competitive performance while preserving cross platform portability Other technology is being developed that will allow GUI applications to run on the AS 400 system without modification Support is planned for Java on the AS 400 system that intercepts GUI requests coming from a Java program and reroutes the requests to an
191. ar with the software is to run it on the demo presentation that is supplied with the software See the instructions in the README for running the demo presentation For more information and to download a Beta version of an Internet Visual Web Management Tool see http ww ics raleigh ibm com ics icfbetas htm Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 11 2 4 5 Java Development Environment VisualAge Java for the AS 400 system includes a suite of visual builders for interactively building Java applications on client machines including OS 2 and Win95 NT clients It includes an integrated development environment with a project manager class browser editor and debugger It also includes a set of remote debug classes that allow a Java application written on the AS 400 system to be debugged from a client machine Other OEM tools can also be used to build AS 400 Java applications 2 5 General Design Considerations There are some general design considerations to be taken into account when writing or modifying applications for the Internet The following sections cover some of the major design considerations and differences to native AS 400 application design 2 5 1 Transactions over the World Wide Web using the Internet Running an AS 400 application over the Internet can be quite different to what applications do in a normal environment Since there is no constant connection between the server and the client there is no tra
192. arri e n a lt 37 A8DATE EDTCDE Y 2 Press Enter to continue COLOR BLU NAME 20A 0 ORD 5A 0 STAT 10A 0 RP NN NANU UW rFPrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr Tr N AFKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKAK A A You will have to edit the next statement to your system name A F11 to scroll right A Make sure you right justify it leave no blanks in URL A For example change gt http s1046401 sysland ibm com A to this gt http 9 5 10 126 A AFKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK 23 2HTML lt IMG SRC http s1046401 sysland ibm com QOpenSys ORDER IMG ordstat gif align right gt rrrrst 274 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Appendix C Special Notices This publication is intended to help those people who are responsible for the task of recommending and implementing an AS 400 network computing solution The information in this publication is not intended as the specification of any programming interfaces that are provided by the products mentioned in this book See the PUBLICATIONS section of the IBM Programming Announcement for more information about what publications are considered to be product documentation References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product
193. atically select the first input field while several do not select any fields but instead require the user to select a field before being able to enter data Field level prompting does not work Webulator 400 can generate a JavaScript routine that automatically returns to the AS 400 system the location of the last input field that had focus Please note that you must have a JavaScript capable browser for the cursor position to be reported to the AS 400 system correctly If you do not have Send JavaScript enabled or your browser does not support JavaScript you must take an extra step to get field level prompting You can inform Webulator 400 of the field position you want to return to the AS 400 system by typing a configurable string the system default is a in the field and pressing a non enter Submit button When Webulator 400 recognizes the Field Level Prompting string it strips it out of the 5250 data stream and returns the cursor location of the current field Browser does not properly display Webulator 400 displays Various browsers support different levels of the HTML specifications Browsers should ignore HTML tags that they do not understand Unfortunately some browsers incorrectly interpret these unknown tags The results can vary from incorrect colors to improper formatting Webulator 400 requires an HTML 2 0 compliant browser to run most configurations and a browser that supports HTML extensions to use some of the more advanced con
194. ation Support SC41 4124 2 14 Java Programming Considerations This section discusses how different Java programming techniques can further enhance your AS 400 HTML pages 2 14 1 Java Scripts being Served from AS 400 System egrating Java Script Library Any Java Scripts created on any platform can be stored and served from the AS 400 system to any client requesting the script There are no special things to take into consideration for serving Java Scripts The following information is a Java Script test page found on the Internet at http ww software ibm com data net data demos demopage htm js1 This test page can be used to explore the capabilities of JavaScript and you can copy the code and implement it into your application Please give it a try http testcase boulder jbm com 808 ogi bin db2www jvalib mac input Integrating Java Script Library JavaScript Library Test Page This page shows the typechecking and autoformatting functions provided with Net Data These JavaScripts serve many purposes such as E Fewer database errors E Less bandwidth usage E More efficient user input To test these functions simply place the cursor in one of the form fields Then leave the field either by clicking the test button or tabbing to a new field If the value in the field does not meet the criteria of that field you will see a JavaScript warning message Additionally if the critical selection is set to yes then the cursor will be
195. ation and Reference SC41 3420 03 contains information about the registration of this exit point Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 191 192 Table 16 User Exit Program Extensions Parameter Description In Out Type 1 Operation Specific Information Input Char 2 Length of Operation Specific Information from Input Binary 4 URL 3 Client IP Dotted Decimal address Char 15 4 CCSID Input i 5 Allow Operation Output 1 6 User Profile Output 10 7 Password Char 10 8 Current Library Output 10 9 Program to call Output 10 10 Initial menu Output 10 11 Session end URL Note Do not use the Client IP address parameter 3 as a means of identifying authorized users to your system It is possible for IP addresses to be spoofed or copied Note Session end URL Output parameter 11 is accepted as an extension to User Exit point QAPP0100 for Workstation Gateway It must be a fully qualified URL up to 300 characters trailing blanks stripped for example http httpserver directory some htm This URL link is sent to the Web browser whenever the Workstation Gateway session is ended If no URL is specified the default action is to post timing statistics One trick you might want to do is have the session end URL arrive as part of parameter 1 operation specific information The exit program can simply echo parameter 1 out through parameter 11 The following example illustrates this co
196. ation group names can only be changed by re creating the program this approach minimizes your effort in case of a change Consider changing the default value to CALLER using the Change Command Default CHGCMDDFT command Your application design should ensure that ILE programs created with ACTGRP CALLER are not called from the default activation group When an ILE program is run in the default activation group its files may be closed by the RCLRSC command The RCLRSC command may be issued by some other application running in the default activation group and therefore outside the control of your application When an ILE program is run in a named activation group its files may only be closed by the RCLACTGRP command or by the use of the RPG IV SETON LR operation just as it functions today for OPM 2 12 6 Differences Between Default and Non Default Activation Groups Any ILE application design must consider whether programs should be allowed to run in the default activation group or not The cause for an ILE program running in the default activation group is ONE of the following reasons The program was created with the ACTGRP CALLER attribute and its caller is running in the default activation group The program is running in compatibility mode The default activation group is provided for running OPM programs and ILE programs with OPM compatibility mode You should not design new ILE programs to run in the default activat
197. ault report by omitting the REPORT block The following example shows how a default report might look for a table with five rows and five columns colt col2 col3 co4 co You can use the DTW_DEFAULT_REPORT special variable to enable or disable default reporting when no REPORT block is specified If DTW_DEFAULT_REPORT is set to NO default reporting is disabled If DTW_DEFAULT_REPORT is set to YES default reporting is enabled The default is YES DTW_DEFAULT_REPORT only applies if no REPORT block is defined Also you have the choice of having the default report generated using HTML tables To enable this the DTW_HTML_TABLE special variable must be set to YES The default is not to use HTML table tags This example shows how you can customize report formats using special variables and HTML tags It displays the names phone numbers and Fax numbers from the table CustomerTbl SFUNCTION DTW_SQL custlist SELECT Name Phone Fax FROM CustomerTbl REPORT Phone Query Results lt BR gt lt BR gt ROW Name lt B gt V1 lt B gt lt BR gt Phone V2 lt BR gt Fax V3 lt BR gt lt BR gt Total records retrieved ROW NUM The resulting report looks similar to this Phone Query Results Name Doen David Phone 422 245 1293 Fax 422 245 7383 Name Williamson Jack Phone 955 768 3489 Fax 955 768 3974
198. ave the subject line blank Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet IBM Redbook Order Form Please send me the following Title Order Number Quantity First name Last name Company Address City Postal code Country Telephone number Telefax number VAT number e Invoice to customer number e Credit card number Credit card expiration date Card issued to Signature We accept American Express Diners Eurocard Master Card and Visa Payment by credit card not available in all countries Signature mandatory for credit card payment DO NOT SEND CREDIT CARD INFORMATION OVER THE INTERNET How to Get ITSO Redbooks 281 282 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Index Special Characters character 125 DTW_ASSIGN 129 DTW_ DELSTR 147 amp MESSAGE 136 138 DEFINE 122 129 ENVVAR 152 FUNCTION 124 125 HTML 122 INCLUDE 146 REPORT 123 ROW block 134 footer 134 header 134 variable 132 TABLE 131 lt A gt 27 lt ADDRESS gt 27 lt B gt 27 lt BASE gt 27 lt BLOCKQUOTE gt 27 lt BODY gt 27 lt BR gt 27 lt CITE gt 27 lt CODE gt 27 lt DD gt 29 lt DIR gt 27 lt DL gt 27 lt DT gt 27 lt EM gt 27 lt FORM gt 27 lt H1 gt 29 lt H2 gt 29 lt H3 gt 29 lt H4 gt 29 lt H5 gt 29 lt H6 gt 29 lt HEAD gt 29 lt HR gt 29 lt HTML gt 29 lt l gt 29 lt IMG gt 29 lt INPUT gt 29 lt ISINDEX gt 29 lt KBD gt 29 lt LI gt 29 lt LINK gt
199. ay Signon DSPSGN parameter is set to YES or else you do not get the Signon display You can use CHGWSGA command and prompt to check it After you start or end the Workstation Gateway you can use WRKACTJOB SBS QSYSWRK command to check the QSYSWRK subsystem to see whether the QTWSGnnnn jobs are there or not nnnnn is a unique numeric string that is derived from the timestamp Alternatively it is started through the AUTOSTART option of the STRTCP command The format of a link in an HTML document is called a Universal Resource Locator URL For HTTP the URL identifies the protocol that the browser should use when contacting the server for example HTTP FTP WAIS Gopher and so on the location of the server and of the requested object HTTP has the following form http hostname port path Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet The port numbers for most TCP IP applications such as FTP Telnet or WWW are predefined or you might say well known numbers which means everyone knows them and uses the same port numbers The Workstation Gateway does not have such a well known port number such as the HTTP server has Therefore the port number used by the AS 400 Workstation Gateway is found by querying the local TCP IP configuration services database To establish a Workstation Gateway session you must connect to it by using the form http hostname port WSG where port is the configured port number for that
200. ay Interface e Net Data Interactive Data Publishing with Universal Access to Dynamic Data e HTML Gateway Workstation Gateway e Java applets accessing the AS 400 system directly The following sections explain each option programming model in more detail to allow you to determine which one to use for your specific requirements 2 7 Internet Programming Models There are two dominant programming models currently in use today over the Internet the HTTP CGI programming model and the Internet client server programming model The AS 400 system supports both of these models to varying degrees 18 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 7 1 HTTP CGI Programming Model The HTTP Common Gateway Interface CGI programming model provides a simple interface for running programs external to the HTTP server in a platform independent manner This interface has been in use by the World Wide Web since 1993 A good document that describes this interface can be found at URL http hoohoo ncsa uiuc edu cgi interface htm The purpose of CGI is to extend the capability of an HTTP server by providing framework in which the HTTP server can interface with a program that is specified on a URL The format of the URL allows parameters to be passed to the CGI program On the server side the interface describes how the program is started by the HTTP server and how parameters for the program are passed using a combination of standard input and environ
201. ble is changed by SAMPLE me gt PGM PARM amp REXXPROC DCL VAR amp REXXPROC TYPE CHAR LEN 10 This command runs a REXX Procedure STRREXPRC SRCMBR amp REXXPROC MONMSG MSGID CPF0000 Ignore any errors ENDPGM To enable compatibility with the HTTP server the REXX program can call to ILE RPG programs that use QtmhRdStin QtmhWrStout and QtmhGetEnv APIs for standard input and standard output operations Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 93 3 10 1 Structure of REXX Program Using POST Method HTML Document CL Program Figure 31 CGI Programming with REXX Language using POST Method 1 This point is the same as C and RPG languages The HTML form is sent to the client 2 lt is the same structure as the C and RPG programs The user selects the Submit button e Call the CL program with the name of the REXX program e Call QtmhRdStin through an RPG program The QtmhRdStin API places the entire input string read from stdin into a receiver variable of type pointer to character e Processing anything that you want to do This processing must generate the HTML output e Call QtmhWrStout through an RPG program This API writes the HTML code to standard output 3 When your application ends whatever you wrote to stdout is sent back to the Web client 94 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 3 10 1 1 REXX Program Sample using POST Method The next sample shows piec
202. bles selected by the end user Figure 19 shows an example on how to write an HTML document with the FORM tag lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt 0rdering an AS 400 Method GET lt title gt lt head gt lt body bgcolor F8F8FF gt lt img align middle src as400 gif gt lt b gt Ordering an IBM System AS 400 lt b gt lt p gt lt b gt Please fill in the following lt b gt lt form method GET action BonusCGI ORDAS400G PGM gt lt INPUT type hidden name MBR value ORDAS400E size 10 gt Name lt input type text name NAME size 30 maxlength 40 clear all gt lt p gt Address lt textarea name ADDRESS cols 30 rows 2 VALUE gt lt textarea gt lt p gt lt b gt Which AS 400 would you like to order lt b gt lt br gt lt input name TYPE value P1 type radio checked gt Portable lt input name TYPE value P2 type radio gt Server lt input name TYPE value P3 type radio gt System lt p gt lt b gt Do you want the Support Line Service lt b gt lt br gt lt input name SERV value T type radio checked gt Yes lt input name SERV value F type radio gt No lt p gt Please order lt p gt lt input type submit VALUE Order gt lt input type reset VALUE Clear Form gt lt form gt lt P gt lt A HREF web DEMO2E MBR gt Back lt A gt Demo Menue Figure 19 The HTML Source using the F
203. byte of the output field The HTML appears before the field A 01 FLDIA 20 0 15 6DFTVAL Output Field A 01 15 5HTML lt p gt HTML code and results in HTML code Output Field Example 3 The HTML field has a starting column equal to an output field The HTML appears before the first character of the field A 01 FLDIA 20 0 15 6DFTVAL Output Field A 01 15 6HTML lt p gt HTML code and results in HTML code Output Field Example 4 The HTML field has a starting column 1 past the starting column of an output field The HTML appears after the first character of the output field A 01 FLDIA 20 0 15 6DFTVAL Output Field A 01 15 7HTML lt p gt HTML code and results in OHTML codeutput Field Example 5 Copyright IBM Corp 1997 263 The HTML field has a starting column 1 past the ending column of an output field meaning that it overlaps the ending attribute The HTML appears after the last character of the output field A 01 FLDIA 20 0 15 6DFTVAL Output Field A 01 15 27HTML lt p gt HTML code and results in Output FieldHTML code Example 6 The HTML field has a starting column 2 past the ending column of an output field The HTML appears after the output field A 01 FLDIA 20 0 15 6DFTVAL Output Field A 01 15 28HTML lt p gt HTML code and results in Output Field HTML code Notes 1 Merging HTML and DDS fields does not occur for input fields Mergin
204. c gt 8 Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 107 This CGI program receives the name value pairs from the form as encoded form input from STDIN The environment variable CONTENT_LENGTH determines how much data must be read from STDIN The following example shows the Read from STDIN QtmhRdStin subroutine STDIN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Variables for the CGI interface APIs These are used for APIStdIn DInData S 2048A INZ DInDataLn S 9B 0 INZ 2048 DInActLn S 9B 0 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Get the Input parameters from the POST from STDIN c MOVE BLANKS OutBuff c EXSR STDIN Upon return your POST data is in INData and its length is in INActLn It is in the FLD VAR format at this time Move this data to the DBCvt parms Set up the parameters before CALLB This includes the length of your Ext DS 103 is correct kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c Z ADD 103 DBDSLn kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk C MOVEL INData DBBuf f c Z ADD INActLn DBBuffLn kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Subroutine to read STD IN c STDIN BEGSR c C
205. c eval Handle POST C when Cc CALLB parm C parm C parm c parm c ends Handle escape sequences C callp c return kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk indatatype POST envrqsnm CONTENT_LENGTH envrqsnm envrqs n envrevr getenvf inact n c2n envrevr method POST set indata to blanks indatatype POST and inactIn 0 indata blanks indatatype GET envrqsnm QUERY_STRING envrqsnm envrqs n envrevr getenvf indata 4subst envrevr 1l envrspIn inact n envrspin indatatype POST QtmhRdStin INData INDataLn dummy QUSEC signs etc cgiparse indata inact n kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Figure 30 Getinput Subprocedure Sample CvtDb procedure The CvtDb function moves the values read by getinput function to the DB file fields remember to code the external DS because the QtmhCvtDb API returns Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet the data in this structure In this sample the data structure looks similar to the following display A R SAMPLEREC A This field is the same as a field in the HTML input page A lt INPUT NAME NAME SIZE 40 MAXLENGTH 40 gt A A NAME 15 The program calls the CvtDb procedure Variables for cvtdbf subprocedure DbFileName MUST be UPPERCASE and 20 characters long si 10 characters for the file name hi 10 characters for the library name DDBFileName S 20A INZ DATASTRUCT
206. ce Please notice that you can use any HTML tag except lt HTML gt lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt lt TITLE gt lt BODY gt and lt BODY gt because all of the preceding tags are used by HTML Gateway to build the overall structure Note e It is possible to use the lt PRE gt lt PRE gt tags but these tags are also used by Workstation Gateway to generate the HTML page e It is not possible to add certain HTML tags to the header section of the generated HTML page 5 4 3 2 The HTML Keyword Syntax The new HTML specification can have two formats HTML datastring with a valid HTML tag or HTML amp program to system field A parameter is required after an HTML keyword This parameter can be a valid HTML tag enclosed in single quotes or a program variable The program to system field can be any legal length and has to be alphanumeric A in position 35 Note The syntax of the HTML tag is not syntax checked by the DDS compiler The browser that receives the HTML sequence performs syntax checking It is important therefore that you test the display on the browser to verify the correct HTML and DDS syntax Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 5 4 3 3 Limitations and Restrictions The following keywords are not allowed with the HTML keyword e COLOR DATE e DFT e DSPATR e EDTCDE e EDTWRD e HLPID MSGCON e NOCCSID OVRATR e PUTRETAIN e SYSNAM
207. ce characteristics Note in Figure 99 on page 245 that serving from the ROOT or QOPENSYS directories provide the best system capacity If Web page development is done from another directory consider copying the data to a higher performing file system for production use Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 8 5 6 1 AS 400 HTTP Server Performance Simple Page Serving ROOT QDLS QSYS Others gt _ Q a i 5 O dv 2 Co DC File System Figure 99 AS 400 HTTP Server Performance Simple Page Serving 8 5 7 File Size Considerations Note in Figure 100 on page 246 that serving larger files uses more system resources The connect and disconnect costs are similar regardless of size but cost for the transmission of the data with TCP IP and the IFS access vary with size As file size increases the IOP is more efficient by being able to achieve a higher aggregate data rate However being larger the files require more data frames thus causing the hits sec capacity for the IOP to go down accordingly Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 245 AS 400 HTTP Server Performance amp N oun anh UO amp o a ou oO E D n 1 c o a N Q CC File size variation SEE File size KB Figure 100 AS 400 File Size Variation 8 5 8 Communications LAN IOPs Since there are a dozen or more line flows per transaction the Web serving environment
208. d func2 results in the REXX interpreter interpreting the statement outp1 2 inp1 In both cases the REXX variable pool is set so that the REXX interpreter can access variables a and b This is an example URL that references the macro assuming that e The macro is located in the WWW macro directory e The HTTP server has been configured to call the Net Data CGI BIN program DB2WWW e The user profile that CGI BIN programs run under QTMHHTP1 has been given authority to access the macro file and the file containing the REXX program http hostname cgi bin db2ww WWW macro REXXM report If you run this macro with the contents of the TREXX MBR as shown a as Columns 1 80 SEU gt BMT 8 catino Dati Zabel tonda kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Beginning of data kkkkkkkk 0001 00 outpl 3 inpl kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk End of data kkkkkkkkkkk Figure 57 REXX Source of TREXX MBR The output to the browser is b 9 b 6 If you did not create a Net Data initialization file the REXX language environment is enabled by default If you create an initialization file and you want to use the REXX language environment the following configuration statement must be in the initialization file ENVIRONMENT DTW_REXX QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHREXX SRVPGM 140 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 4 6 2 SQL DTW_SQL or SQL Language Environment The SQL language environment is used to execute SQL statements usi
209. d IBM assumes no responsibility for its accuracy or completeness The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer s operational environment While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will be obtained elsewhere Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk Any performance data contained in this document was determined in a controlled environment and therefore the results that may be obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment The following document contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples contain the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental Reference to PTF numbers that have not been released through the normal distribution process does not imply general availability The purpose of including these reference numbers is to alert IBM customers to specific information relative to the implementation of the PTF
210. d computer resource required for streaming audio or video As a result you should use Web benchmark numbers for relative sizing only Even the popular WebStone benchmarking only covers GET transactions not POST transactions which are used with forms and CGI programs This next graph shows why you need to consider both file size and the peak hit rate when planning your Web site requirements We took the maximum connection rate for a sample network design and created a chart showing the maximum hits per day expected based on file size and the peak hit rate or hit distribution In this example when the average file size is 5KB if the hit distribution means 60 of the hits occur in four hours this configuration will support 2 1 million hits per day However if the connections are evenly distributed over 12 hours the same configuration supports 3 7 million per day Similarly if the file size were 10KB and the hit distribution means 60 of the hits occur in four hours this configuration supports 1 8 million hits per day but if 80 of the connections occur in eight hours 2 7 million hits per day can be supported So which is it 1 8 million 2 1 million 2 7 million or 3 7 million per day If you do not know the average file size or the peak hit rate you cannot understand the maximum capacity of your Web site If you want to see a comparison of how different file sizes affect the response time see Figure 100 on page 246 8 2 Internet Co
211. d finally Java is a good fit for the AS 400 system Its byte code architecture maps well to our MI architecture and the fact that is uses no pointers makes it a natural for our secure AS 400 execution environment 2 7 5 Lotus Domino Domino allows application developers to use the powerful application development facilities of Notes to create Web applications Notes includes its own graphical forms designer directory services replication services messaging services security and workflow Domino allows applications developed with Notes to be accessible through the Web 2 8 Supporting the AS 400 Legacy Programming Models The previous discussion described the new internet programming models available on the AS 400 system It does not describe what we are doing to support the thousands of programs and millions of lines of code implemented with the AS 400 legacy programming models We use the legacy programming model here to describe those applications that were probably written in COBOL or RPG and communicate to a 5250 workstation using DDS There is a well defined set of tools and procedures available to create debug and deploy these applications and our ISVs have invested a great deal of time and money in training their developers to become proficient in this area Eventually we want those developers to become comfortable with the new programming models and begin to re tool their development processes We must realize however
212. d of File EOF on the end of the data Instead you must use the environment variable CONTENT LENGTH to determine how much data you should read from stdin m Note This POST is often the preferred method of operating with CGI BIN programming The reason why POST is preferred is that GET uses the environment variable QUERY_STRING Some server platforms are limited in the length of environment variables A form with a lot of data can cause a loss of data In the POST method there are no limits all date is passed through STANDARD INPUT a way of transferring information in a stream without limits As you can see the form method determines the way of passing the encoded input data from the browser to the CGI program through the server The server and the CGI program communicates in four major ways all supported by the AS 400 system Environment variables Used for the GET method The command line Used in the case of an ISINDEX query Standard input Used for the POST method Standard output Used to produce output data The AS 400 HTTP server provides the means whereby called CGI programs can access environment variables and standard input stream stdin The server also provides the means for a CGI program to return data in the standard output stream Request for programs in an HTML document can be made using either the GET or the POST method See Figure 23 on page 69 and Figure 24 on page 71 m Note This
213. dd or option 13 Insert of the Work with HTTP Configuration WRKHTTPCFG command to do the following steps a Ensure that the Enable GET and Enable POST directives are in the configuration file b Add Map and Exec directives for Net Data Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Alternative Setup to Leave DB2WWW in QTCP One solution is to temporarily remap the incoming URL to a bogus one Fail QSYS LIB QTCP LIB and remap the temporary bogus URL back to QSYS LIB QTCP LIB This looks similar to the following Map QSYS LIB QTCP LIB DB2WWW PGM DB2WWWBOGUS Fail QSYS LIB QTCP LIB Map DB2WWWBOGUS QSYS LIB QTCP LIB DB2WWW PGM Exec QSYS LIB QTCP LIB Examples For http QSYS LIB QTCP LIB DB2WWW PGM this is mapped to DB2WWWBOGUS The Fail does not happen The next Map fixes the bogus URL And the final Exec allows the DB2WWW PGM to execute e For http QSYS LIB QTCP LIB FTP PGM this does not do the first Map and subsequently fails with the next directive For http qsys lib qtcp lib ftp pgm this does not Map Fail or Exec due to any of the preceding directives because they are case sensitive So it falls through all of the preceding directives and eventually fails after all of the directives had been exhausted Carefully planning the HTTP server configuration file is important to maintain the integrity of the servers files and programs from harm If they are not
214. documents The 5250 workstation gateway is a novel approach to providing legacy application access from the Web It provides the AS 400 system with a differentiator that most systems today cannot offer 2 8 2 On the Fly Translation versus the Toolkit Approach The on the fly approach is what WSG currently uses It involves intercepting the 5250 data stream and trying to figure out dynamically 1 What the green screen layout was intended to be 2 How to best represent that with HTML controls or in the future Java controls This is a compute intensive process and leads to a lowest common denominator approach whereby the resulting HTML window does not look too much different from the intended green screen An alternative approach to this problem is being done by at least two of our business partners Seagull and CST They use a toolkit approach that translates all the windows for a particular application ahead of time rather than on the fly The toolkit allows a customer or application developer to run through all of the windows of an application one by one The toolkit does its best to translate the 5250 screen into an HTML or Java equivalent and shows the user the result At that time the user can change the translated look of that window by moving modifying or adding controls The changes are recorded and the GUI representation of that 5250 screen is stored in a separate data store and indexed through a hash of the 5250 sc
215. ds or submit buttons do not properly line up with columns on a line that have only output fields The effects of this vary depending on the composition of the display lt may range anywhere from a small nuisance to having columns lining up with the wrong headings 5 7 2 2 HTML Tables Webulator 400 allows you to specify that all 5250 screen data should be included inside of an HTML table Webulator 400 sends HTML tables when the Tables Enabled configuration value is set to YES HTML Tables have the following characteristics Tables are able to keep track on the largest number of pixels that is needed by any column This means that columns that have either input fields or submit buttons have more pixels allocated to them than columns that only have output fields The result is that tables guarantees that all fields that start in the same column are properly aligned but there may be extra space between fields to compensate for the different widths of the various HTML elements used Tables allow for the specification of a background color different from the body of the form This allows for reverse image attributes to be honored Tables by default use non fixed width fonts This makes the 5250 screen look quite a bit different than when viewed using a traditional emulation program You can change the font that tables use by setting the Table Font Name configuration entry You may need to experiment with the font name to ensure that all of your tar
216. e Receiver variable Output name fred amp address Center street Length of receiver variable i 1024 max Length of response Output i 31 Error code 1 0 QUSEC data structure see Figure 28 on page 83 The following display shows a piece of RPG code using the QtmhRdStin API f Copy QUSEC structure copy qsysinc qrpglesrc qusec D QUSEDO1 17 116 Variables for QtmhRdStin DInDataLn S 101I 0 DInActLn S 101 0 Dbuffer S 9999 Cc eval qusbprv 16 Standard input subroutine G CALLB QtmhRdStin C parm buffer C parm INDataLn Cc parm INActLn Cc parm QUSEC The QtmhWrStout API provides the ability for CGI programs to write to standard out stdout Table 7 Write from Stdout QtmhWrStout API Description Type Example Data variable Char Content type text html Length of data variable Binary 4 25 Error code I O Char QUSEC data structure see Figure 28 on page 83 84 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet The following display shows a piece of RPG code using the QtmhWrStout API fi gt Copy QUSEC structure error copy qsysinc qrpglesrc qusec D QUSEDO1 17 116 Variables for QtmhWrStout DOUTBuffLn S 10i 0 DOUTbuff S 9999 Cc eval qusbprv 16 Standard output subroutine Cc callb QtmhWrStout C parm OUTBuff G parm OUTBuffLn Cc parm QUSEC The QtmhCvtDb API provides an interface for CGI programs to parse CGI
217. e WRKJOB command to allow the user to view and affect aspects of their individual job while automated as part of a menu still has a command line associated with it Inquiries and simple data entry that is run through a verification and authentication process are probably the best applications for Internet access These applications allow users the ability to view information about your company and its products as well as enter limited information to order products or request more detailed inquiries They also allow for the entry of order requests that can easily be followed up or verified after the fact If you have chosen to perform automatic sign on or user authentication sign on for the user you probably do not want them to get back to a real AS 400 Sign On display Access to the Sign On display defeats the work you have done in restricting access to the USERID that you have defined for Web access It also gives the user the opportunity to begin guessing the USERIDs and passwords on your system As a result it is best not to include an option to sign off from your menus usually option 90 and application displays available to the public Keep in mind that this also includes the ability to sign off through help panels whether they were written for your application or are supplied by IBM as generic help for the AS 400 system 5 7 1 Signing Off This section describes how to close a session when using Webulator 400 204 Unleashing AS
218. e connection is broken there is no way that a rollback can be accomplished in case of an error later in the macro This example shows the parameters that need to be defined in the macro to connect to a remote database The database that you are connecting to must be defined in the Relational Database Directory using the WRKRDBDIRE Work with Relational Database Directory Entries command to add change or remove entries in the directory amp 4define DATABASE SYSTEM05 LOGIN USERIDZA PASSWORD HX1 IMU TABLE AS0219R BRANDS Mytable TABLE ALL The database SYSTEM05 has been added to the Relational Database directory on the local AS 400 system We can connect with the remote database SYSTEMO5 in this case it is another AS 400 system We pass the USERID of USERID2A and the PASSWORD HX1IMU We return all rows of the query from the file BRANDS in library AS0219R to the Net Data table Mytable More explanations of all the possible defines are explained later in this chapter This does not pose a problem if you are using TRANSACTION SCOPE SINGLE If you use TRANSACTION SCOPE MULTIPLE the default and the new user ID differs from the one used to establish the database connection to the remote system the SQL language environment automatically rolls back and an SQL_CODE of 752 is returned which indicates that the connection cannot be changed
219. e e e ke Fe RITA IRA e REE e Redek k ke kekk kkk sprintf loc_buff IP s CCSID d Allow c Profile s Password s Library s Program s Menu s OperLen d Oper gt s lt ClientIPaddr CCSID AllowOper UserProfile Password ProgramLib ProgramName InitialMenu Lgth_OperSpecInfo OperSpecInfo_p TRACE loc_buff test_file fclose test_file return undef _EXITPGM C Figure 102 Part 7 of 7 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples 271 A live version of the following code can be seen in action on the AS 400 Web Technology page by going to http ww as400 ibm com internetdemo Then go to the 5250 section Ship Status the third icon down in the lefthand frame kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PROGRAM NAME ORDSTAT PROGRAM DESCRIPTION This program will request an order number K and if it is in file will then display order status If it is not will display an error message COMPILATION To compile this program use the standard CRTRPGPGM command PROGRAMMER DATE 07 15 96 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk FCUSMSTP IF E K DISK FCUSFMT CF E WORKSTN C IN15 DOWEQ 0 Overlay order not found CUSPMT if error IN99 c IN99 CASEQ 0 HEADNG C END C EXFMTCUSPMT If not end and valid order number 444 display status IN
220. e initialization file are not correct Net Data indicates that the object being referenced is not found Therefore you must make sure that either the object references are fully qualified or the Net Data initialization file has the proper path statements Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 167 4 12 Service and Support 168 Net Data is not a separate product in OS 400 The Net Data function has been integrated directly into OS 400 s TCP IP software see BM TCP IP Connectivity Utilities 400 Version 3 Release 7 Program 5716 TC1 V3R2 users can obtain the Net Data function by requesting the correct PTFs as shown in the following list To receive IBM AS 400 service and support for a Net Data issue you should treat it the same as you do any other BM OS 400 software issue and report it to IBM through your normal procedures PTFs and known problems can be found at the Net Data page http www as400 ibm com netdata For the examples in this chapter to work you need to have the following PTFs applied to your system V3R7M0 V3R2M0 Net Data SF38425 SF38428 H A Net Data Include File SF34468 SF36743 Note 1 You should always load the latest PTFs 2 It overlays DB2 WWW Connection if you have not already applied PTF SF36975 Note that even if you do not load this PTF any HTTP server PTF you load after the release date of PTF SF36975 results in Net Data being enabled on your system The following table lis
221. e routine once we understood the problem This as we see in Section 3 9 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE COBOL 400 or RPG 400 on page 86 is a problem in more than just this one place 3 8 3 ILE C Sample Programs using POST and GET Methods 78 The following ILE C programs are examples of CGI programming using the POST method and the GET method 3 8 3 1 ILE C Program that Reads from Stdin POST Method In this example we use a function to read from the standard input stream stdin and put the var value pairs into the entries structure ram gt RRRRRRRRER RRR RRERERER ERE RRR ER ER ER ERE RRR ERE RERER ERE SAMPLE USING POST METHOD Define struct for name value pairs 22 F F ke e ke Re e ke ke e he e e e ke he e ke Re e ke e e ke He e e ke e e ke ke e e Ke e He Ke e k Ke ke eke ekek Ke typedef struct char name char val entry entry entries 10000 ERRRRRRRERERRER EERE RER ERE RR ER ER ER ER ER ERK ER ERE RERERERE Read CONTENT LENGTH environment variable so know the length of data from the client RRRRRRRRERRRER RRR ER ER ERE RRR ER ER ER ERE RE RE ERE RERERER cl atoi getenv CONTENT LENGTH for x 03cl amp amp feof stdin x m X RRRRRRRRERRERER ERE RR ERERER ERE ERE EERE RERERERERER Keep in entries struct name and value pairs RRRRRRRRERRERERERER EERE RER ERE RRR RERERERERERERE entries x val fmakeword stdin amp amp cl plustospace entries
222. e the qualified include file name You can specify IFS and QSYS LIB directories The ENVIRONMENT statement is used to configure a language environment Net Data s language environment allows you to directly run REXX programs query the database and access high level programs on the AS 400 system Further setup considerations for the language environments are explained in Section 4 6 Language Environments on page 139 The syntax of the language environment configuration statement is ENVIRONMENT type srvpgm name usage argument A language environment configuration statement consists of the following data A type name for associating it with the type field of a FUNCTION block e A service program name A list of optional arguments that are passed to the service program s entry points 4 Grant QTMHHTP1 user profile authority to objects The user profile that CGI programs run under QTMHHTP1 must have the proper access to any objects that are referenced in a Web macro and to the macro that a URL references One way to grant authority to the QTMHHTP1 user profile is to use the Change Authority CHGAUT command which allows you to grant authority to objects that reside in the QSYS LIB file system in addition to objects residing in the integrated file system that are not in the QSYS LIB file system For example if Web macro files reside in the WWW macro directory and in the QSYS LIB WWW LIB MACRO FILE directory the
223. eb HTML editors and database query tools Net Data has the following features Net Data applications can use native HTML SQL and REXX thus exploiting the expressive power of these languages without artificial limitations Net Data is small and efficient and has been ported to multiple platforms Visual tools may be used to partially generate Net Data macro files Third party vendors visual HTML editors can be used to generate the HTML sections while various visual query tools such as BM s Visualizer Query may be used to generate the SQL sections 4 1 3 Generalized Data Sources Net Data with its enhanced functionality can use a variety of data sources to build dynamic Web pages DB2 through SQL REXX programs C programs COBOL RPG programs Built in functions 4 1 4 Advanced Macro Language Net Data Web macros combine things you already know such as HTML SQL and REXX with a simple macro language Capabilities of the macro language include Multiple named HTML sections in one macro Ability to include files If Then Else Function definitions Large library of predefined functions Access to environment variables Ability to disable the default report Table variables Ability to specify multiple paths for macros executable and includes Persistent database connections An external interface for user supplied language environments that can provide new sources to data Examples of the previous functions can be fo
224. eb browser returns control to the AS 400 system when any submit button is pressed including the Attention submit button it must wait for a new display to arrive from the AS 400 system before allowing the user to interact with the display If there is no attention program to generate a new display the browser times out waiting for the new display and does not allow the user to continue with the display where the Attention button was pressed 5 9 Other Implementation Tips 1 If you are going to make use of the HTML DDS keyword most AS 400 programmers have never seen or used HTML Rather than spend the hours working out the correct syntax it is faster to use a graphical HTML editor Such editors generate all of the HTML code which you can simply cut and paste into your AS 400 application DDS file When debugging set the number of clients sessions such that you only have a parent and child job This makes finding the child job you want to debug easier Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 215 5 10 HTML Gateway Comparison The following brief list details some of the features limitations you might want to consider when deciding whether to use Workstation Gateway or Webulator 400 e The Webulator 400 has many more configuration items than Workstation Gateway making it easier to use for the client A quick look at the online documentation is available at the following URL http ww inetmi com pubs webulate usrgdtoc htm Thi
225. ec rule for the DB2WWW program in both upper and lower case For example Map cgi bin db2www QSYS LIB WWWCGI LIB DB2WWW PGM Map CGI BIN DB2WWW QSYS LIB WWWCGI LIB DB2WWW PGM Exec QSYS LIB WWWCGI LIB m SYMPTOM Configuration Statements Correct but Net Data Not Working This problem occurs when all configurations are present and correct but Net Data is still not serving data or documents correctly or at all There are several possible causes and solutions CAUSE SOLUTION Map Exec or Pass rules are not in the correct order When a URL is evaluated against a Map Exec or Pass rule it is acted on based on the first matching rule Therefore you must be careful to ensure that the statement to be evaluated is not remapped or altered prior to reaching the desired rule Also make sure that you do not have a Pass in the configuration file User profile QTMHHTP1 does not have proper authority to access Web macros All CGI BIN programs run under the user profile QTMHHTP1 The QTMHHTP1 user profile must be granted authority to all objects that Net Data accesses while processing a Web macro Path statements in the Net Data initialization file are not correct Net Data uses the path statements in the initialization file if there is one to resolve to any Web macro or executable references in the Web macro that is being processed If the object references are not fully qualified and the path statements in th
226. ect Opt Subaystem Job User Type CPU Function Status QBATCH OS 7S SBS DEOWN Oc MN OST SPS i DEQu P23CNL69 POLT EVE PASSTHRO EVTU P23 LEDAF POLT EVE lt PASSTHRU EVTW Q25CSRVE QUEER FJ i ICFW ACSERVER USER TIMU CTL OS YS DEOU QITISCD QPGHE PGM GEZICNEP EVTU QINTER Oa YS DET Figure 83 The Work with Active Jobs Display Seen by the Workstation Gateway 5 4 Application Development with Workstation Gateway There are various ways of enabling or developing applications for use with Workstation Gateway e Simply use an existing application as is This means using all of the existing DDS displays logic and security e Enhance existing applications using the new DDS HTML keyword by adding some HTML to existing displays e Create new displays using primarily the new DDS HTML keyword Perhaps if you only want four or five displays being used over the Internet you can code just these displays e Create new applications designed specifically for use through Workstation Gateway Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 181 e Create Logon Exit programs that bypass the AS 400 sign on display When designing or using your application with Workstation Gateway try and ensure that you keep inside of Workstation Gateway control That is do not go off into the HTML world by providing links to other pages This may lead to page synchronization problems or the application being stopped by the Wo
227. ed TYPE text SIZE 30 gt variable that can be referenced elsewhere in this macro It is initialized to whatever the user types into the input field We will use it in the output section lt p gt lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE Enter gt lt FORM gt lt hr gt lt p gt lt a href gt Home page lt body gt lt html gt 4 lt Closes the HTML section Figure 46 HTML Section Input This section contains the HTML for a simple form with one input field The entire HTML section is surrounded by the HTML section identifier HTML INPUT INPUT identifies the name of this section You can give it any name an enhancement from DB2WWW Connection which only allowed INPUT and REPORT The HTML lt title gt statement contains an example of macro variable substitution The contents of the variable page_ title are substituted into the title of the form This section also has an example of a function call The expression today is a call to function today This function is defined in the FUNCTION definition section that is described in Section 4 2 2 Function Definition Section on page 118 The result of the today function today s date is inserted into the HTML text in the same location that the today expression is located The ACTION parameter of the FORM statement is an example of navigation between HTML sections or between macros Referencing the name of anot
228. ed by the application start up program or programs that explicitly specify your application s activation group name You can also specify that an ILE service program be run in the same activation group as the ILE program to which it is bound by using the default of ACTGRP CALLER on the CRTSRVPGM command 2 12 4 4 System Named Activation Group NEW This is the default on the CRTPGM command and is deliberately not available on the CRTSRVPGM command Whenever a program created with ACTGRP NEW is called dynamically a new activation group is created the program is activated and run and when the program returns control to its caller through RETURN LR or a hard leave the activation group is deleted m IMPORTANT Avoid using ACTGRP NEW even though it is the default on CRTPGM Using this activation group option is the worst choice for performance We recommend that this option is not used within an ILE application It is expensive in terms of system resource to keep creating and deleting NEW activation groups We recommend that you run ILE programs in a named activation group rather than allowing them to run in the default activation group 40 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 12 5 Activation Group Recommendations Application start up program or programs should be created to run in NAMED activation group or groups such that programs subsequently called can safely specify ACTGRP CALLER Since activ
229. ed with the following example that calls the count RPG program from the code snippets page To download the count program follow the link from the AS 400 Web Builders pages http 205 217 130 15 workshop snippets snippets htm or http www as400 ibm com workshop webbuild htm The count program allows you to use one program to add counters to multiple pages within a Net Data macro by passing a unique countname for each page you want the counter on Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet kkkkkkkkkkkkkk Define Section PEERERER AREER ERER ES DEFINE countvalue 0 DEFINE countname PGCNTR1 F o 4 o 4 X de kkkkkkkkkkkkkk Function Definition Section FRREATERA ATER RERE KEA FUNCTION DTW_REXX CNTR2 IN countname INOUT countvalue CALL PGM CGIDEV COUNT PARM amp countname amp countvalue kkkkkkkkkk HTML Section Input FRKKAKAE RARA REA KEK KKK KES SHTML INPUT lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt Counter lt title gt lt head gt lt BODY gt CNTR2 countname countvalue This page has been viewed lt b gt countvalue lt b gt times lt p gt DTW_ASSIGN countname PGCNTR2 CNTR2 countname countvalue This page2 has been viewed lt b gt countvalue lt b gt times lt HTML gt 0 This macro puts two counters on one page This may not be what you want However it illustrates using the built in function DTW_ASSIGN to give the
230. een bound to the PGM Identify which activation group the SRVPGM should run in Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 37 If the activation group is NAMED and does not exist create it If the SRVPGM has not been called in this activation group before initialize all static storage for all modules in the service program 3 Pass control to the Procedure Entry Point PEP in the first procedure specified in the MODULE list at PGM creation time 4 If the entry procedure is RPG IV without using the logic cycle control passes to the first executable statement in the calculation specifications after full opens of required files and resolution of passed parameters exactly as in OPM When the program is deactivated and it runs in a NEW activation group the activation group is deleted and all associated resources are returned to the system Binding Directory A list of modules or service programs The contents of a binding directory are only used by the binder if unresolved imports exist during either the bind of modules specified on the MODULE list or modules exported from service programs specified on the BNDSRVPGM list Program Entry Procedure PEP A PEP is system generated and the first procedure placed on the call stack following a dynamic call This procedure is always given control first following a dynamic call The PEP ensures that the procedure you specified as the Entry module on the CRTPGM is given control f
231. elopment environment can be used to develop the code and create the Java bytecodes The application can be deployed on any platform that includes a JVM that conforms to the Sun specifications For large IT departments this means that a one size fits all approach can be used for application deployment Only one version of a Java program is needed regardless of how many different computer platforms are supported within the organization Java is an open cross platform de facto industry standard language It solves Web programming problems that are difficult to solve with more traditional languages It is the ideal language for network computing thin clients and the World Wide Web The AS 400 system is on its way to becoming the premiere server for network computing Java is an important piece of the overall AS 400 Internet intranet strategy 7 5 3 Java on the AS 400 System Today 234 A technology preview of Java on the AS 400 system is available today This preview is a port of Sun s JDK 1 0 2 to the AS 400 system The java awt windowing classes are not currently included in this preview The JDK 1 0 2 currently runs on top of OS 400 and is not integrated into the operating system Because it is not optimized for the AS 400 system and does not include any JIT or other compiler technology the performance characteristics are similar to the initial Java offering from Sun when they first released the technology For many applications the
232. ength of the statement field has been increased to include the new size of the entries in the specifications layouts If you leave the default size you lose the commenting text entries If you are using variant characters in your program make sure that the CCSID of the source file is specified correctly The CCSID of a new source file created on V3R1 is taken from the default CCDID job attribute unless a CCSID is specified on the CRTSRCPF command There is also a new source type RPGLE The SEU and PDM recognize the new type as an RPG IV source If the source type is RPGLE SEU performs the appropriate syntax check for RPG IV statements In the Work with Members Using PDM display there is a new option 15 Create module Using this option if the source type is RPGLE PDM submits to job queue to run the CRTRPGMOD command to create an ILE RPG module Using option 14 if the source type is RPGLE PDM submits to job queue the Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet CRTBNDRPG command to create a bind RPG program with only one module More about these commands appears later in this chapter RPGLE is also the attribute type for an ILE RPG program and for module objects m Note The conversion command from RPG 400 to RPG IV source members automatically renames the source type to RPGLE 2 13 IFS Integrated File System Considerations This section discusses the IFS Integrated File System support available on the AS 4
233. ent 0015 00 A Inquiry System 0016 00 A 0017 00 A 6 24 Name 0018 00 A FNAME_X 25 0 6 32 0019 00 A N02 7 22 E mail 0020 00 A N02 EMAIL_X 30 0 7 32 0021 00 A N02 8 20 Addressl 0022 00 A N02 ADDRESS1_X 25 0 8 32 0023 00 A N02 9 20 Address2 0024 00 A N02 ADDRESS2_X 25 0 9 32 0025 00 A N02 10 24 City 0026 00 A N02 CITY_X 25 0 10 32 0027 00 A N02 11 23 State 0028 00 A N02 STATE_X 3 0 11 32 F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F10 Cursor F11 Toggle F16 Repeat find F17 Repeat change F24 More keys Figure 84 DDS Source for Customer Comment Inquiry Display Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Note If you are not familiar with DDS programming we recommended that you consult the following publications e DDS Reference SC41 3712 01 Application Display Programming SC41 3715 01 The preceding DDS looks the same as this on a 5250 display station a gt ITSO Company Customer Comment Inquiry System Name Vera Smal E mail vsmall www net com Address1 123 South Center Street Address2 City Rochester State MN Zipcode 12345 Country USA Phone 507 2895300 Comment This is only a simple test We can use this sampl e to show you how easily you can use Workstation Gateway in the Internet world It is great for all of the AS 400 customers Press ENTER to inquiry again Figure 85 Customer Comment Inquiry DDS on the Traditi
234. ent and server e Connections sessions are maintained between transactions e Networks are tuned to use large frames For Internet transactions there are a dozen or more line transmissions including acknowledgements per transaction e A connection is established between client and server e Requests and responses between client and server The connection is closed e Networks typically have small frame MTU sizes HTML displays to browser contain more bytes than traditional e One user transaction may contain several separate Internet transactions The information that follows is based on performance measurements and analysis done in the AS 400 division laboratory The highlights general conclusions and recommendations are included Results listed here do not represent any particular customer environment Actual performance may vary significantly from what is provided here 8 3 AS 400 Commercial Processing Workload CPW The Commercial Processing Workload is a modified version of the TPC C Transaction Processing Performance Council workload which is an industry standard for measuring performance CPW results represent the performance of many sophisticated commercial environments By using CPW IBM can more accurately represent our customers more robust commercial workloads Note CPW results do not only represent the performance of IBM or another vendor s models they represent the performance of many soph
235. ent ts tA Open Connection Request Page w parameters I NZ EO fxz re register for the gt beta version today Send Page w parameters Close Connection Tell us about yuursell Figure 3 The Interactive Web Model 2 3 3 Distributed Web Model 8 The distributed Web also known as Internet PC introduces Java With Java a small application called an applet can be transmitted to the browser along with the Web page The Java applet runs within the browser as users view the page lt can provide lively animation or sound as well as rich graphical user interface components such as the ones usually found on windowed PC applications The applet can display a window or be displayed in a Web browser it can also process user input If server interaction is needed the applet can open a connection to the Web server to access a server or script through the Web server s CGI The distributed Web model enriches the user interface and off loads tasks from the Web server such as parameter checking in the browser but it is still tied to HTTP for communications The next section describes another model that supports additional communication protocols Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Open Connection Request Page Send Page w Java Code sf _ _ _ _ _ _ JAVA Virtual Machine VM Send Request w parameters NN Figure 4 The Distributed Web Model 2 3 4 Enterprise Distribu
236. ent variable Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 89 90 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk THIS SAMPLE CODE IS PROVID IT HAS NOT BEEN FULLY TEST kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk ED BY IBM FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY ED IT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Hnomain copy prototypes ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c export 32767 options varsize 10i 0 10I 0 5 like InActLn rocedure 32767 10i 0 inz amp size envrevr 10i 0 30 10i 0 qusbprv 16 into indatatype envrgsnm REQUEST_METHOD envrqsnm envrqs n envrevr getenvf indatatype subst envrcvr 1 envrsp1n If requst method is post Get content length convert to numeric copy qsysinc qrpglesrc quse Pgetinput b Dgetinput pi DInData DInDataln DInActLn DInDataType Work variables DDummy s Variables for getenvf subp Denvrevr s Denvrevrin s Denvrspln s Denvrqsnm s DenvrqsIn s C eva Get request_method and put eva c ae checkr Cc clear c exec c eva and put into inactIn c if c eva c 7 checkr C clear c exsr c eval e endif If CONTENT_LENGTH is 0 and and return if C eval c return c endif Handle GET c select c when c eval Cc ans checkr c clear C exsr eval
237. ent variables using the putenv function and can be retrieved by the executing program in a language specific manner e Output parameters are passed back to the SYSTEM language environment by using the language specific equivalent of the putenv function The SYSTEM language environment expects the executable to be a command or a program The QTMHHTPI1 user profile must have the proper authority to run the executable in addition to any resources that the executable uses The following simple example shows a macro named SYSM that specifies a program as the executable passing it one Net Data parameter ae vo define varl OriginalValue SFUNCTION DTW SYSTEM test INOUT parml EXEC QSYS LIB PGM LIB TSYS0001 PGM HTML REPORT lt PRE gt Value of varl before function call var1 test varl Value of varl after function call varl lt PRE gt o Figure 60 System Function Macro This is an example URL that references the macro assuming that e The macro is located in the WWW macro directory e The HTTP server has been configured to call the Net Data CGI BIN program DB2www e The user profile that CGI BIN programs run under QTMHHTP1 has been given authority to access the macro file and the file containing the REXX program http hostname cgi bin db2ww WWW macro SYSM report If you chose not to create a Net Data initialization file the SYSTEM language environment is enabled by de
238. er performance Also if CGI or Net Data is used which are more disk I O intensive configuring more servers may provide better performance Try not to have more than what is needed as this may cause unnecessary system activity Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 243 2 The maximum frame size parameter MAXFRAME on LIND can be increased from 1994 bytes for TRLAN or other values for other protocols to its maximum of 16393 to allow for larger transmissions Typically documents are larger than 1994 bytes 3 The maximum transmission unit MTU size parameter CFGTCP command for both the route and interface affect the actual size of the line flows Increasing these values from 576 bytes to a larger size up to 16 388 probably reduces the overall number of transmissions and therefore increases the potential capacity of the CPU and the IOP Similar parameters also exist on the Web browser The negotiated value is the minimum of the server and browser and perhaps any bridges routers so increase them all 4 Increasing the TCP IP buffer size TCPRCVBUF and TCPSNDBUF on the CHGTCPA command from 8K bytes to 64K bytes may increase the performance when sending larger amounts of data 5 Error and Access Logging Having logging turned on causes a small amount of system overhead CPU time extra I O Turn logging off for best capacity Use the WRKHTTPCFG command to make these changes 6 Name Server Accesses For each Internet tra
239. er job goes below threshold limits The threshold limit is determined based upon the value selected for the configured number of clients Number of Workstation Gateway Server Clients Per Server Example Assume that you configured five client sessions per server job The workstation gateway server ensures that four jobs are available for work The four jobs allow 20 clients to use the workstation gateway server concurrently with this configuration five client sessions times four server jobs totals 20 client sessions The server always ensures enough jobs are running to provide at least 20 client sessions There are two types of timeouts for the Workstation Gateway Server 1 Inactivity timeout INACTTIMO default 10 minutes Specifies the number of minutes the system allows a Workstation Gateway session to remain inactive before it is ended When a Workstation Gateway session is inactive longer than the specified length of time it is ended 176 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet W Note Note It may take the system an additional 1 to 120 seconds to end the inactive session If a Workstation Gateway session is ended by the system you see a message on the Web Browser display Session in use perhaps your session expired when you try to continue the operation Data request timeout DTARQSTIMO default 10 seconds Specifies the number of seconds from the time a browser connects
240. er list Return var Specify this parameter after the RETURNS keyword It identifies a special OUT parameter The value of the return variable is assigned to the function call and replaces the function call in the Web macro processing If you do not specify the RETURNS clause the value of the function call is the null string if the return code from the call to the language environment is 0 or the value of the return code otherwise 124 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Table 10 Page 2 of 2 Net Data Function Definitions Implicit Function Definitions Executable After the variables are substituted and the function calls are statements processed these statements are passed to the specified language environment for execution Each language environment processes the statements differently Message block Report_block See Section 4 5 Report Blocks on page 134 See Section 4 5 1 Message Blocks on page 136 You need to define functions at the outermost Web macro layer before they are called in the Web macro Besides letting you define your own FUNCTION blocks Net Data also has a library of built in functions You do not need to define these functions before you reference them Just call them from a Web macro anywhere a function call can be made See Section 4 4 3 Net Data Built In Functions on page 129 for a list of these functions 4 4 2 Calling Functions You invoke a funct
241. erce Store Manager tools make managing your store easy You can quickly update such information about your online store as prices or product attributes using simple fill in the blank on screen forms The information is stored in the database and the pages your shoppers see are immediately updated 7 4 6 Protect Your Information and Your Shoppers You can lock your database from unauthorized tampering and provide a password to managers who you choose to have access Shoppers protect their information by providing and using a logon ID and password when they register User data such as credit card information is protected through Secure Sockets Layer SSL encryption IBM Net Commerce payment for merchants provides consumers merchants and financial institutions access to comprehensive secure credit card usage over the Internet through the Secure Electronic Transaction SET protocol 7 4 7 The IBM Net Commerce Administrator To build and manage an electronic store or mall merchants use the IBM Net Commerce Administrator the merchant interface component of Net Commerce Merchants can easily enter store and product information and tailor product displays to suit their merchandising requirements Changes they make automatically appear in the Web site of their store And the multiple pricing capability sophisticated shipping features and market identification and targeting tools offer power and flexibility to profit from the changing marketplace
242. ernet facts U S A corporations establish a new site on the Internet every 12 minutes Internet Society e By early 1996 there were 170000 commercial sites on the Internet worldwide InterNIC U S A shoppers purchased 436 million U S dollars worth of goods and services over the World Wide Web in 1995 ActivMedia e In 1996 81 of the top 200 U K companies viewed the Internet as a business opportunity with more than one third already having an Internet site Barclays Bank e In Asia Europe and the U S about 17 6 million people are expected to be connected to the Internet by the end of 1996 up from 10 6 million in 1995 Forrester Research e Fifty years after the invention of the telephone world residents had made a total of 38 million phone calls Today on the Internet around 38 million page visits occur every 24 hours SRI International 1 3 Network Computing The latest stage in the computing industry s evolution is the client server model in which end users clients are able to use the services of multiple host systems servers These customers require highly effective products services and solutions to help integrate all of the legacy data from distributed systems This takes us to the Network Computing NC model An example of the Network Computing model can be A single AS 400 system accessing vast amounts of data stored on many different systems across a large network as if it were stored on a
243. es of REXX code The complete sample is in the Internet address http www as400 ibm com workshop webbuild htm In this REXX program we read from stdin by the getparse procedure and write to the stdout by the sayh procedure EFEK H k ekekeke k e ke ke ke ERR ER ERR EERE EER ERR EKER ER He e e Re e He e ke He ke e ke A Initialization of variables Feke ke e ke ke he ARERR ER ER RER ERR ER ER RARA KER ER EER RARA KER ER EERERERE call initialize EFFE kk He H eke ke e k e AREER ER ERE EKER AREER ERR ER ER ERE EREREERERERE Read and parse data from stdin Feke e e ke e he AREER ER ER KARA KART AIAR KERI RARA EER ERR KER EREERERERE call getparse if alldataln gt 0 then do EFE R H k e ke keke k ke ke e he e e e e he ERE KERR EER e He He ke ke e e e ke EERE Load translate table for use by handleescape HRe e H e e He e e e Ae he e e e e e e e Re e e e e e e e de ke Ae e e e ke Te He de keke A k kekeke keke call gettable EFEK R R k kkk kke IAA IATA RITA Handle escaped characters KER A k e ke He e He e Ae e ke e e e Te d e ke e ke k ekee e call handleescape BRBRRRRRREREREERERREREREREER Creates stem variables KR A k e ke Ae ke ke e Re ke ke e e e ke ER EER ERE call donames end EFFE kk T H ekeke ke k e ke ke de e ke ke ke e e REREREREER He He e ke e e e e He He He e ke ke He e ke ke ke e ke Ke HTML output Feke e e ke e he ARERR ERR RER ERR ER ER ERE KERR ARIA ARI RARA RAI RARA
244. es or naming semantics portability is reduced Since they run as a child process of the HTTP server they can benefit from the services provided by the server Communication over the HTTP protocol Security Firewall transparency HTTP is usually allowed to pass through firewalls through socks or application gateways Resource mapping and name indirection provided by HTTP server directives program can be moved without affecting client URLs Error logging and audit logging provided by HTTP server Course grained navigation provided by HTML documents They provide process isolation Since each CGI program runs in its own child process it has the security and integrity advantages that separate processes offer They run in a connectionless environment The HTTP server starts the CGI program it does its thing and terminates The output is sent to the browser and the connection is broken Subsequent requests for that same program result in a new connection and a new instance No state information is maintained unless the CGI program had stored previous state information in fields in the requesting HTML form or parameters in the requesting URL This characteristic comes about as a consequence of the Web s hypertext model that allows users to hop around from machine to machine across the world at will Forcing the browser to maintain persistent connections to all of these machines is ridiculous Process start time
245. f creating a program by packaging ILE modules and resolving symbols passed between those modules When a dynamic call is made to an ILE PGM object the program is activated This activation involves the initialization of all static storage required by variables used by the modules within the object In the case of RPG IV all variables are stored in static storage There are two types of static bind available within ILE Once a program and any related service programs have been activated there is no difference in the system code that is run to perform a bound call by reference or a bound call by copy 1 Bind by copy This is the process of copying modules directly into a program object during the binding phase Thus the modules specified to be bound by copy are contained directly within the program object 2 Bind by reference This is the process of making procedures indirectly available to a program PGM through a service program SRVPGM Modules bound in a PGM by reference to a SRVPGM are not copied into the PGM object Optional service programs SRVPGMs is associated with the PGM at bind time The activation of these associated service programs involves the initialization of all static storage in all modules within the service programs Service Programs Service programs cannot be run through a dynamic call They act as a container for related procedures that are used in many different PGMSs Thus in order to easi
246. fault However if you create an initialization file and you want to use the SYSTEM language environment the following configuration statement must be in the initialization file ENVIRONMENT DTW_SYSTEM QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHSYS SRVPGM 4 7 Net Data Advanced Macro Language Examples This section explains a few of the many functions that Net Data has to offer For the complete documentation about Net Data please refer to the online documentation available in several languages from the AS 400 Net Data home page http ww as400 ibm com netdata Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 145 4 7 1 Multiple HTML Sections Net Data allows you to have multiple named HTML sections in one macro This lets you call new HTML pages to be displayed at the browser Using conditional logic your macro can branch to different pages in the same macro or to a different macro file To display a new page in the same macro file you can use the href HTML tag lt a href input gt Return to previous page lt a gt lt a href end gt Go to the last page lt a gt By clicking on the preceding hypertext link the user is sent to the SHTML INPUT or SHTML END section of the current macro file depending on which link was selected 4 7 2 Using Include Files 146 Include files can be served from the IFS and the QSYS file system If you have not created an INI file that includes the INCLUDE_PATH statement you need to
247. figuration options Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 213 214 Browser Requirements The following configuration elements require a browser that supports extensions to HTML 2 0 Body background color Body background image e Monochrome terminal text color The following configuration elements require a browser that supports extensions to HTML 3 0 Color terminal Color terminal text color The following configuration elements require a browser that supports HTML tables Tables enabled e Table font name e Table width The following configuration element requires a browser that supports JavaScript e Send JavaScript You may have also included some HTML 3 0 or HTML extensions in your custom header or footer file that may cause browser problems Make sure you understand the ramifications that the HTML tags may have on older browsers before you include them in a custom header or footer file 7 Unable to view all AS 400 output messages Since the browser is only able to receive data from the AS 400 system after a user submits the HTML form it is not possible for Webulator 400 to continually send display updates to the browser Webulator 400 attempts to buffer all output messages and send them with the next display but it is not always able to do so Webulator 400 clears all display data seen and unseen whenever it encounters a Clear Unit command in the 5250 data stream A Clear Unit command is inserted
248. following simple example shows a macro named SQLM that issues a single SQL command an gt define DATABASE HOSTNAME FUNCTION DTW_SQL sql1 select from custinfo customer HTML REPORT sq11 Figure 59 Simple SQL Command Function This is an example URL that references the macro assuming that e The macro is located in the WWW macro directory e The HTTP server has been configured to call the Net Data CGI BIN program DB2www e QTMHHTP1 has been given authority to access the macro file and table that the SQL command reads http hostname cgi bin db2ww WWW macro SQLM report If you did not create a Net Data initialization file the SQL language environment is enabled by default However if you create an initialization file and you want to use the SQL language environment the following configuration statement must be in the initialization file ENVIRONMENT DTW SQL QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHSQL SRVPGM IN DATABASE LOGIN PASSWORD TRANSACTION_SCOPE SHOWSQL DB_CASE OUT DTWTABLE SQL CODE The text of this environment statement must all be on one line in the initialization file It is shown here divided between multiple lines for readability The SQL language environment parameters in the preceding configuration statement are passed to the language environment and are described in the following list Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 143 DATABASE The SQL language environment est
249. formation so that it can be used to replace the function call in the Web macro expansion The rules for using and modifying variables from a FUNCTION block in a function call can be summarized as follows 1 All variables both globally defined and function parameters are used to perform variable substitution on the executable statements before invoking the function 2 Only IN or INOUT parameters are passed to the language environment 3 Only OUT or INOUT parameters can be modified by the function 4 All variables both globally defined and function parameters are used to perform variable substitution on the report section of the FUNCTION block after invoking the function When MESSAGE block and REPORT block processing is complete the value of the function call is used to replace the function call in the Web macro 4 4 2 1 Calling High Level Language Programs This example shows you how to call an RPG program from Net Data The same method is used to call other high level language programs on the AS 400 system To pass parameters from Net Data to your high level language program you need to use the same API Application Programming Interface you use for CGI BIN programs This means using the API Get Environment Variables QtmhGetEnv to get Variables from Net Data and Write to Standard out QtmhWrStout to return a text buffer to Net Data For a more detailed discussion about these APIs see Section 3 9 Programming CGI BIN wi
250. forms including Windows 95 Windows NT OS 2 AIX the AS 400 system or MVS e Enjoy true team based environment with versioning for each developer e Use standard parts definition including Java beans e Get portable applications and reduced application development costs Use an incremental compiler for faster development Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Reference For more information about VisualAge Web directions go to www software ibm com ad visage webwp htm 2 15 Application Security Considerations The number of servers connecting to the Internet is growing at a phenomenal rate going from a few thousand systems in 1994 to over 252000 in June 1996 It is estimated that there are over 50 million Web pages on the Internet This explosive growth of the Internet makes it increasingly an attractive way of doing business However this vast quantity of information also makes it an attractive environment for hackers Many systems are attacked The Computer Security Institute released a survey of corporate security specialists in May 1996 where 42 of them indicated they had knowledge of unauthorized use of their systems in the preceding year It is to be assumed that the remaining 58 of the companies neither had or detected any attack A break in publicly known can be damaging to your company s reputation Would you want to do business with a bank that had reported a system break in Certainly large
251. from Web pages downloaded to the Web browser and executed on the client machine The technology that makes this possible and secure is the Java run time environment designed for this purpose by Sun Microsystems IBM has licensed the technology from Sun Microsystems and will use it on its platforms beta versions of the Java toolkit for 0S 2 AIX and others are already available on the Internet see http ncc hursley ibm com javainfo Java applets can be written in any language that can be compiled to the Java instruction codes One such language is called Java a simplified derivative of C IBM is actively investigating alternatives to the Java language for programming the Java environment For more detailed information see Chapter 6 Further Enhancing Your AS 400 HTML Pages on page 221 2 2 AS 400 Internet Application Scenarios When discussing AS 400 systems and the Internet one needs to consider the various roles the system may play since they affect the design and technology requirements for an application Public Internet Presence The AS 400 system can be a public server for example Web server that is accessed directly by users from the Internet The users that access the system are often not known in advance Some services are generally open to the general public while others are reserved for authorized users Internet Accessible The AS 400 system is a private system that is accessible by authorized user
252. g CRTDSPF and setting the ENHDSP Enhanced Display parameter to NO the HTML keyword is ignored hence it is possible to turn off the HTML without recompiling the DDS e You can also use variable substitution in DDS and pull data from a DB file and merge it with the HTML keyword such as in a table Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 189 190 m What are HTML Tags HTML documents consists of plain text interspersed with markup commands called tags The tags are instructions to the browser software on how to display the text They are represented by strings enclosed in lt angle brackets gt See Section 2 9 1 Hypertext Markup Language HTML on page 25 for more information about HTML Another thing to mention is that in the preceding example normal DDS keywords and HTML specifications are used within one source HTML is a procedural language where the order of the tags determines when they are processed Row and column have no meaning in such a language In this case the row and column are used to determine the order in which the HTML tags are sent to the browser For example an HTML keyword at row 2 column 4 appears before an HTML keyword at row 2 column 6 See Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples on page 263 for more examples of DDS usage and overlap issues With the HTML keyword constant fields that have the same row and column value are processed in the order in which they appear in the DDS sour
253. g occurs only for output fields 2 HTML tags are inserted into the data stream if the device query indicates that the device is an AS 400 5250 Workstation Gateway virtual terminal Otherwise for normal displays the HTML tags are ignored 264 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet B 2 Logon Exit Code Examples for Workstation Gateway This section shows some sample codes for Logon Exit function implementation Module Description Feke ke e ke he he ARERR ER ERE KER ERE EKER ER EER EREEREREREREEREE JE Source File Name exitpgm c Jx Module Name Workstation Gateway Server logon exit program Service Program Name n a Source File Description E This module contains functions to allow a client browser to bypass an AS 400 sign on panel and invoke an application Reference TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 3420 Appendix I End Module Description Ke He e e Re e he AREER ERE e de e e e e ERE ER ERE REEREREREERERERE define _EXITPGM_C EFE R H k ekekeke k e ke ke he e ke ke he e deke ke he e e ke e e e ke ke e e e AAA ke ke e e Re ke e IAA e ke Ke k deke ke ke e ekekeke k kekeke All file scoped includes go here EFE R H k eke keke ke e ke ke he e ke ke he e e ke ke He e e ke e e e ke He e e e IATA He ke e e e ke e e e e He e e ke Te e eke ke ke e ekekeke kekeke ifndef __stdio_h include lt stdio h gt endif
254. g sample macro uses currently available predefined variables Notice that all of the variables start with DTW_ TE gt G wxxxx 4 REPORT SECTION e ee RHR RH IaH HR HHS HTML REPORT lt HTML gt lt TITLE gt Environment Variables lt TITLE gt lt P gt HERE ARE THE RESULTS OF ENVIRONMENT REQUESTS lt HR gt lt P gt lt TABLE BORDER gt lt TR gt lt TD gt This Web macro was last modified lt TD gt DTW_MACRO_LAST MODIFIED lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt File name is lt TD gt DTW_MACRO_FILENAME lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt CURRENT FILE NAME lt TD gt DTW_CURRENT_FILENAME lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt Current last modi f ied lt TD gt DTW_CURRENT_LAST MODIFIED lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt Path lt TD gt DTW_MP_PATH lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt Version lt TD gt DTW_MP_VERSION lt TR gt lt TABLE gt lt HTML gt a Figure 65 Net Data Environment Variables Macro Netscape Environment Variables po Awewyoursys combnd spcvar MBR report HERE ARE THE RESULTS OF ENVIRONMENT REQUESTS This Web macro was last Tue Apr 8 16 56 25 1997 IQS To LIBINDMACROS LIBMNDIACROS FILE spovar MB IQS To LIBNDMACKOS LIBNDMACKOS FILE spovar MB Tue Apr 8 16 56 25 1997 7 Figure 66 Sample of Net Data Environment Variables Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 151 4 7 7 Net Data Environment Variables Net Data environment variables a
255. ge HREF mailto webmaster yoursite com gt webmaster yoursite com lt A gt with comments The mailto action in the HREF tag causes the client s e mail package to be opened with the subject field already filled with the text Comment on site home page 2 10 Server Side Imagemap Support Suppose you want people to be able to choose a car check if a certain model is available and make reservations from your Web server What would be better than to show them a map of the country and allow them to click on any location and make the desired reservation That is what a clickable image map can do lt can have many other uses also For example it helps users better understand a picture or diagram by allowing them to click on a component represented in the graphic to see an explanation It also lets users move down to finer levels of detail on a map of a campus building or whatever you want Clickable image maps obviously work only with graphically oriented Web browsers You should always try to provide alternate text based methods of accessing the same information 30 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet E arame AA big apps File Edit View Go Bookmarks Options Directory Window Help 000050600 bito interi SOIC 400 mvh300 htm talact your ragioni mom tha Liet bala Europe E United Kingdom E Freres D Gama E Tey D Shun North medica Aftica Asia South America Diiia We ate providing thie infomatio
256. get browsers support it You should be safe setting this value to COURIER lt produces much larger HTML files It is slower for the browser to render on the display Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 207 e It requires a browser that supports HTML tables m Recommendations You are better off using preformatted text if your 5250 screens do not use tabular data It produces smaller files that are quicker to display and is supported by more browsers than tables If your programs use tabular data and you are not satisfied with the way preformatted text aligns your columns experiment with tables 5 7 3 DDS HTML Support 208 This section describes the DDS HTML support considerations when using Webulator 400 5 7 3 1 OS 400 Version Considerations This section describes usability considerations applied for specific version of OS 400 V3R1 V3R6 Considerations Browsers are context sensitive to the data stream that they receive In particular they assume that all less than signs lt area start of an HTML keyword and do not display any characters until it reaches the next greater than sign gt This causes display problems for any AS 400 data stream that contains a lt that is not an HTML keyword Because of this Webulator 400 recognizes a subset of HTML keywords and escapes all lt characters change the lt to a different set of characters that are not part of a recognized HTML keyword This has two sets of ramificatio
257. gration effort The AS 400 system s technology independent machine interface TIMI has shielded AS 400 customers from hardware technology changes for nearly 20 years Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview 233 Until now the majority of the focus has been on client applets written in Java But Java is a full function programming language that can be used to write server applications Java gives AS 400 developers the opportunity to move to object oriented programming and modernize their applications without the complexity inherent in other object oriented languages such as C Java is by design simpler than C or C For example Java does not implement pointers A Java program has a reference to an object but that reference is not a pointer Java also implements automatic garbage collection which eliminates the memory leaks that cause out of memory errors in C and C code today Other complex features of C that make the language both difficult to learn and to debug do not exist in Java These include multiple inheritance templates and operator overloading This makes Java a much simpler language and shortens both the learning curve and the development cycle when compared to other object oriented languages For the AS 400 customer who does not want to write programs in Java the bytecode portability ensures that 100 Pure Java code will run without recompilation on the AS 400 system This means that any application dev
258. group 39 integrated language environment ILE 35 interactive web model Common Gateway Interface CGI 7 forms fields and buttons 7 Index 285 Internet 16 internet application design considerations 5 Internet application performance 237 Internet client server programming model 18 Internet overview 1 history 2 what is Internet 1 Internet programming models 18 internet visual web management tool 11 intranet 16 italics tag 29 J Java applet 48 communicating to CGI 21 downloadable Java 9 Java development environment 12 Java Script 47 K keyboard tag 29 L language C 11 C 11 COBOL 11 PERL 11 REXX 11 RPG 11 language environment 139 build language environment 114 C 114 C 114 COBOL 114 DB2 database 114 REXX 114 RPG 114 legacy 10 level 1 heading tag 27 level 2 heading tag 29 level 3 heading tag 29 level 4 heading tag 29 level 5 heading tag 29 level 6 heading tag 29 line break tag 27 link tag 27 list item tag 29 local set 125 LOGIN 142 144 macro 10 macro file 116 286 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet macro language 112 113 macro language example 145 MACRO_PATH 163 maintaining state 147 mandatory entry 23 mandatory fill 23 mapping hotspots 32 math function 130 memory requirement 244 menu list tag 29 message blocks 136 migrating from DB2 WWW 166 multiple HTML 146 N net commerce 228 Net Data 10 246 built in function 129 environment variable 151 error message
259. h all of the form s parameters 3 The requested URL is a program a Common Gateway Interface program The parameters are passed to the application program by one of two ways depending on the form s method of either post or get Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 59 4 The server is executing the CGl program While running the CGl program is calling other programs or databases 5 The CGI program passes the output from the other programs or databases plus any additional information back to the server This is done by writing to the standard output of the application stdout 6 The server passes the information back to the browser This information is probably more HTML or a redirection indicator 7 Itis the browser s job to format the information it receives and display it URL The URL specifies the address or location of a resource such as CGI programs on the Internet The URL looks similar to this protocol host_name port pathname parameters To do all of this a set of standards has been set on how to implement CGI programs on your server so every possible Web browser that exists can access your server and execute the CGI program 3 2 Considerations Before You Start 60 The CGI program must be in the QSYS LIB file system which is the only file system from which you can execute programs on the AS 400 system The format for a program call is Example QSYS LIB library LI
260. haracters in the SQL command to upper or lower case DEFINE DB_CASE UPPER e DTW_TABLE The result of a SQL query is stored in this table if there are no user defined tables passed in e SQL CODE This variable contains the SQL warning or error code Successful SQL queries result in an SQL_CODE of zero Query completed with SQL code SQL_CODE Commitment Control Considerations Currently Net data for the AS 400 system uses commitment control so files that are accessed for update through it must be journaled Files that are accessed through the SQL SELECT statement are automatically journaled for you through the native SQL support on the AS 400 system so you do not need to start journaling for them 4 6 3 SYSTEM DTW_SYSTEM Language Environment 144 The SYSTEM language environment supports calls to external programs identified in an EXEC statement in the FUNCTION block The SYSTEM language environment interprets the EXEC statement by passing the specified program name and parameters to the operating system for execution using the C language system function call This method does not Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet allow Net Data variables to be directly passed or retrieved to the executable statements as the REXX language environment does so the SYSTEM language environment passes and retrieves variables in the following manner e Input parameters are passed as system environm
261. her section in an ACTION parameter accesses that section when the form is submitted Any input data is passed to the new section as implicit variables This is true of the single input field defined on this form When the form is Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 119 submitted data typed into this field is passed to the output section in the variable input_data You can access sections in other macros with a relative reference For example ACTION othermacro mbr main accesses the main HTML section in a macro file called othermacro mbr on the AS 400 system Again any data typed into the form is passed to this macro in the implicit variable input_data Notice again the simplicity of writing a macro There is no need to deal with environment variables to receive input data as you do with CGI BIN programs That processing is handled for you automatically by Net Data You only need to reference the variable names Today is 8 Apr 1997 Type some data to pass to a REX program Test Data for REXX P Figure 47 Browser View of Input HTML 120 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 4 2 4 HTML OUTPUT Section KAKKAAAAA AAA AAA AAA AA AAA HTML Section Output RRR ERKESAERALAERKERKEEAES HTML OUTPUT lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt page_title lt title gt More substitution lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Output Page lt h1 gt lt hr gt lt
262. hich the resources are actually stored This is useful since 1 It allows resources to be physically relocated without changing the apparent hierarchy and its implied associations 2 The details of underlying physical file systems can be hidden from client applications that are accessing the AS 400 HTTP server The second reason is especially important for the AS 400 HTTP server because of the differences between some of the AS 400 file systems and the tree structured hierarchical UNIX file systems upon which the HTTP protocol and the URL scheme are based The mapping directives MAP and Exec are used to specify a set of rules that define a process for translating and processing the path and file information contained in a URL that is received in a client request URL Each of the mapping directives may be specified multiple times and in any combination and may be placed anywhere in the AS 400 HTTP server configuration When the AS 400 HTTP server configuration is read during initialization the mapping directives are stored in order of appearance in a mapping rule table The incoming URL is compared against each of the specified mapping rules in turn If a directive applies the specified translation is carried out Depending on the rule that was matched rule processing is either suspended or continues with the next rule using the newly translated URL The mapping and the exec definitions are created through the WRKHTTPCFG command
263. ibm com Telephone orders United States toll free 1 800 879 2755 Canada toll free 1 800 IBM 4YOU Outside North America long distance charges apply 45 4810 1320 Danish 45 4810 1020 German 45 4810 1420 Dutch 45 4810 1620 Italian 45 4810 1540 English 45 4810 1270 Norwegian 45 4810 1670 Finnish 45 4810 1120 Spanish 45 4810 1220 French 45 4810 1170 Swedish Mail Orders send orders to IBM Publications IBM Publications IBM Direct Services Publications Customer Support 144 4th Avenue S W Sortemosevej 21 P O Box 29570 Calgary Alberta T2P 3N5 DK 3450 Aller d Raleigh NC 27626 0570 Canada Denmark USA Fax send orders to United States toll free 1 800 445 9269 Canada 1 403 267 4455 Outside North America 45 48 14 2207 long distance charge 1 800 IBM 4FAX United States or 1 001 408 256 5422 Outside USA ask for Index 4421 Abstracts of new redbooks Index 4422 IBM redbooks Index 4420 Redbooks for last six months Direct Services send note to softwareshop vnet ibm com On the World Wide Web Redbooks Home Page http www redbooks ibm com IBM Direct Publications Catalog http www elink ibmlink ibm com pbl pbl Internet Listserver With an Internet e mail address anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an e mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note le
264. id format for a number An input parameter contained a value that specified an exponent outside the supported range of 999 999 999 to 999 999 999 4002 function function_name Arithmetic overflow or underflow The result of an arithmetic operation had an exponent that was outside the supported range of 999 999 999 to 999 999 999 5000 6000 function function_name EXEC statement is empty function function_name EXEC was not specified in the function block The string specified in the EXEC statement of a function block contained only space characters A EXEC statement was not specified in the function block for the function being called 4 9 Getting Net Data Up and Running To enable Net Data you must do the following steps 1 Copy the Net Data program object to your CGI BIN library This is not absolutely necessary see the following Security Alert message box 2 Configure the HTTP server by adding specific directives to the configuration file 3 Create a Net Data initialization INI file optional Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 159 160 4 Grant authority to the QTMHHTP1 user profile to objects that are accessed by the Net Data program Let s take an in depth look at each of the preceding steps to enable Net Data on the AS 400 system 1 Copy the Net Data Program Object to a CGI BIN library m Systems Management Issue If you move the
265. iderations 31 2 10 1 2 Mapping the Hotspots in a Map File The next step is to develop an image map file such as the one seen previously You need to create a separate image map file for each clickable image map on your Web server Each line in an image map file represents a hotspot by defining an area within the graphic and the corresponding URL to be returned if someone clicks on that area with their Web browser By using a program on your PC such as MAPEDIT hotspots on the image are formatted by Shape Coordinate 1 Coordinate 2 Coordinate n URL URL for clicks on this object imvh301 htm NAMERICA Figure 10 Defining Hotspots and Associated URLs This figure shows North America in a circle shape mapped to its associated URL This map is made up of circles and triangular shaped polygons A rectangular shape was mapped last for the entire image as a default area Hotspots are defined by the following shapes e A circle for a circle a pair of coordinates for the center and a single value for the radius e A polygon for a polygon the number of coordinates depend on the number of sides defined for the polygon A rectangle for a rectangle with two coordinate pairs upper left and lower right Coordinates are x y pairs counting in pixels from the upper left hand corner of the image The URL can be either an actual URL pointing to any resource on the World Wide Web or it can point to another image or document
266. ied in a FUNCTION block The REXX language environment starts the REXX interpreter in the default command environment COMMAND the CL command environment If you want to run another command environment such as EXECSQL SQL environment CPICOMM CPI communications environment or a user defined language environment you need to specify the language environment in the REXX program using the ADDRESS built in REXX function e The REXX language environment requires external REXX programs to reside in the QSYS LIB file system e The QTMHHTP1 user profile must have the proper authority to access and read the file that contains the external REXX program in addition to any resources that a REXX program uses Calls to external REXX programs are identified in a FUNCTION block by a statement of the form EXEC REXX file name optional parameters The following simple example shows a macro named REXXM with both an internal REXX program and a reference to an external REXX program Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 139 define a 3 define b 0 function DTW_REXX func1 IN inpl OUT outpl EXEC QSYS LIB REXX LIB REXXSRC FILE TREXX MBR function DTW_REXX func2 IN inpl OUT outpl outpl 2 inpl HTML REPORT funcl a b b b func2 a b Pal oe Figure 56 Macro REXXM In the example func1 results in the REXX program TREXX MBR being interpreted by the REXX interpreter an
267. ing address redbook vnet ibm com Preface XV xvi Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Chapter 1 AS 400 System in Network Computing Environment This redbook is intended to give directions to enable an AS 400 application to the Internet It gives you the necessary information to implement and run the Internet related AS 400 applications using one or a combination of the following available techniques e Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN e Net Data e Workstation Gateway JAVA Applets and JAVA Scripts It is also the intent of this redbook to provide you with a road map of the AS 400 application developing scenario for the Internet and performance considerations This book the same as other IBM redbooks mentions related areas such as IBM offerings and AS 400 solutions As you may have seen most product or solutions providers are offering many kinds of Internet services As well as an Internet connection for the AS 400 system IBM offers e Client and server software e Firewalls IBM networking services e IBM information super highway solutions IBM global network In this chapter we talk about Topic Please see What is the Internet See Section 1 1 What is the Internet for more information History of the Internet See Section 1 2 History of Internet on page 2 for more information Network Computing See Section 1 3 Network Computing on page 3 for more information Why AS 400
268. input type radio name sat value 3 gt Neither Satisfied nor Dissa lt li gt lt input type radio name sat value 4 gt Dissatisfied lt li gt lt input type radio name sat value 5 gt Very Dissatisfied lt li gt lt input type radio name sat value 6 Checked gt I have not used you lt s1 gt lt br gt lt input type submit value Enter gt lt br gt lt FORM gt lt body gt lt html gt Appendix A ILE RPG and ILE COBOL Sample CGI Programs 261 A 4 DDS for the CUSTPF file A T Namet RLen TDpB Functionst t t 4 4 4 R CUSTREC NAME 30 ADDR1 30 ADDR2 30 CITY 25 STATE 2 ZIP 5 ZIPP4 4 PHAC 3 PHPRE 3 PHNUM 4 PHEXT 4 EADDR 45 MAIL 1 SAT 1 262 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples This appendix discusses sample codes you might want to try and use when developing AS 400 Internet applications using the HTML gateway B 1 HTML Field Overlap Examples The following examples show where the HTML appears when you use the following coding Example 1 The HTML field has a starting column 2 before an output field The HTML appears before the field A 01 FLDIA 20 0 15 7DFTVAL Output Field A 01 15 5HTML lt p gt HTML code and results in HTML code Output Field Example 2 The HTML field has a starting column 1 before an output field meaning that the HTML starts at the attribute
269. ion Groups 2 12 7 Migration to ILE from the Original Programming Model 2 13 IFS Integrated File System Considerations 2 13 1 Short Overview of Various File Systems in IFS 2 13 2 Which AS 400 File System Works Best 2 13 3 How to Exchange Data Between the Root or QOpenSys and QSYS ElB oi te E eh eat ea 2 14 Java Programming Considerations 0 2 14 1 Java Scripts being Served from AS 400 System 2 14 2 Java Applets being Served from AS 400 System 2 14 3 Java Applications being Executed on AS 400 Java Virtual Machine 2 14 4 Using NetRexx to Create Java Applets 2 14 5 Using Perl to Create Java Applets 2 14 6 Using VisualAge for Java to Create Applets and Applications 2 15 Application Security Considerations 0 2 15 1 Related Publications 2 16 Internet URL References for More Information 2 17 Road Map for Internet Application Design Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 3 1 HTTP CGI Programming Model 3 2 Considerations Before You Start 3 2 1 Required Configuration 3 2 2 Overview of the Communication Between CGI Programs and the SEelrver aloe bal si eal eee e Aa 3 3 CGI BIN Programming 3 91 HTML Form lags 2 sio lee da ice ee 2 ee dla 3 4 GET Method gt tev CS oe Oi ai ak Pe Bae Re EROS BEE les 3 5 POST Methodo 3 6 A
270. ion from a Web macro using the at character followed by a FUNCTION block name function_name argument Table 11 Net Data Calling Functions Argument Function_name This is the name of the FUNCTION block to invoke The function must already be defined in the Web macro unless this is a built in function This is the name of a defined variable or a literal character string Arguments on a function call are matched up with the parameters on a FUNCTION block and each parameter is assigned the value of its corresponding argument for the duration of the FUNCTION block The arguments must be the same number and type as the corresponding parameters When a FUNCTION block is invoked Net Data proceeds this way 1 Net Data matches up all of the arguments on the function call with the parameters from the FUNCTION block If the number or usage type of the variables do not match an error occurs A set of variables is built from all of the function parameters specified in the FUNCTION block and the arguments specified in the ENVIRONMENT statement in the initialization file There are two distinct sets of variables at this step the global set consisting of all variables that have been defined in the Web macro so far and the ocal set just built for the function Variable references in the executable text of the FUNCTION block are replaced with the actual value of the variable by looking for the variable
271. ion group for a new application you should use a named activation group We now summarize the main differences between running an ILE PGM created with ACTGRP CALLER thus not created with OPM compatibility mode in the default activation group versus running it in a non default activation group for example user named or NEW 1 Exception handling If you do not handle exceptions in your application an extra CEE9901 message is generated when you run the PGM in the default activation group 2 Scoping OVRSCOPE and OPNSCOPE on the OVRDBF and OPNDBF commands default to ACTGRPDFN Thus when you open your files as SHARE YES the file is opened scoped to the call level in the default activation group it is opened scoped to the activation group level in a non default activation group 3 RCLRSC Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 41 This command cannot be run in a non default activation group It causes files to be closed for ILE procedures run in the default activation group This command also works differently for ILE compatibility mode programs to ILE non compatibility mode programs 4 Static Storage All RPG variables are kept in static storage Once an ILE procedure has been run in the default activation group the static storage associated with its variables are not returned to the system until end of job the program is not deactivated until end of job 2 12 7 Migration to ILE from the Origina
272. ions on the Internet Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview This chapter gives you a preview for the future of the AS 400 system in the Internet world This preview discusses some of the new implementations that will apply to the AS 400 system in future releases e AS 400 Firewall Technology e Internet Connection Services 400 e SSL Support for ICCS 400 e AS 400 HTTP Server Enhancements e Net Commerce for AS 400 e Java on the AS 400 system 7 1 AS 400 Firewall Technology Many companies are thinking of connecting their internal corporate networks to the Internet and for good reason There are potential rewards due to the increased visibility and the possibility for new types of applications However many are rightly concerned about the security of their systems For that reason IBM is developing unique firewall technology that makes it easier than ever to safely attach a network containing AS 400 systems to the Internet A firewall acts as a chokepoint through which all traffic to and from the Internet flows It prevents unwanted Internet traffic from entering your secure network while selectively allowing users access to the Internet Internal users can use browsers to access Web servers on the Internet and exchange mail with Internet users through the firewall while TCP IP access from the Internet can be selectively or entirely blocked 7 1 1 AS 400 Firewall Benefits e Concentrates security administration
273. isticated commercial environments By using CPW you can more accurately benchmark the performance of the AS 400 system against that of other similar systems 8 3 1 0AS 400 Advanced Server Models V3R7 240 The following chart shows the relative Performance Characteristics of all AS 400 Advanced Server Models running with the current version of OS 400 V3R7 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet o nN D y d iD i Figure 97 AS 400 Relative Performance CPW for Advanced Server Models V3R7 As you can see on the preceding chart the Performance Capability of the server models go over a wide range It starts at about 30 CPW for the smallest of the 40S Models over 80 CPW of the 50S to the fastest model 53S showing more than 500 CPW The CPW Value is useful in determining the system performance growth provided by different AS 400 models in the Internet environment As a first approximation CPW values can be used when a quick estimate is required followed by a more detailed analysis using BEST 1 for OS 400 For example a model 40S 2109 has a CPW value of 27 and the fastest 40S 2112 has a CPW value of 87 So based on the previous assumption we can say that a 40S 2112 may provide about three times the throughput of a 40S 2109 The ability of a system to process a unit of work is made up of many factors The most important factors are CPU speed and DASD access time It is important to note that ch
274. isualAge s powerful capabilities to the World Wide Web thus accelerating a developer s path to Java Java is an unparalleled cross platform programming environment for the Internet allowing widespread distribution of applets An applet created in Java can be downloaded from the Internet to anywhere in the enterprise immediately delivering critical information to the user Java applets also support user interaction providing for delivery of live content that is immediate computation of data and manipulation of displays VisualAge for Java is the newest member of IBM s acclaimed VisualAge family of application development tools Taking advantage of the hottest new programming language in years VisualAge for Java combines visual construction from parts with the Java language to create a fully scalable end to end object oriented rapid application development environment The promise of Java and the power of VisualAge e Take advantage of an object oriented rapid application development environment including incremental compile capabilities e Build secure live Web applications using existing enterprise data and perform transactions across multiple architectures and open protocols e Implement live logic interpreter tests for your Java logic on the same display e Eliminate client configuration Create Ready for Production applications or applets e Write it once and run it on multiple plat
275. ity Comparison Q O a fc Twinax DSPT Telnet 3270 VTxxx WSG Figure 101 5250 HTML Workstation Gateway Comparison Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 247 8 7 1 Workstation Gateway Performance Recommendations This section describes specific WSG performance recommendations 8 7 1 1 Workstation Gateway CPU Time and Capacity Workstation Gateway involves a significant amount of CPU processing compared with other workstation connectivity types for example Telnet Typical commercial transactions with Workstation Gateway use three times the CPU time of Telnet running the same application on the target system Therefore it is recommended to use Workstation Gateway casually or for non performance critical transactions It is not a good price performance decision to convert all of the workstations in an existing production environment from twinax or communications to Workstation Gateway Note that Workstation Gateway uses six times the CPU time of Telnet in CISC models but only three times more CPU time in RISC models 8 7 1 2 Workstation Gateway Response Time Response time is made up of browser time network time and server time Browsers typically contribute 0 5 seconds to 2 seconds to response time network time can vary widely and AS 400 server time typically ranges from 0 2 seconds to 5 seconds depending on the model load and application A problem in any one of these areas can cause a significa
276. ize parameter for both the route and interface effect the actual size of the line flows Changing these values from 576 bytes to a larger size perhaps the maximum of 16388 may reduce the overall number of transmissions This needs to be considered on both the server and the Web browser Typically even simple displays have several thousand bytes of HTML data 248 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 8 7 1 4 Workstation Gateway Memory Requirements Follow the faulting threshold guidelines suggested in the Work Management Guide by adjusting the memory in the machine pool the pool that the Workstation Gateway servers run in and the pool that the user jobs run in use the WRKSYSSTS command For the Workstation Gateway server pool the actual memory required per server working set size varies significantly by the workstation I O characteristics of the workload From one benchmark measured in the lab the memory requirement for the Workstation Gateway server pool is 600 K bytes 700 K bytes for each WSG server 8 7 1 5 Communications Lines and IOPs Workstation Gateway HTML sends significantly more bytes to the client workstation than Telnet does for the same application Therefore plan for additional communications line capacity to handle this extra load For example a Telnet transaction may consist of 1K bytes while a Workstation Gateway transaction may be 6K bytes for the same transaction 8 7 1 6 AS 400 Model Selection Use
277. k FORDASOOF O AE DISK kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HTMLFILE Input file read FORM input kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk FHTMLFILE IF E DISK kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HTMLO Output file prepared HTML Output in SRC PF HTMLO hi MBR hidden field in HTML Input Form kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk FHTMLO IF E DISK USROPN RENAME HTMLO HTMLOUT kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Variables for the CGI interface APIs These are for the APIEnVar DENBuff S 2048A INZ DENBuffLn S 9B 0 INZ 2048 DENActLn S 9B 0 INZ DENVarName S 64A INZ DENVarLn S 9b 0 INZ These are for the APICvtDB Datastructure INPUT fields kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DDBFileName S 20A INZ ORDASDS LIBL kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DDBBuff S 2048A INZ DDBBuffLn S 9B 0 INZ 2048 DDBDSLn S 9B 0 INZ DDBActLn S 9B 0 INZ DDBRespCd S 9B 0 INZ These are used for APIStdOut DOutBuff S 2048A INZ DOutBuffLn S 9B 0 INZ 2048 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Externally described data structure Used for Parsing Need a different one in each CGI BIN you write DORDASDS E DS Figure 38 Par
278. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk setvardata begsr eva eva eva checkr eva eva eva checkr endsr Sas MacOS oe Co oe vl 1 varnm v1 NAME varval v1 name varval v1 varIn v1 vl vl 1 varnm v1 PROGRAM varval v1 program varval v1 varIn v1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk GETENVF Call the QtmhGetEnv API kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk getenvf begsr callb parm parm parm parm parm parm endsr CECI CI CCL CIC QtmhGetEnv envrevr envrevr n envrspIn envrqsnm envrqsIn QUSEC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkk Figure 29 Part 2 of 2 RPG Source Code Gethtml procedure This procedure reads records from the HTML file CGIDEV HTMLSRC OUTRPG and puts them into a dyn amic array Variables for gethtml Is the name of the file containing HTML page output Dfn S 10 INZ HTMLSRC Dlib S 10 INZ CGIDEV Dmbr S 10 INZ OUTRPG Read output html page c callp gethtml fn lib mbr The HTML page output is a special page and looks similar to the following display Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet top Content type text html lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Demo POST method lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt H1 gt Environment variables lt H1 gt lt HR gt lt
279. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk This DS contains the user output message It should change from program to program kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk dOutMsg DS d 4 inz lt hr gt domsg 40 d 4 inz lt BR gt d 1 inz x 15 dOVRCMD DS d 20 inz OVRDBF FILE CUSTPF d 21 inz TOFILE WEBDB CUSTPF d 12 inz MBR FIRST d 14 inz OVRSCOPE JOB dDLTOVR DS d 20 inz DLTOVR FILE CUSTPF d 9 inz LVL JOB Appendix A ILE RPG and ILE COBOL Sample CGI Programs 253 EE es See ery eee ane eee Sere eee See eee eee eee ery ii kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Set length of input buffer Call the API to get input from Standard Input The string will have the field names and values This is used for the POST Method The number of bytes received is set in the field WSR LEN RECEIVED Refer to the TCP IP Configuration manual for API Parms F F F FH F HF kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk c MOVE blanks INBuff c EVAL INBuffLn SIZE INBuff c CALLB QtmhRdStin c Parm INBuff c Parm INBuffLn c Parm INActLn c Parm QUSEC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Set length of Database Buffer then call the convert to Database Function This takes the string of variable names and values and maps them to field names
280. l BODY Attributes gt Optional BODY elements Note All embedded file references must be qualified to the Web Server 400 document root by including a leading slash in the file name Failure to do this may result in broken links Note Webulator 400 may insert some optional BODY attributes into your custom header based on your configuration settings For example if the session has a Background Color Value configured but the custom header does not have a BGCOLOR attribute set Webulator 400 inserts the proper attribute to honor the configuration value If the custom header has a BGCOLOR attribute Webulator 400 uses its value instead m Example The following example header places a link to a home page and a mail address for the local WebMaster lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Webulator 400 Demo lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt A HREF home htm gt Home lt A gt lt A HREF mailto webmaster xyz com gt WebMaster lt A gt lt P gt If Send JavaScript is enabled Webulator 400 automatically inserts ONLOAD SetFocus into the form BODY tag If your custom HTML header also includes a JavaScript function that must be called on the OnLoad event you must include your function name in the BODY tag and a call to the SetFocus function at the end of your function Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet m Example Suppose that you have a JavaScript function called InitForm
281. l Programming Model 42 To take advantage of the enhancements provided with the RPG IV language definition you might consider converting your existing RPG application As you can appreciate RPG IV gives you more flexibility and better readability and as a result of these advantages you can improve your development environment and productivity An important point is that the new design of RPG IV opens the door for future enhancements and functions that were impossible to implement on the previous compiler The reason was the restrictions in the layout on the different specifications statements Increasing the length for some of the entries introducing keywords and free format operations in the extended calculation specifications lifted these limitations IBM offers you a simple control language command to convert your RPG 400 or RPG III source members to RPG IV source members Before you start migrating your RPG source members you might want to create a new source file to store the RPG IV sources The default name for the RPG IV source file is QRPGLESRC It is recommended that you use this name because all of the CL commands use this name as the default when they refer to the RPG IV source file When you are creating the target source file using the command CRTSRCPF for RPG IV members specify 112 for record length Twelve characters are for sequence numbers and date fields The additional 100 characters receive your source code The l
282. l it was full and the remainder of the data was discarded A flat file interface built in function could not find the specified file in the directories it was allowed to search A flat file interface built in function could not open the specified file because it was in use by this or another process and could not be shared in the specified mode 2002 function function_name The requested file filename was not opened A flat file interface built in function could not close the specified file because it was not opened by this macro invocation Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 157 158 Return Code 2003 Message Text function function_name Attempted to read a row of data that exceeded the maximum supported number of bytes Error Condition A flat file interface built in function could not read a row of data into a table variable because the number of bytes in the row exceeded the maximum supported number of bytes 2004 function function_name A path specified in FFI_PATH exceeded the maximum supported number of bytes A flat file interface built in function was attempting to find a file but encountered a path in the FFI_PATH configuration file variable that was longer than the maximum supported number of bytes 2005 2006 3001 function function_name System call error text function function _name The requested file name could not be
283. ld job performs the actual work to satisfy the client connect request The number of jobs actually started can vary as previously discussed benefit of this technique is that it allows the AS 400 system to do a multiplexing of connections within a single batch job 5 3 3 Using Workstation Gateway Now that we know what an HTML gateway does let s see some examples of the tran slation from text based 5250 panels to something a Web client can see and use For this we are going to show you some OS 400 displays that have been tran 1 slated to HTML Sign On Figure 81 on page 178 shows a portion of the traditional AS 400 sign on display converted now to HTML and displayed on a Netscape client Note Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 177 Netscape Sign Un the functionality is really no different than with a normal text based 5250 emulator User Password Program procedure Menu Current library Sign On System LL a SYSTEMNDz SUBSYSTEM 2 a 2a l QINTER DISPLAY ae ae cae tae Aas SE OP ADEVOOOG C COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1950 1995 Figure 81 The AS 400 Sign on Display Seen by the Workstation Gateway 178 The URL that your Web client needs to specify to evoke the Workstation Gateway support looks similar to the following example http hostname 5061 wsg Where HTTP Hostname 5061 The Workstation Gateway uses the HTTP protocol This identifies the syste
284. les are accessible as environment variables Table 14 Page 1 of 2 Net Data SYSTEM Language Environment Variables Implicit SYSTEM Language Environment Variables T_ROWS T_COLS Tis the table name This variable contains the current number of rows in the table Tis the table name This variable contains the current number of columns in the table 133 Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation Table 14 Page 2 of 2 Net Data SYSTEM Language Environment Variables Implicit SYSTEM Language Environment Variables T_N p T is the table name and p is the column number This variable contains the name of the pth column T_V_i p Tis the table name iis the row number and p is the column number This variable contains the value of the pth column of the ith row in the table 4 5 Report Blocks 134 The REPORT block is used to format and display data output from a FUNCTION block This output is typically table data although any valid combination of HTML tags macro variable references and function calls may be specified A table name may be specified on the REPORT block but is not required If a table name is not specified the table data used is that of the first output table in the parameter list of this FUNCTION block If no table was specified on the FUNCTION block the default table data is used The REPORT block is composed of three parts each of which is optional 1 Header Contains HTML
285. lications on the Internet products To use this functionality you should consult the I NET documentation available with that product 2 If the user has an AS 400 sign on display the USERID and PASSWORD are transmitted as plain text over the Web This means that unauthorized users might gain access to the AS 400 system A preferred method is to provide a Logon Exit program whereby the USERID and PASSWORD are not transmitted over the Web Alternatively Webulator 400 provides the ability to encode the USERID and PASSWORD before sending the data to the server 3 The existing application can be fully utilized depending on the user profile There may be several hundreds of displays all of which are available Absolutely no code changes are required 4 The same as the preceding item but the displays are enhanced by using the new DDS HTML keyword This requires code changes and recompilation of the DDS files 5 Using the existing application but providing a limited set of purpose written HTML displays using the new DDS keyword For example three new screens might be provided for order status order input and account enquiry Such displays access the existing routines and data This implementation provides for the case where you want to provide limited access to your existing applications and data 6 You might choose to design a completely new application tailored exclusively for use over the Internet Your application and display design
286. llb QtmhWrStout C parm OUTBuff C parm OUTBuffLn C parm QUSEC C return m REXX We recommend not using PULL and SAY procedures in REXX CGI programs You can make a function that calls RPG programs that use a QtmhRdStin and QtmhWrStout r__ For REXX Programmers We recommend using a debug method in all of your programs In the address http www as400 ibm com workshop webbui1d htm there is a good sample using a debugger 3 11 Examples for Environment Variables On the following pages there are some inquiry examples for environment variables r_ Environment Variables with GET Figure 34 on page 100 shows the inquiry results with the Method GET The environment variable QUERY_STRING contains the name value pairs m Environment Variables with POST Figure 36 on page 101 shows the inquiry results with the Method POST The environment variable QUERY STRING is empty POST always reads from STDIN Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 99 100 The following figure shows the form for program CGIENVGET Environment Variables with METHOD GET Form Environment T di i ITSO Company A i Demo A g nter the Environment variable QUERY_STRING HOME n LLL R R G Figure 33 The HTML Document using the FORM Tag with Method GET The following figure shows the HTML output from program CGIENVGET Environment Yarlables with GET
287. llow you to reference any environment variable that exists in the process under which Net Data is running To define a Net Data environment variable use the actual environment variable name You need to define Net Data environment variables before you use them DEFINE environment_variable_name ENVVAR When the variable is referenced in the Web macro Net Data simply gets the environment variable s current value Net Data replaces the variable reference with the current value For example the following figure displays the current values of the environment variables ame gt BL ERASER ERA EER DEFINE SECTION RAARSAEA REARS ES o DEFINE SCRIPT_NAME ENVVAR DEFINE HTTP_USER_AGENT ENVVAR SDEFINE SERVER_SOFTWARE ENVVAR G FAFAKKKKX REPORT SECTION FERERA TERRA ERRE RARA HTML REPORT lt HTML gt lt TITLE gt Environment Variables lt TITLE gt lt P gt HERE ARE THE RESULTS OF ENVIRONMENT REQUESTS lt HR gt lt P gt lt TABLE BORDER gt lt TR gt lt TD gt The script name is lt TD gt SCRIPT_NAME lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt The requesting browser was lt TD gt HTTP_USER_AGENT lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt The HTTP Server Software is lt TD gt SERVER_SOFTWARE lt TR gt lt table gt lt HTML gt o Figure 67 Macro to Get Environment Variables etscape Environment Variable Figure 68 Sample Output of Environment Variables 152 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet
288. lt p gt This is the last screen Your first name is firstName lt p gt lt This table horizontally aligns the buttons gt lt TABLE gt lt TR gt lt TD gt lt This is the back form gt myPop prevPanel tempQ lt form method POST action prevPanel gt lt input type hidden name mainQ value tempQ gt Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 149 lt POST hidden variables gt SINCLUDE itsoexm2 mbr lt input type submit name backButton value Back gt lt form gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt lt body gt lt html gt The contents of the INCLUDE itsoexm2 mbr are shown in the following example lt input type hidden name firstName value firstName gt lt input type hidden name astName value 1astName gt lt input type hidden name Serial value Serial gt In this example we are only using the firstName Hidden field However the idea is to understand how to move from one HTML section to another and bring forward or backward the field values that the user has input to the forms 4 7 5 Net Data Hidden Variables 150 Hidden variables can be used to conceal the actual name of a variable from people who choose to view your HTML source with their Web browser 1 Define a variable for each string you want to hide Put the DEFINE statement for these variables after the HTML block where
289. ly maintain these popular procedures they are stored in one place a service program Since activation of a SRVPGM causes initialization of all static service programs it involves the initialization of all static storage in all modules within the service programs Even if your PGM only uses one module from Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet a service program if the service program contains N gt 1 modules the static storage for all N gt 1 modules is initialized at activation of your PGM e Binding Language This is a simple language that controls which procedures and variables are available from a service program to other programs or other service programs e Activation Groups An activation group enables partitioning of resources within a job Therefore an activation group is only seen by the job in which it was created An activation group consists of static storage needed for variables belonging to activated programs open files open data paths commitment control definitions and application programs When a new job is started the system automatically creates two activation groups These are collectively referred to as the default activation group but are split into activation group number 1 and number 2 All programs system or user run in an activation group The activation group in which an application program runs is determined at program creation When you create ILE programs and service programs you specif
290. m the query is executed At this point Net Data again starts sending HTML to the browser displaying the results of the query according to the HTML specified in the REPORT block After the REPORT block processing is done we return again to the HTML OUTPUT block and finish processing by sending out the remaining HTML specified after the queryHardware function call Only one HTML block is processed for each Net Data invocation However by using HTML anchor references and forms it becomes easy to let the end user start another invocation of Net Data on another HTML block all controlled by you Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 123 4 4 Web Macro Functions This section discusses the Net Data macro function definitions 4 4 1 Define Functions You can define your own functions or use Net Data s library of built in functions For functions that are not built in use a FUNCTION block to define the function in the Web macro The syntax is shown here FUNCTION type function name usage parameter RETURNS return var executable statements report block message block Table 10 Page 1 of 2 Net Data Function Definitions Implicit Function Definitions Type Identifies a language environment that is configured in the initialization file The language environment invokes a specific language processor which processes the executable statements and provides a standard interface between Net Data and
291. m where the request goes This can be just the host name or the fully qualified host name with domain 5061 is the default well known port for the Workstation Gateway server You must specify this port because your Web client tries to connect to port 80 by default if you fail to override this Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet WSG Means using the HTML Workstation Gateway function WSG can be upper or lower case If only uppercase works this indicates that perhaps the latest PTF is not installed on your AS 400 system For more information about the logon exit programs please see Section 5 4 4 Logon Exit Programs on page 191 However if a logon exit program is being used the URL looks similar to http hostname 5061 wsg QAPP0100 Where QAPP0100_ The prefix that indicates that exit point information follows QAPP0100 can be either upper or lower case exit_information This is used for the optional parameters that can be used to pass information from the client to the Workstation Gateway server running on the AS 400 system Characters following the QAPP0100 are interpreted as parameters to be passed to the server job For the initial connection these parameters can be a USERID and password used to direct the new client directly to an AS 400 application without the need to sign on to the AS 400 system Save State Information Once the session has been established what follows after the WSG in the URL i
292. mands and calls to other language environments and stores them in macro files at the Web server Variables are used to link the Macro language commands and the HTML source within the macro file The macro files are processed by Net Data and the results are passed to the HTTP server 4 1 1 Beyond DB2WWW Connection Net Data is an upwardly compatible follow on version of the DB2 World Wide Web Connection DB2WWW that was first shipped with OS 400 Version 3 Release 2 V3R2 and builds on the strong database access and report creation abilities of that version By providing significantly increased data access and manipulation capabilities Net Data has become a comprehensive general purpose Web application development environment for the creation of interactive data centric Web applications 4 1 2 Features and Functions 112 Net Data was designed with the following objectives e To not require extensive programming by the application developer other than the use of HTML to create forms SQL for queries and updates against the database REXX for string manipulation and more advanced functions and the Advanced Macro Language for ease of use functionality For more information about REXX see http rexx hursley ibm com e To be flexible for a variety of Web applications that can grow from simple to complex e To be portable to multiple server platforms Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet To be usable with existing W
293. me a CGI program is called a new index is created and new environment variables are set preventing one CGI program from using the environment variables intended for another CGI program Creation of the index is not dependent on the use of either method GET or POST The index is always created The QTMHENVI index contains the following environmental variables Table 3 CGI Environment Variables in the QTMHENVI Index File Environment Variable Contain QUERY_STRING Information that follows the first question mark in the URL referencing the CGI program SERVER_SOFTWARE SERVER_NAME GATEWAY_INTERFACE The name and version of the information server software answering the request and running the gateway Host name DNS alias or IP address of the server The version of the CGI specification to which the server complies SERVER_PROTOCOL The name and revision of the information protocol this request came in with SERVER_PORT REQUEST_METHOD PATH_INFO The port number to which the request was sent The method with which the request was made For HTTP this is GET or POST The extra path information following the path information required to identify the CGI program name PATH_TRANSLATED The server provides a translated version of PATH_INFO which takes the path and does any virtual to physical mapping to it SCRIPT_NAME REMOTE_HOST REMOTE_ADDR A virtual path to the prog
294. ment variables It also describes how output information usually HTML elements are passed back to the HTTP server using standard output Thus in its simplest form a CGI program can be defined as a program that 1 Can be called as an executable and run as achild process of the HTTP server this does not preclude the use of interpretive languages such as REXX and PERL In this case their respective interpreters run as child processes of the HTTP server Note The CGI program on the AS 400 runs within the same job as the HTTP server Is able to read from the standard input 2 3 Is able to access environment variables 4 Is able to write to the standard output 5 Is able to access command line arguments passed to main CGI programs can be as simple or as complex as the programmer wants to make them but clearly the intent of the interface is to allow simple programs or scripts to be developed quickly Given this definition of the CGI interface the following characteristics are for CGI programs e They can be written in compiled programming languages or interpreted scripts e They can be simple five or six line programs that serve a specialized function or generalized business applications that do complex calculations and database transactions for example order processing applications They are portable As with any programming model portability is a matter of degree To the extent that the program uses an
295. mentation online which may require you to start the server to access the links In particular the following items are discussed in more detail in the Webulator 400 documentation e Sign on methods e User profiles Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Virtual terminals Programming System security values and auditing 5 6 1 1 Configuring Webulator 400 1 Install the appropriate Web Server 400 or Commerce Server 400 and Webulator 400 code Create a Webulator 400 alias both servers ship a default Webulator alias named WWW5250 To add a new alias you can run the WRKWWWALS command Run the CHGWWWCFG command to enable Webulator 400 a Set the Directory Based Configuration File Field ACCGBLFILE The easiest way to set up Webulator 400 is to use the sample Directory Based Configuration file that is shipped with the Webulator 400 product You can use this file by setting the directory based configuration field to WWWSERV CFG WBLMACC CFG Note If you already have an entry in the directory based configuration field it is recommended that you temporarily replace your current configuration file with the Webulator 400 sample Directory Based Configuration file This allows you to test and get familiar with the functionality of Webulator 400 After you feel comfortable with its functionality you can modify your existing Directory Based Configuration file to include the desired new entries for Webulator 400 Note All
296. mposed of two main parts A head Every document should start with a head The head is the top part of the document In general it includes the document title Why is it then important to define the head part in the document The different browsers on the market have different ways to display the documents title The title is also the way by which documents are referenced when saved in the Hotlist or Quicklist of the browser The title therefore must be descriptive but short so it fits into one line of the Quicklist window The head of a document cannot contain anchors any kind of highlighting or paragraphs The tags to enclose the head are lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt simply meaning start and end of head A body The body is the core part of the HTML document It contains all of the information that is part of the document and controls the way this is presented to browser users Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 25 The body can contain images lists menus entry fields plain text or link to other resources The tags to enclose the body are lt BODY gt and lt BODY gt simply meaning start and end of body Figure 7 shows an example of an HTML document lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Ordering an AS 400 lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt IMG ALIGN middle SRC file htmldoc as400 gif gt lt B gt PLEASE FILL IN THE FOLLOWING lt B gt lt P gt lt FORM METHOD GET A
297. n using the same form shown in Figure 25 let s assume that the end user enters a value for querydata of AaBbCc First three The content of QUERY_STRING as echoed back to the client by CGI program CGIENVGET is shown as MBR CGIENVGETE amp querydata AaBbCc 2C First three Let s parse this string ourselves MBR CGIENVGETE amp querydata AaBbCc 2C First three Note Spaces become plus signs Special characters like the comma are represented as three ASCII character escape sequences representing a hexadecimal entry into an ASCII code page Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 75 Second name value pair The querydata name is case sensitive The value follows the equal sign First name value pair The name is MBR and is case sensitive The value follows the equal sign For more information about the format of the name value pairs we suggest that you look on the Web A good place to start is http hoohoo ncsa uiuc edu cgi To learn how to parse the name value pairs coming from the Web client keep reading 3 8 Programming CGI BIN with ILE C 400 76 The C language supports the environment variables through the getenv API The standard input stream and the standard output stream are supported through many APIs Examples are fgets and fwrite For the C programs the APIs are found in the QTMHCGI SVCPGM A C language header file member
298. n call SEXEC qsys lib netdatawww lib qrexsrc file ompsamp mbr This function executes an external REXX program called ompsamp mbr a FUNCTION DTW_REXX today RETURNS result result date lt fhe single source statement for this function is contained inline oe pals Figure 45 Function Definition Section This function definition section contains two function declarations The first rexx1 is a REXX function declaration that in turn executes an external REXX program called ompsamp cmd One input variable input is accepted by this function and automatically passed to the external REXX command The REXX command also returns one variable called result The contents of the result variable in the REXX command replaces the invoking rexx1 function call contained in the OUTPUT section The variables input and result are directly accessible by the REXX program as you can see in the following source for ompsamp cmd REXX result The REXX program received input from the macro The code in this function echoes the data that was passed to it You can format the resulting text any way you want by enclosing the requesting rexx1 function call in normal HTML style tags such as lt b gt or lt em gt Rather than using the result variable the REXX program can have written HTML statements to standard out using REXX SAY statemen
299. n to you via the ge a es Figure 9 Clickable World Map This figure shows a clickable map and an alternate text based method of accessing the same information Image map requests are another form of program call or CGI You can request image maps from either a server provided image mapping program or a user provided image mapping program The way to provide this level of function for your Web application is to take advantage of a server provided mapping program such as the one found on the AS 400 system This IBM written CGI BIN application is called QTMHIMAG in the QTCP library If an image map request is made from a user provided image program it is handled as a standard program call request that must meet the CGI interface There are several steps you need to take when creating a server provided image map e Plan a clickable image map e Map the hotspots in a map file e Reference your clickable image map in HTML e Configure the HTTP server Let s take a look at each of these steps in detail 2 10 1 1 Planning the Clickable Image Map First determine the image you are going to use As for any inline images the graphics need to be in GIF or JPEG format for widest portability Define where you are going to map the clickable areas or hotspots Depending on the size and make up of the image you are mapping you can use polygons rectangles or circles to identify hotspots Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Cons
300. named QTMHCGI is provided in H file in library QSYSINC To get the necessary prototypes include the header file as follows include lt qtmhcgi h gt Important Compiling Information Make sure QSYSINC is on your system before compiling programs that use these header files because the QSYSINC library is optionally installable V3R2 Only If you use the getenv function you must include the following header file include lt qp0z1170 h gt The version of getenv that is in the stdlib h header file does not work Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 3 8 1 Structure of C Program with POST Method HTML Document C Program CRTCMOD CRTPGM EAR Web client Figure 26 CGI Programming with C Language using POST Method 1 The HTML form is sent to the client This form includes all of the named fields that the user can click select pull down or type in the answers The form tag also contains the method in this case POST and the action which is the URL to which all the input parameters are sent In the case of the AS 400 system this URL is your CGI application that runs in QSYS LIB 2 The user selects the Submit button The HTTP server routes the data to the CGI program which places the named variables and values in Stdin It calls your CGI application which can e Read data from stdin using SAA C language library APIs such as fgets or fread e Processing anythi
301. ncept lt A href http wsgserver 5061 WSG QAPP0100 http httpserver return html gt G0 lt A gt This is useful if you want to return the HTML form that initiated the Workstation Gateway session or if you want to jump to another HTML form when you are done with the Workstation Gateway session Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet m IMPORTANT Try to ensure that your exit programs do not allow users access to any of the following functions Command Entry line e STRPASTHR Attention Key e System Request e F3 exit key or similar if possible do not use F keys for better ease of use and better security Where possible e Use a USER profile that has no rights or authority to sensitive information or programs e Prevent the sign off sign on display from being shown to the user Trap all errors and if in doubt sign off e Only allow sign off to the appropriate Workstation Gateway profile Do not forget access through help displays e Code an exit URL so the client is passed back to a useful HTML page Above all test your exit program and application and try to look for all the access points into your system through the Workstation Gateway Use the following steps to use the Exit Program 1 Code your Exit Program You can use the sample program provided 2 End the Workstation Gateway Server by using the ENDTCPSVR SERVER WSG command 3 Change the workstation gateway attribute fo
302. nd users are anonymous or unknown to the application when they request information from the server for the first time unless one of the first requests contain sign on information such as USERID and password The nature of how a user communicates to the server is again different than what we currently have in a typical AS 400 environment Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 13 2 5 5 Status of User Requests 14 In a native AS 400 environment there is a one to one relationship between one user and an invocation of the application program one job per user Also it is quite common for an application that needs more than one transaction to the user to complete one business transaction Because it is always the same user talking to the same program invocation it is relatively easy to keep track of what the user did and what the next steps should be In the Internet server environment however each dialog is separate from each other and it is probably going to use another server job So there is no information being kept on the server regarding the client To keep track of a particular user and what it has processed so far you can use what is called a cookie or hidden fields a feature inside the browser The following sections describe how cookies and hidden fields can be used 2 5 5 1 How Cookies Work Client Side Persistent Information A cookie is a small piece of information that a Web server can ask the browser
303. ng DB2 Some of the characteristics of the SQL language environments include The SQL language environment requires that a directory entry for the local database is in the relational database directory that is a directory entry with a remote location of LOCAL An entry can be added by using the Add Relational Database Directory Entry ADDRDBDIRE command Any valid SQL statement can be passed to the SQL language environment The SQL statements must be valid DB2 for OS 400 commands SQL or system naming mode can be used SQL naming mode is the default SQL naming mode uses a period when naming the tables Library Table System naming mode uses the standard slash Library Table If system naming mode is desired insert the following line in the Net Data initialization file DTW_SQL_NAMING_MODE SYSTEM_MODE You can also set DTW_SQL_NAMING_MODE to SQL_MODE which is the same as the default of SQL naming mode When a connection is made to a remote AS 400 system the SQL Call Level Interface looks for an SQLPKG object in library QGPL with the name of QSQCLIPKG If it exists it is used but if it does not exist it is created This SQL package contains all the rules by which the native SQL is accessed Therefore the first connection s attributes set the rules that all subsequent connections must follow The contents of the QGPL QSQCLIPKG contains the following information 5716SS1 V3R6M0 950929 Print SQL information Object name
304. ng that you want to do including access to DB2 400 data e Your CGI application must generate the HTML output that is going back to the client e Write data to stdout using SAA C language library APIs such as fwrite or printf 3 When your application ends whatever you wrote to stdout is sent back to the Web client 3 8 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE C 400 If you are using ILE C 400 as your CGI application on the AS 400 system you have one advantage And that advantage is that many other platforms namely UNIX based also use C as a tool for writing CGI And if you have not figured it out yet you soon realize that the CGI interface was born and develop on UNIX styled systems first So for the job of parsing the name value pairs that come from the Web client we can go to the Web to pull down public domain C code Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 77 examples This is what we did For this example please see Section 3 12 3 Source Code C Program PARSECGIP on page 108 We did need to modify the CGI parsing algorithm to work on the AS 400 system The problem with porting these routines came when the three character escape sequences such as 2C that represents the comma character where being translated into a single character The code that we found on the Web assumed that the native character set on the system it was running was ASCII The AS 400 system is EBCDIC so we needed to modify th
305. ngs are different from a common constant First you have to put the new keyword HTML before the constant and second the constant itself must consist of an HTML string that must use the HTML syntax Let s take a look at a DDS example with HTML statements Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 187 188 R DSPREC EMPNUM 02 FIRSTN 20 02 LASTN 20 02 PHONO rPrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrry 02 Figure 89 Note DSPSIZ 24 80 DS3 CA03 03 CA12 12 2 22 IBM Rochester Personnel Inquiry 3 WW WW WW WW WW WW WW W Ww System 4HTML lt IMG SRC INTERNUT ITSOIC 400 AS400 GIF gt 4HTML lt Table BORDER gt 4HTML lt TR gt 4HTML lt TH COLSPAN 2 gt lt TH gt 4HTML lt TH gt Table Demo lt TH gt 4HTML lt TR gt 4HTML lt TR ALIGN CENTER gt 4HTML lt TH ROWSPAN 2 gt lt TH gt 4HTML lt TH gt First lt TH gt A4HTML lt TD gt Row lt TD gt 4HTML lt TR gt 4HTML lt TR ALIGN CENTER gt 4HTML lt TH gt Second lt TH gt 4HTML lt TD gt Row lt TD gt 4HTML lt TR gt 4HTML lt TABLE gt 4HTML lt IMG ALIGN TOP SRC INTERNUT ITSOIC 400 RHAND GIF gt 3 4HTML lt A HREF http internut class wsg000 htm gt Link Here lt A gt 6 20 Please Input Employee Number 6S 0B 6 52 9 26 First Name
306. nguage dependent code HTML in separate directories and allow the user to choose their language at the first window Welcome window 2 5 6 1 CCSIDs and ISO Character Sets While OS 400 uses CCSIDs to identify the way text data is encoded the World Wide Web uses ISO character sets to identify the way text data is encoded The following example shows some of the useful ISO character sets and associated CCSIDs ASCII ISO character set CCSID US ASCII 367 1S0 8859 1 819 1S0 8859 2 912 1S0 8859 5 915 1S0 8859 7 813 1S0 8859 8 916 1S0 8859 9 920 1S0 2022 JP 5052 Note Note that ISO 8859 1 CCSID 819 is the default character set for HTTP r_ Related Documentation The following IBM manuals contain information that may be useful to you Character Data Representation Architecture Level 1 SC09 1390 00 Character Data Representation Architecture Level 2 SC09 1390 01 AS 400 International Application Development SC41 3603 00 AS 400 National Language Support Planning Guide Version 2 GC41 9877 02 Internet Intranet Extranet Considerations One of the major differences between running applications in the IntERnet versus the intRAnet and the EXTRAnet is security or the lack of it and what kind of information is presented to the user While using the intRAnet all information is available to the users with the right authority for example a sales person to all sales and customer related data a book keeping person to all pe
307. nnection Performance for AS 400 System Performance information for the Internet Connection for AS 400 IC 400 product is included in this section There are many factors that can impact overall performance for example end user response time and throughput in the complex Internet environment some of which are included in the following list Web Browser Processing speed of the client system Performance characteristics of the Web browser Client application performance characteristics Communications network Speed of the communications links Capacity of any proxy servers Congestion of network resources e AS 400 WWW Web server AS 400 processor speed Utilization of key AS 400 resources CPU IOP memory disk Web server performance characteristics Application performance characteristics Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 239 The primary focus of this section is to discuss the performance characteristics of the AS 400 system as a server in a Web serving environment providing capacity planning information and recommendations for best performance Data accesses across the Internet differ distinctly from accesses across traditional communications networks The additional resources to support Internet transactions by the CPU IOP and line are significant and must be considered in capacity planning Typically in a traditional network e Request and response between cli
308. nput field to be a cursor move request The request moves the cursor to that input field thus allowing you to use the F1 contextual help or F4 prompt buttons In fact any function key button can be used not just F1 and F4 buttons The AS 400 system does not keep the in the input field upon return from the function key button action Please note that this help function applies only to input fields If you have help defined for some output fields there is no way to get to it For general help the Help menu pull down or button first moves the cursor to display row 1 column 1 and invokes the help command This is not the same as context sensitive help This is because the cursor is moved to a position that is probably context insensitive before invoking help This also means using the Help menu pull down or button does not normally give the help for the home default input field and the 7 invocation mechanism may be needed to force this help to appear Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 5 Different Web browsers may have a different display output when handling the same HTML tags Recommendation Try and test your application on as many browsers as possible at least Netscape Internet Explorer and Mosaic based browsers such as IBM s Web Explorer 6 After you have established a session between your Web client and the AS 400 HTML gateway server function you might want to start a Telnet or
309. ns 1 All lt characters that are not a part of a recognized HTML keyword are displayed properly on Webulator 400 browser displays 2 It is possible to embed certain HTML keywords into the 5250 data stream and have them interpreted by the browser This means that you can include such things as images or links to other URLs inside of your displays Please note that the number of supported HTML keywords is limited The following HTML keywords are passed to the browser intact lt A gt Start of hyperlink anchor lt A gt End of hyperlink anchor lt IMG gt Image hyperlink Note Care should be taken before embedding HTML fields in your 5250 screens You should take into account the following constraints when designing displays that will contain embedded HTML keywords You may want to make output fields that contain HTML keywords to have a display attribute of Nondisplay DSPATR ND If you do not do this users viewing the display with an application other than Webulator 400 see the HTML keywords as text and not as embedded images or links HTML keywords usually require a large number of characters You may run into problems fitting them on your display You may run into some spacing problems There is sometimes little to no correlation between the amount of space needed for the keyword and the amount of space needed for the resulting image or link Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet
310. nsaction the server accesses the name server for information IP address and name translations These accesses cause significant overhead CPU time comm I O and greatly reduce system capacity These accesses can be eliminated by using the WRKHTTPCFG command and adding the line DNSLookUp Off For V3R7 PTF SF35478 is a prerequisite for this change 8 5 4 HTTP Server Memory Requirements Follow the faulting threshold guidelines suggested in the Work Management Guide by observing adjusting the memory in both the machine pool and the pool that the HTTP servers run in From one benchmark measured in the lab simple HTTP page serving with 1K byte files the memory requirement for the HTTP server pool is 1000 K bytes 400 K bytes for each HTTP server Factors that may significantly increase the memory requirements include using larger document sizes using CGI Bin programs and using Net Data 8 5 5 AS 400 Model Selection Use the information provided in this section along with the characterization of your HTTP workload environment in a capacity planning exercise perhaps with BEST 1 to choose the appropriate AS 400 model All the tasks associated with HTTP serving are non interactive so AS 400 server models probably provide the best price performance 8 5 6 File System Considerations 244 Web serving performance varies significantly based on which file system is used Each file system has different overhead and performan
311. nsaction flow that is controlled from the server The user typically gets a window HTML looks at it changes some fields and sends it back The user might also decide after receiving the data to do something else and not do anything with the data So the server program cannot rely on the fact that since it sent some data it is suppose to get some data back There is also no control over the arrival of the data the data might get stuck on the wire and never see the end user The server does not recognize it 2 5 2 Synchronization between Web Browser and Server 12 This section discus how the requests are synchronized between the Web browsers and the Web server 2 5 2 1 Sending Multiple Requests Most of the applications on the AS 400 system do not allow you to submit a further request while another request is currently processing This is due to the fact that during this time the application is not sensitive for user input With a Web browser this is not the case A user is allowed to request a new document or post data while another request is currently processed by a server For example this may happen when a user unintentionally double clicks a button Usually the second request causes the browser to discard the answer to the first one 2 5 2 2 History Mechanism and Caching Also with a native application it is not possible to switch to another window without server communication Browsers often have history mechanisms such as
312. nt performance problem for an end user To an end user it may seem apparent that any performance problem is attributed to the server even though the problem is elsewhere Better response time may be achieved by using the STYLE button on the browser Workstation Gateway window to remove the F keys on the bottom This reduces the browser time to process and show the display 8 7 1 3 Workstation Gateway Configuration Default settings for the Workstation Gateway related parameters typically work well Changing some of the following parameters may improve performance The number of clients per Workstation Gateway server job CHGWSGA command This parameter controls the maximum number of users that can be attached to a given Workstation Gateway server job When the Workstation Gateway server is started several server jobs start As clients sign on they are assigned to these server jobs one server is assigned to its maximum before users are assigned to the next server It is unlikely that this parameter needs to be changed Increasing this parameter may be recommended if there are hundreds of casual users Decreasing this parameter may be recommended if there are just several heavy users e MAXFRAME on LIND The maximum frame size parameter can be increased from 1994 bytes for TRLAN or other values for other protocols to its maximum of 16393 to allow for larger transmissions e MTU size CFGTCP command The maximum transmission unit s
313. nt specific statements can be from languages such as SQL and REXX Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet When a URL is received by the Web server that refers to Net Data the Web server passes essential information to it including the name of the Web macro and the HTML section to process Net Data reads and parses through the Web macro and interprets the statements When a Net Data function call statement is encountered it loads the service program of the requested language environment and passes language specific information to the language environment for processing The language environment processes the information and returns the results to Net Data After all parsing is done and the language environment processing is completed all that remains is HTML text that any Web browser can interpret You have complete control over the HTML that is used The HTML text is passed back to the Web server The server passes it to the Web browser where the user interacts with it Further requests from this or any other user results in the process being repeated over again Net Data Macro files consist of multiple logical sections The most common sections are the Define section Function section HTML Input section and the HTML Output section The following sample is a Net Data Macro file TCP IP EEEEEE DEFINE SECTION 482 e484 4445 abo TABLE LIB FILE Mytable TABLE ALL FW eee FUNCTION SECTION 8 48 3 FU
314. nternet Application Design Considerations 39 This separation of applications and application resources within a job is implemented in ILE through the use of activation groups 2 12 4 1 Default Activation Group OPM programs and ILE programs created with OPM compatibility mode always run in the default activation group Specifically these programs always run in default system activation group number 2 which is the user portion of the default activation group available for your applications to use 2 12 4 2 User Named Activation Group Upon a dynamic call to an ILE program that specifies a named activation group if the activation group does not already exist within the job it is created An important difference between named activation groups and the other types of activation groups is that a new activation group is only deleted when the Reclaim Activation Group RCLACTGRP command is issued Specify the name of an activation group using the ACTGRP keyword on the CRTPGM or CRTBNDxxx commands Named Activation Group You do not want to populate a table with activation groups They should be used by heavy duty applications that require significant startup costs 2 12 4 3 Activation Group of Caller We expect that most ILE programs are created to run in the same activation group as their calling program To specify this you should use ACTGRP CALLER on the CRTPGM command Control of where your program is run is determin
315. o Training neccessary Roadmap Fast public Data access to Internet Good when lot s of screens Applications Easy for big base applications Good for Intranet Quickly to implement Extensible w DDS Programmers available For specific apps If Security is a concern Future Dynamic pages see Chapter 7 EEE See Workstation CGI Bin Java Applets Java Applications Programming Scripts Gatewa 7 see Chapter 3 see Chapter 6 see Chapter 5 see Chapter 7 Net Data Easy to program Can be developed Runs on Java Virtual Not really easy to use Needs ILE PA anywhere and portable Machine peaches sanaliko Chapter 4 Supports RPG Only served from AS 400 Not best Performance N see Chapter 4 COBOL C and REXX Secure Truly portable Nasino Very flexible Extends application Allows Client Server on frontend Internet Password Userid visible Really easy to use Generates HTML Persistant Connection Portable Code Good error recovery SSL ready Powerful Database access Multiple Language Environments Figure 16 Roadmap for Internet Application Design The preceding chart can be used as a road map for choosing the right approach for developing your Internet application 56 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation As an owner of an HTTP server on the Internet you may sometimes see an advantage in allowing the readers of your documents HTM
316. o a Web server in the first place and it decides to put that information into your cookie file for some reason There is absolutely no way for a Web server to get access to any private information about your system through cookies To create a cookie a Web server sends a Set Cookie HTTP header line such as this one in response to a URL access from a browser Set Cookie NAME VALUE expires DATE path PATH domain DOMAIN NAME Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet NAME is the name of the value you are storing on the browser and VALUE is the actual data being stored in the cookie DATE is the date and time at which the cookie information expires and is forgotten by the browser and removed from the cookies file if it was written there DOMAIN is a host or domain name for which the cookie is valid servers outside of that domain can never see this particular cookie for security reasons PATH specifies a subset of the URLs at that server for which the cookie is valid other URLs do not see the cookie The only required field is NAME VALUE Whenever the browser sends an HTTP request for a URL on a server where it has stored cookies as long as DOMAIN and PATH match the URL it includes a line of the form Cookie NAME VALUE NAME VALUE A complete technical explanation of how cookies work is available on http home netscape com newsref std cookie_spec html 2 5 5 2 How Hidden Fields are Used Hidden variable
317. o minimize overlapping hotspots in the image map if there are any the first match is the one used 2 10 1 3 Referencing Your Clickable Image Map in HTML The final step in creating an image map is to tell the Web browser accessing the HTML document that the inline image it displays is a clickable image map In practice what you do is create a link where this image is the link trigger and the URL invokes the image map script and passes it the map name For example lt A HREF http servername imagemap pgm imagemap file gt lt IMG SRC image gif gt ISMAP gt lt A gt 2 10 1 4 Configuring Your Clickable Image Map in the HTTP Server To configure the HTTP server on the AS 400 system we reference the previous example Our imagemap pgm is qtcp qtmhimag and our image maps are found in the imagemap file Here is how our URL looks using the AS 400 system to serve image maps lt A HREF http servername qsys 1ib qtcp 1ib qtmhimag pgm BJ qsys 1ib itsoic400 1ib imagemap file mapk mbr gt H lt IMG SRC imvg300 gif ISMAP gt lt A gt KJ This section of the URL represents the server name and also where the image mapping program resides on the AS 400 system A This section tells the server where the actual image map file is located on the AS 400 system This section shows the source of the image or GIF file that is to be mapped and ISMAP tells the server this is an image map We can shorten and simplify the URL by taking
318. ochrome display configuration requires an HTML 2 0 compliant browser to properly view Webulator 400 displays You can optionally define the text color by configuring the Monochrome Text Color Note If you do this you need a browser that supports extensions to HTML 2 0 If you emulate a color display Webulator 400 uses the colors defined in the 5250 Data Description Specifications DDS While this is more visually appealing it does require a browser that supports extensions to HTML 3 0 You can optionally choose to define one or all of the colors by configuring the Screen Text Colors 5 7 3 3 HTML Headers e The standard Webulator 400 header contains the following HTML entries lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Text From First Output Field lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY TEXT Monochrome Text Color BACKGROUND Background Image BGCOLOR Background Color ONLOAD SetFocus gt e Webulator 400 allows you to replace the standard header with either an HTML or plain text custom header This feature allows you to control what Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 209 210 appears above the 5250 terminal data in the HTML form For example you can include a link to your company s home page or an address for sending e mail If you choose to create a custom HTML header file it must include the following tags lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Title Text lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY Optiona
319. of a day for example 8AM to noon and 1PM to 5PM Do virtually all of your requests occur in 12 hours of a day for example 8AM Eastern Standard Time to 5PM Pacific Standard Time Or does the worldwide appeal of your site result in a request load that is balanced around the clock Once you have found the line that most closely matches your Web site request load find on the X axis the number of millions of hits per day for your Web site Finally find the corresponding value on the Y axis which tells you the number of connections per second your Web site needs to support in order to achieve the corresponding number of hits per day For example let s assume that www askas400 com needs to service 3 5 million hits per day If you assume that the request rate is balanced throughout 24 hours a day www askas400 com needs to be configured to support 40 connections per second However the staff at www askas400 com knows that 80 of their requests arrive in the same eight hour period every day Based on the graph you can see that to service this peak request rate www askas400 com 238 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet needs to be configured to support nearly 100 connections per second resulting in dramatically different hardware requirements You also need to take file size into consideration when thinking about connection rates A hit can mean anything ranging from a quick sub second browse request all the way to the minutes an
320. often gates performance The price to pay for process isolation is to suffer the costs of process start time In a connectionless environment this becomes an even bigger problem as the process must get started for each request The AS 400 HTTP model minimizes this penalty by providing a pool of pre started server jobs that minimize a majority of the start up costs Add to that the ability to exploit named activation groups that also eliminate program initialization costs and the AS 400 CGI model starts to look better than what is provided on other platforms They use short running transactions This is a consequence of the connectionless model The length of a transaction is limited to a single URL request since that is the length of a process This problem brings about the requirement for the persistent CGI model described later The logic is almost entirely on the server The CGI model is basically a distributed presentation model where the logic is on the server and the client is responsible for window presentation The advantage of having the logic on the server is apparent when the number of window interactions is far smaller than the number of data accesses or the number of calculations performed by the server Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Although the CGI model is simple and universal it has some definite shortcomings This is primarily due to its connectionless nature e CGI program parameter data passed as part of
321. ollowing a dynamic call Service programs never have PEPs on the call stack This is because any procedure in a bound service program may be called multiple entry points MEP there is no concept of a first procedure to always be run PEP ina service program Remember that service programs cannot be run by a dynamic call The name of the PEP on the call stack depends on the ILE HLL used for the entry module ENTMOD of the program These names are _C_pep for ILE C _Q_QRNP_PEP for ILE RPG 400 _CL_PEP for ILE CL 2 12 2 ILE Compile and Bind Commands There are two categories of ILE compile commands provided 38 1 Full function ILE compile and bind commands The Create Module command and Create Program command provide access to all of the features available within ILE Greater design flexibility is provided as a result of splitting the compile and bind into two separate commands The Create Module commands are used to compile a module object hence the command is ILE compiler dependent CRTRPGMOD is used to create an RPG IV module and CRTCLMOD is used to create an ILE CL module To obtain an executable PGM object within ILE it is necessary to perform a compile of source code into a module object MODULE followed by a bind of the MODULE object or objects into a program object PGM Either the Create Program CRTPGM command is used to bind MODULE objects into a program or the CRTBNDxxx command is used to perform a one
322. om within the application when a display error occurs identifying that the session has been closed Basically you should monitor for errors whenever a display is written to the 5250 display from your program This can be done using MONMSG in CL programs following any SNDRCVF statements The contents of the EXEC parameter are simply the command SIGNOFF An illustration of this procedure as well as RPG and COBOL logic can be found in the following examples m gt PGM DCLF FILE DSPFILE SNDRCVF RCDFMT SCREEN1 MONMSG MSG CPF0000 EXEC SIGNOFF Figure 91 CL Program Example Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 205 sutra CLONO1NO2NO3Factor1 0pcdeFactor2 ResultLenDHHiLoEqComment EXMFT SCREENI 99 IN99 IFEQ 1 MOVEL SIGNOFF SGNOFF 7 Z ADD7 SGNLEN 155 CALL QCMDEXC PARM SGNOFF PARM SGNLEN END DADNQDADANAANAAQN Figure 92 RPG Program Example ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT DISPLAY FILE ASSIGN TO WORKSTATION ORGANIZATION IS TRANSACTION FILE STATUS IS WS FILE STATUS DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 WS FILE STATUS PIC X 2 01 WS SIGNOFF VARIABLES 05 WS SIGNOFF CMD PIC X 7 VALUE SIGNOFF 05 WS SIGNOFF LEN PIC 9 10 V9 5 COMP 3 VALUE 7 PROCEDURE DIVISION WRITE DISP RECORD FORMAT IS SCREENI READ DISPLAY FILE IF WS FILE STATUS IS NOT EQUAL 00 THEN CALL QCMDEXC USING WS SIGNOFF CMD WS SIGNOF
323. onal Text 5250 Display Now let s see how the Workstation Gateway made out of our DDS specifications looks Figure 86 on page 184 shows the result of the 5250 data stream conversion process Note that this does not mean that you had to recompile the display file The Workstation Gateway did this automatically on the fly for you When the Workstation Gateway detected that the terminal that receives the 5250 data stream is a virtual terminal that is a Web client the 5250 data stream was converted to the HTML data stream Note To view the HTML behind a Web page most browsers have a viewing option For Netscape use the View Document Source menu item and for Internet Explorer use the View Source menu item Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 183 184 lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt AS 400 Workstation Gateway lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt FORM METHOD POST ACTION http 9 5 69 208 1029 WSG 003816 QTMTWSG lt INPUT TYPE HIDDEN NAME SESSION VALUE A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 gt VALUE Enter gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 NAME A27CDCB57704125F 3B35D6E8 BUTTON 999 999 u VALUE Page Up gt VALUE Close gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT NAME SPECIALS VALUE Refresh gt VALUE Style gt lt CENTER gt lt H3 gt AS 400 Workstation Gateway lt H3 gt lt CENTER gt lt HR gt lt SELECT NAME General SIZE 1 gt lt OPTION SE
324. onnection with the host system The 5250 gateway compensates for these deficiencies the best as it can but usability suffers As far as performance goes there is of course a penalty to pay for the translation of 5250 screen buffers into HTML As you can imagine there are very few clues in the screen buffer to indicate how fields should be translated into HTML A brute force method is used to figure this out and it takes some time The result is that response time for a browser using the gateway is several times greater than an equivalent 5250 terminal connection The 5250 workstation gateway does provide some capabilities not available to 5250 terminals One is the capability to define HTML keywords in the display file DDS specification A new DDS keyword HTML can be added to a DDS specification and is recognized by the gateway These can be used to define for example HTML image tags to display graphics or a special page title headers footers and so on Another unique capability of the 5250 gateway is the ability for the browser to specify the program it wants to run as part of the URL An exit program written by the customer receives this request verifies the client s authority to the program and allows the operation to take place This eliminates the need to present the sign on display to the browser user and force the user to navigate to the program the user wants to run lt makes for much better integration with other HTML
325. ons 2 12 1 Overview of ILE Concepts ILE provides new concepts to support both a run time environment with fire walls built around an application and a development environment supporting the production of highly modularized reusable code These new concepts are summarized later For full details of each of these facilities please refer to Integrated Language Environment Concepts SC41 3606 e Procedures Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 35 36 A procedure is a set of self contained HLL statements that perform a particular task and return to the caller In ILE RPG 400 and ILE CL there is one procedure per source member and one procedure per module The procedure name is always the same as the containing MODULE name for RPG IV and ILE CL In ILE C 400 there may be multiple procedures called functions in C within a module Refer to Program Entry Procedure on page 38 for this special form of a procedure Modules and programs A module object MODULE is the result compilation using the new ILE compile commands A module cannot be run To be run a module must be bound into a program object PGM An ILE program object PGM is the result of binding one or more modules together You run programs on the system just as you did in OPM Static binding In OPM all calls to programs are dynamic involving system overhead to perform authority checking and find the address of the program Binding is the process o
326. ons are in place to prevent a Java applet from gaining access to the underlying operating system or data on the system But Java can be used for more than programs running within a browser Java is a full function programming language that can be used to write stand alone applications that run outside of a Web browser Java is an object oriented language which means the focus is on the data and functions or methods that operate on the data The data and the methods comprise a class that defines the state and behavior of an object With the exception of a few primitive data types such as integers or floating point numbers everything in Java is an object In addition to the programming language constructs necessary for object oriented program development Java includes a rich set of predefined classes that are grouped together in what are called packages The Java Development Kit JDK version most widely available at this time is JDK 1 0 2 This version of Java contains the following packages The java lang which contains the base classes e The java util which contains classes for commonly used data structures e The java io which contains classes for input and output to files and streams The java net which contains classes for sockets programming and other networking Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet e The java applet which contains the classes needed for applet programming e The java awt which contains the classe
327. optimal level of system throughput e A Net Data SQL macro is slightly slower than an SQL CGI Bin This is because the SQL macro does some formatting while the SQL CGI Bin does not do any formatting There are functional advantages in using an SQL macro Direct reuse of existing SQL statements no programming required Provides the built in ability to format SQL results Provides the ability to store SQL results in a table and pass the results to a different language environment for example REXX A Net Data HTML macro is slightly better than an HTML CGI Bin because of the implementation of activation groups If macro performance is critical turn off the reporting function uses more CPU time For REXX macros calling an external REXX program performs better than inline REXX statements 8 7 5250 HTML Workstation Gateway 5250 HTML Workstation Gateway enables all Web browsers to be clients to existing 5250 applications without making changes to the application At a high level the connection is made the request is received and processed the user job processes the application the workstation I O is converted from 5250 to HTML the HTML is sent to the browser and the connection is ended The tasks involved are the Workstation Gateway server jobs the user job one per client the communications router tasks the virtual terminal task and the Telnet task AS 400 Commercial Performance Work Station Connectiv
328. option is a sample you can use any string for identify the end of the HTML document sayh procedure expose g parse arg x read string argument do until x 7 Checks the lenght of the line KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKRKKKARAA if length x lt g 1maxnon then do call stdout x x fz end else If the data has more than the maximum number allowed KR Ae e e Ae KERR RRR ERE REE RR EKER ERE KAKA ER ERE RE RE RER EERE RERERE do i lastpos x g 1maxnon1 if i 0 then i g lmaxnon couldn t find blank break at maximum y left x i call stdout y write first i bytes x delstr x 1 i delete first i bytes x strip x strip leading and trailing blanks end end return The sayh subroutine calls the stdout subroutine Stdout inserts a newline character at the end of the line to make the data conform to the newline character rule and writes the line in standard output by a call to the STDOUT RPG program that uses a QtmhWrStout API If the option FLUSH appears in the argument list it forces any pending output to standard output before processing the data Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 97 stdout procedure expose g parse arg data options dataln length data if g ljobtype 1 an interactive job then do say data end else do Flush buffer if option FLUSH This case is similar to wri
329. or 400 does not have control over how the Browser handles the user interface the following DDS keywords have no effect CSRINPONLY Cursor Movement to Input e Capable Positions Only e FLDCSRPRG Cursor Progression Field HOME Home e MOUBTN Mouse Buttons e MSGALARM Message Alarm e SFLCSRPRG Subfile Cursor Progression e SFLCSRRRN Subfile Cursor Relative Record e Number WRDWRAP Word Wrap 10 Unable to perform Text Assist functions Webulator 400 is unable to fully 11 support programs that use the Text Assist functions for example OfficeVision 400 Text Assist programs require more interaction with the AS 400 system than is possible using Webulator 400 The Attention button does not always work Care should be taken before allowing this button to be made available through Webulator 400 You must ensure that the user profile that is signed on for a session has an Attention program assigned to it As long as it does everything works fine You can run into problems if a Webulator 400 user presses the Attention button and their user profile does not have an attention program defined for it 5250 emulation programs are able to notify the AS 400 system that the Attention key was pressed and retain control of the current display until they are interrupted by the new attention program Note If there is no attention program to run the 5250 emulation program continues to process the current display Since the W
330. os Macros created for Net Data have the simplicity of HTML with the functionality of CGI applications making it easy to add live data to static Web pages Live data can include information stored in Net Data compatible databases locally or on other systems REXX programs C and C programs RPG programs COBOL programs Java applets or any other source 4 1 An Overview of Net Data for AS 400 System Browser Browser Browser DADA Connection Figure 41 Net Data Overview Net Data enables the application developer to build Web applications on the AS 400 system using a simple macro language that includes HTML forms dynamic SQL REXX and high level language programs End users of Net Data Web macros see only the forms for their input and reports showing the results A user fills out the forms points and clicks to submit the form and Net Data processes the request as determined by the macro The complete HTML page is dynamically built by Net Data and the result is returned to the browser Copyright IBM Corp 1997 111 SQL Database REXX Programs Net Data TCP IP DB2 400 HTTP Server HTML Macros IMAGES Figure 42 Net Data General Overview The Macro language was developed to be a simple and flexible language enabling the application developer to use the full capabilities of HTML to create forms and reports The application developer creates HTML source SQL com
331. ou can always write the parsing code yourself in any language you want 3 PID IBM s Partners In Development has made available a code snippet small section of source code that you can place right before the call to QtmhCvtDb This code snippet modifies the string before the call by changing the hexadecimal characters of the escape sequence that point to a position in an ASCII code page into the EBCDIC representative This causes QtmhCvtDb to properly convert the escape sequences into a single EBCDIC character When IBM fixes the problem with QtmhCvtDb you simply remove the code snippet Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 3 9 3 ILE RPG Program Using the POST and GET Methods The following RPG program example shows pieces of RPG code fully functional that serves as a model for building new CGI programs This example is from a more complex RPG program that you can find in the following URL http www as400 ibm com workshop webbuild htm The functions used in this example are in a prototypes file included in the program by the copy command and the program calls them by the callp command The program is called by an HTML page reads the standard input stream and the SCRIPT_NAME environment variable and finally writes the HTML output kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk THIS SAMPLE CODE IS PROVIDED BY IBM FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY IT HAS NOT BEEN FULLY TESTED IT IS PR
332. our existing green screen applications are Internet enabled now With Net Data you can access your legacy data from WWW pages With CGI BIN programs you can build new applications to be used from WWW pages Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations Millions of people are now connected to each other through the Internet creating a magnificent spectrum of new application possibilities This topic discusses the AS 400 specific Internet application capabilities 2 1 1 Network Centric Computing The Internet is becoming more and more popular Every day thousands of new users are entering cyberspace They all are looking for using and exchanging information on the many servers that form the backbone of the Internet The World Wide Web WWW gives these users a single interface to these servers and so offers easy access to an overwhelming amount of information about almost everything on this planet However the information presented on the pages of the WWW used to be essentially static Using a Web browser a user could access the information on the Web but could not change or manipulate it in real time This changes with the availability of AS 400 Internet Connection CGI Programming Net Data and Workstation Gateway We cover these functions in great detail in the following chapters This will again change in the future when small programs called applets are linked
333. pic x value x 15 05 pic x 6 value City 05 city like city of cust buff 05 pic x value space 05 State like state of cust buff 05 pic x value space 05 zip like zip of cust buff 05 pic x value space 05 zipp4 like zipp4 of cust buff 05 pic x 4 value lt br gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 7 value Phone 05 pic x value 05 phac like phac of cust buff 05 pic xx value 05 phpre like phpre of cust buff 05 pic x value 05 phnum like phnum of cust buff 05 pic x 6 value Ext 05 phext like phext of cust buff 05 pic x 4 value lt br gt 05 pic x value x15 05 pic x 6 value Email 05 eaddr like eaddr of cust buff 05 pic x 4 value lt br gt 05 pic x value x15 01 ws output message 05 pic x 4 value lt hr gt 05 ws message pic x 40 value spaces 05 pic x 4 value lt br gt 05 pic x value x 15 LINKAGE SECTION 258 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet RR ER ie RO I E O PE eee ey eee Beginning of mainline PROCEDURE DIVISION MAIN LINE MOVE LENGTH OF QUS EC TO BYTES PROVIDED OF QUS EC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Set length of input buffer Call the API to get input from Standard Input The string will have the field names and values This is used for the POST Method The number of bytes received is set in the field WSR LEN RECEIVED r XX XX
334. placed back in that field If the value meets the criteria you will not see the JavaScript warning message For information on how to use these functions in your own macro files please consult the documentation Should checking be CRITICAL put focus back if field is incorrect No Figure 14 JavaScript Library Test Page Part 1 m Note Although it says in the preceding text that these functions are provided with Net Data these JavaScripts can be used in conjunction with CGl bin programs as well Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 47 egrating Java Script Libary httpu testcase boulder ibm com 808 L egi bin db2www valib macAnput jeans sirene bans E iaendiritsstass j Generic j LaaAARAAEAISESIISSSISESISESSIDSSSESSENEESBacaoansnannceoee Not Blank not_blank jsl Figure 15 JavaScript Library Test Page Part 2 Reference For more Information on Java Scripts see Chapter 6 Further Enhancing Your AS 400 HTML Pages on page 221 2 14 2 Java Applets being Served from AS 400 System Any Java applet created on any platform can be stored and served from the AS 400 system to any client requesting the applet There are no special things to take into consideration for serving Java applets Reference For more information on Java Applets see Chapter 6 Further Enhancing Your AS 400 HTML Pages on page 221 2 14 3 Java Applications being Executed on AS 40
335. plication development scenario for the Internet and performance considerations This redbook was written for technical services and consultants who are charged with the task of recommending and implementing an AS 400 network computing environment and for the IBM Business Partner and customer technical professional community Some knowledge of the AS 400 system application development and Internet programming is assumed The Team That Wrote This Redbook This redbook was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the International Technical Support Organization Rochester Center Ana Vallano Romero is a Systems Programmer working for Ecinsa an IBM Business Partner in Madrid Spain She holds a degree and diploma in Computer Science Her areas of expertise include Internet CGI Bin and C language programming She has more than 3 years of C programming and technical support experience with the IBM RS 6000 systems Jan P Collins is a Systems Consultant working for Datalink International an IBM Business Partner in Guernsey England During the past year he has been actively involved in integrating his company s existing AS 400 applications with the Internet He holds a degree and diploma of engineering in Naval Architecture from England but his most recent areas of expertise include Internet TCP IP Windows 95 HTML and Java He has more than 15 years of scientific programming and technical report writing
336. pt support 1 JavaScript is an interpreted scripting language that means the browser must perform extra work to follow the JavaScript instructions Testing did not indicate that performance is noticeably slower when including the JavaScript functions Depending on the equipment and browsers that you use you may see different results and determine that the added functionality is not worth the price in performance 2 JavaScript is relatively new and not all browsers support it A browser should ignore any HTML tags including JavaScript tags that they do not understand This is really why you would not want to use JavaScript in your Web applications Of course there is no guarantee that all browsers act appropriately If your target audience uses ill behaved browsers you may want to disable these features Further Java JavaScript Information URLs http ncc hursley ibm com javainfo wp htm Java for AS 400 A White Paper http www ibm com java IBM Networking Computing Java Web Site http ncc hursley ibm com javainfo hurindex html IBM Centre for Java Technology Development Chapter 6 Further Enhancing Your AS 400 HTML Pages 223 http www javasoft com Sun s Java Home page http www dannyg com javascript index html Danny Goodman s JavaScript Pages provides many application excerpts Recommended Reading JavaScript Bible 2nd Edition published by IDG Books ISBN 0 7645 3022 4 224 Unleashing AS 400 Applicat
337. r Center Daryl E Woker Internet Security and Firewalls AS 400 Development IBM Rochester David D Money Network Computing AS 400 Partners in Development IBM Rochester Jason Hunt Network Computing AS 400 Partners in Development IBM Rochester Jim J Herring Internet Technologies AS 400 Development IBM Rochester Jose Carlos Duarte Goncalves Network Computing IBM Sao Paulo Brazil Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Marcela Adan Internet Security and Firewalls ITSO Rochester Center Mark A McKelvey Internet Security and Firewalls AS 400 Development IBM Rochester Mel L Rothman CGI Bin Programming AS 400 Customer Technology Center IBM Rochester Mike W Schroeder Net Data Internet AS 400 Development IBM Rochester Nadir K Amra Net Data Internet AS 400 Development IBM Rochester Paul D Brown Network Computing AS 400 Partners in Development IBM Rochester Comments Welcome Your comments are important to us We want our redbooks to be as helpful as possible Please send us your comments about this or other redbooks in one of the following ways e Fax the evaluation form found in ITSO Redbook Evaluation on page 285 to the fax number shown on the form e Use the electronic evaluation form found on the Redbooks Home Pages at the following URLs For Internet users http www redbooks ibm com For IBM Intranet users http w3 itso ibm com redbooks e Send us a note at the follow
338. r and the server It is recommended that this only be used over internal networks unless secured with SSL and Commerce Server 400 If Commerce Server 400 is configured to use SSL for Webulator 400 sessions all data including user IDs and passwords is encrypted e UseAuthentication uses authentication information sent from the browser as the AS 400 user and password This is slightly more secure than Screen because the user and password are sent UUENCODED while UUENCODED text is not as obvious as clear text it is not a form of encryption and it is easy to decode it You can also combine this with access control to limit the user IDs and passwords that can be entered for a URL This changes the meaning of Web Server 400 required entries any users listed are expected to be valid user profiles instead of entries in a user file Disabled disables Webulator access in the current directory Note If no entry is provided for a directory the parent directory s value is inherited If the root directory has no entry the default which is Disabled is inherited UserName This must be present if User was specified previously It is the AS 400 user that is signed on It must have a corresponding entry in the Webulator 400 user file Note Only one entry may exist in a directory section If more than one entry is found the last one is used e AllowSignonOverride This is only applicable if the method is set to User or UseA
339. r to this question but we can give you a few things to think about The good news is that you are not stuck with any one file Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet system You can use a combination of file systems to apply the best solution to each situation The following list contains some of the primary considerations e Performance is usually a primary consideration Our tests show that ina typical configuration serving from the root directory is the fastest Here are the relative numbers your mileage may vary 1 Integrated File System root directory 1 2 Integrated File System QOpenSys directory 1 3 QDLS 75 4 AS 400 file system 45 5 QLANSrv 22 e Environment is also important How do you intend to create and maintain your HTML files With Client Access it is easy to move files from your PC to a directory in the root or QDLS You can take advantage of the cool PC tools for maintaining HTML files On the other hand you can use SEU and create your files right on a green screen terminal It is not a lot of fun but it allows you to utilize data entry people that are familiar with editing file members e Flexibility is an issue if you want to transport your pages from one platform to another A typical situation is that your boss wants to load your Web pages on a lap top and show it off to people higher on the food chain If you keep file names to eight characters with three character extension
340. r using the Exit Program with the CHGWSGA DSPPGN NO command 4 Register your Exit Program by using the WRKREGINF EXITPNT QIBM_QTMT_WSG command Use option 8 to add your exit program 5 Start the Workstation Gateway server by using the STRTCPSVR SERVER WSG command 6 Open a URL in Web browser as http hostname 5061 WSG QAPPO100 xxxxx where xxxxx is any string that you want a user to type in so you can use your Exit Program for security checking m Note e Only one exit program can be registered for exit point QAPP0100 e If you get an exception error on the browser such as CEE9901 it might be worth checking the object authority for the exit program Use the WRKOBJ OBJ QUSRSYS command option 2 and change the PUBLIC user authority from USE to CHANGE e Also check the job log for the Workstation Gateway jobs using WRKACTJOB and look for user profile QTMTWSG under the QSYSWRK subsystem e When restarting the Workstation Gateway server allow several minutes for the stop and start process to take place Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 193 5 4 4 1 Sample Exit Program This sample exit program uses one of the input variables IP address of the remote host system from the HTML Gateway system program to check if a Web browser user has the right to use the HTML Gateway function You can find the source of this sample program in the QILECSRC source file in the ITSOIC400 library From Web browser open the UR
341. ram being executed The host name making the request The IP address of the host name making the request REMOTE_USER This is the user name making the request CONTENT_TYPE CONTENT_LENGTH IBM_CCSID_VALUE For queries that have attached information such as HTTP POST this is the content type of the data The length of data in the attached HTTP POST from the client The CCSID under which the current server job is running HTTP_ACCEPT MIME content types the browser accepts HTTP_USER_AGENT HTTP_REFERER String identifying the Web client Includes name and version of the browser request made through a proxy and other information Name of HTML document When the CGI program has finished executing it is expected to return an HTML document or a redirection to an HTML document 72 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet The CGI program passes output from other programs or databases plus any additional information back to the server To do that the CGI program uses the standard output data stream stdout 3 6 AS 400 Programming Languages Supported CGI programs are often called CGI scripts but you can develop your own CGI programs in many languages not only in scripting languages To select your programming language choose the one to use according to e The task your application has to perform Your programming skills There is support for CGI programs written in e C language
342. ransferring files between your client and OS 400 It also provides the ability to use long file names in mixed case using the Integrated File System You cannot access the QOpenSys file system when using Client Access 400 for Windows 2 14 3 3 Performance This technology preview does not include any Just in Time JIT or other optimizing compiler technology The performance characteristics are similar to other initial Java offerings based on the SUN JDK 1 0 2 Furthermore the JDK runs on top of OS 400 and is not integrated into the operating system Therefore it is expected that the performance of the Technology Preview release of Java for the AS 400 system will be slower than what is seen on comparable platforms with JIT compilers or other optimizing technology But as is always true when performance measurements are made your mileage may vary Performance is highly dependant on the application being run Read the Java for the AS 400 White Paper to learn more about planned performance improvements 2 14 3 4 White Paper Reference A white paper on Java for the AS 400 system is available that provides information on the future strategy and direction for Java on the AS 400 system Please see Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview on page 225 2 14 4 Using NetRexx to Create Java Applets This section discusses the support provide by NetRexx for creating Java Applets 2 14 4 1 What Is NetRexx IBM is actively in
343. rectory entries must start with META WEBULATOR Therefore the Webulator 400 root directory is always named META WEBULATOR If you want to add a new directory entry below the Webulator 400 root you can add an entry such as META WEBULATOR STATUS Note By creating additional directories you can have multiple URLs that have different characteristics such as which user is automatically signed on Check AS 400 Virtual Terminals Verify that the AS 400 system value QAUTOVRT is at a large enough number so that Webulator 400 can automatically create additional virtual terminal devices if needed Start your Web server Start either Web Server 400 or Commerce Server 400 It starts Webulator 400 during its startup process Note If your server is already started you can run the Set WWW Configuration Values SETWWWCFG command which reconfigures the server which in turn starts Webulator 400 Note that in the future when you Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet reconfigure Webulator 400 the new configuration values take effect for all new sessions only 5 6 1 2 Starting Webulator 400 The following steps help you determine if Webulator 400 has been configured properly for access Having started the server you must also be running a Web browser on a workstation connected to the AS 400 system using TCP IP 1 Access the Webulator 400 Root URL through http your system name Wb1AliasName where your
344. reen This sequence is done for every window that can be produced by that particular application which could be hundreds Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 23 At run time gateway code intercepts the 5250 data stream builds a hash from it and uses the hash to look up the associated GUI representation of that window This pre built GUI is sent to the client browser or Java applet If no index exists for this hash an on the fly representation of the 5250 screen is built This approach has the advantage of being faster at run time and provides a more complete and tailorable GUI representation than what can be done simply on the fly However it does require someone typically the application provider to go through each window ahead of time and build the associated data store If changes are made to the application or the DDS portions of the data store must be rebuilt Most likely a separate data store has to be built for each translatable version of the application There are definite advantages and disadvantages to each approach and you have to decide which you want to invest in 2 8 3 Telnet and Client Access Personal Communication Using a Telnet session is not really a programming model by it s own but might be acceptable for many customers to allow direct access to their applications from the Web However there is no security available today to preclude others from seeing entered USERIDs and passwords
345. rements taken on the AS 400 system do not include Web browser time they typically contribute 0 5 seconds to 2 seconds to response time A problem in any one of these areas may cause a significant performance problem for an end user To an end user it may seem apparent that any performance problem is attributed to the server even though the problem is elsewhere It is common for pages that are being served to have imbedded images gifs Each of these separate Internet transactions adds to the response time as they are serially retrieved from various servers Some browsers can concurrently retrieve two URLs 8 5 3 HTTP and TCP IP Configuration Tips 1 The number of HTTP server jobs CHGHTTPA command controls the minimum and maximum number of HTTP server jobs handling HTTP requests The reason for having multiple server jobs is that when one server is waiting for a disk or communications I O to complete a different server job can process another user s request Also for N way systems each CPU may simultaneously process server jobs The system adjusts the number of servers that are needed automatically within the bounds of the minimum and maximum parameters The smallest minimum allowed is two one parent and one child server Typically three to five servers are adequate for smaller systems 50 CPWs or less For larger systems more than 50 CPWs dedicated to HTTP serving increasing the number of servers to 10 or more may provide bett
346. ripting languages and fast enough for interactive applications it is slower than traditional languages whose source code is compiled directly into the machine code for a particular machine To improve performance Just In Time compilers JITs have been developed on many systems A JIT compiler runs concurrently with the JVM and determines which methods within the Java code are called most often These methods are compiled into machine code on the fly so that they do not need to be interpreted each time they are encountered within a program Static compilers are also being developed that compile the Java source code into machine code that is executed without interpretation This compilation is not done on the fly but is a separate step in the program development process And it is important to note that the machine code generated is not portable and does not execute on other platforms 7 5 2 Why Java for the AS 400 System There is a great deal of synergy between Java and the architecture of the AS 400 system Java is an object oriented programming language The AS 400 system and its predecessors have had an object based architecture from the very beginning The AS 400 system knows objects The Java Virtual Machine and the platform independence it provides are also well known concepts in the AS 400 world The AS 400 system is the only computer system today that allows applications to move from 48 bit to 64 bit architecture without any porting or mi
347. rkstation Gateway timing out 5 4 1 Existing Applications Display Files 182 Your existing display files need not be changed You can use all DDS specifications as you did before The DDS becomes when compiled a 5250 data stream This means that the DDS keywords such as DSPATR UL BLINK CHECK and so on are translated in a coded string of data In this data string each field is preceded by one or more attribute bytes This information makes a field such as a customer name underlined protected or blinking The AS 400 system or more precisely the Twinax workstation IOP input output processor sends out this generated 5250 data stream to your 5250 green screen The hardware of your display interprets this stream of data and produces a protected underlined or blinking field on your display This is how it works today With V3R2 and V3R7 the Workstation Gateway intercepts this 5250 data stream and converts it on the fly to an HTML data stream Let s look at an example to make it more comprehensive First we show you a simple DDS example of a display and how it looks on a 5250 workstation green screen Note This DDS example is not using any new techniques or HTML keywords on Columns 1 71 Edit ITSOIC400 DDSS SEU gt WSGDSP FMT DP AANOINO2NO3T Name RLen TDpBLinPosFunctionstt t t 0012 00 A R DSPR2 0013 00 A 2 34 ITSO Company 0014 00 A 3 25 Customer Comm
348. rm without the performance and maintenance overhead of two level store operating systems The AS 400 system is uniquely positioned to leverage Java as it evolves from its current Web focus to a full commercial application environment The strengths of the AS 400 system are combined with Java s object oriented network computing technology to provide solutions for the new millennium Java is the language of choice for programming in today s network computing environment It allows true portability of applications between platforms without modification or recompilation It is an open cross platform industry standard that is being supported by all of the major players in the computer industry today Java is available now for the AS 400 system And the best is yet to come 236 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 8 1 Internet Application Performance Overview This chapter gives you an overview of what is important to select the right system and model for the applications serving the Internet Also it gives some configuration recommendations to optimize and tune the system for optimal Performance 8 1 1 How Fast Can a Web Site Go You want to know how to design your Web site to get maximum speed And you are probably thinking in terms of how many hits per day your Web server can handle For example Our www askas400 com site needs to service 1 million hits per day Bu
349. rsonnel and human resource data and so on On the IntERnet however everything should be disallowed except information to be used by the public Under more restricted access users are allowed to see and modify specific data but always with the exposure of accidentally disclosing this information also to the public hackers The EXTRAnet can be viewed as a private net within the IntERnet or a private network using either dialup or leased lines with it s own security and encryption algorithms So data exchanged between businesses is pretty much safe However here it is much more important to have a mechanism in place to make sure that when you send something the addressee knows exactly who sent it and also keep a receipt for delivery to have proof of sending it 16 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 2 5 8 Internet Application Error Recovery Internet application error recovery is up to the application developer and the program itself Each programming model has different techniques to monitor and handle error messages and is described in more detail either in Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation on page 169 for Workstation Gateway Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation on page 111 for Net Data or Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation on page 57 for CGI Bin programming 2 6 Programming Alternatives On the AS 400 system there are several options available to support users on the In
350. rt the HTTP server for the changes to take effect Net Data reads the initialization file once during the initial invocation by an HTTP server job The configuration data is saved so that on subsequent Net Data invocations Net Data does not have to read the initialization file However if a change is made to the initialization file Net Data detects the change to the initialization file and reads the initialization file again Use the Create Source Physical File CRTSRCPF command to create the initialization INI file Since the text of configuration statements must all be Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet on one line it is a good idea to create the initialization file with a record length of 240 The file must be created in the library where the DB2WWW program object resides The file name must be 7INI The member name must be DB2WWW Use the Source Entry Utility SEU to add configuration statements to the file A sample initialization file is shown in the following figure The text of the environment statements must all be on one line These statements are shown on several lines in this example for readability a a MACRO_PATH WWW MACROS QSYS LIB WWWMACROS LIB MACROS FILE INCLUDE_PATH WWW INCLUDES EXEC_PATH QSYS LIB QSYS LIB WWWPGMS LIB ENVIRONMENT DTW_REXX QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHREXX SRVPGM ENVIRONMENT DTW_SQL QSYS LIB QTCP LIB QTMHSQL SRVPGM IN DATABASE LOGIN PASSWORD TRANSACTIO
351. s from the Internet the Internet merely provides a convenient means for access Copyright IBM Corp 1997 5 Internet Access A private AS 400 system accesses servers attached to the Internet for example AS 400 users FTP to Internet servers to obtain software fixes e Intranet A private AS 400 system is part of an internal corporate network that uses Internet based protocols Extranet Networks that extend beyond a single company to multiple organizations that must collaborate communicate and exchange documents to achieve joint goals These networks take a company s existing intranet and extend it beyond the enterprise to enable collaborative business applications such as electronic commerce and supply chain management or between one company and its customers and suppliers A given AS 400 system may take on multiple roles at the same time 2 3 Different Web Models Within each Net previously described there are four distinct and different ways to present or to interact with the Web user 2 3 1 Simple Web Model 6 The simple Web model consists of publishing static Web pages using the Hypertext Markup Language HTML The Web browser opens up a connection to the Web server and the server returns a page and closes the connection This model is suitable for providing access to business information that is relatively stable It originally provided the foundation for the Web Although later enriched by extensions to HT
352. s use relative path names for links and store the files in a directory structure under the Integrated File System root you can easily replicate the structure on a PC If you foresee any potential for needing to run your site in demo mode customer visits trade shows Mom and Dad come for a visit we highly recommend you consider the Integrated File System e Applications may also affect your decision For example if you have a CGI BIN application that interacts with an HTML page you may want to keep that page in the same library as the program This keeps the entire application in one place We use several library systems Most of our HTML files are in a directory structure under the Integrated File System root performance and file maintenance We keep all of our CGI BIN programs and related HTML files in a single library simplify moving things from our test system to the production server The following figure shows the complete Integrated File System structure Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 45 PC Clients L AS 400 Users Applications Integrated File System Root f File System A File System A Menus Commands Application Program Interface Integrated File System Interface n Via PC Server SN QOPT QOpenSys ile System QSYS LIB QDLS File System 4 File System QFileSvr File System QLANSrv File System d g SNNN VE es Ss SSS SS
353. s are used to conceal the actual name of a variable from people who choose to view your HTML source with their Web browser Type hidden defines an invisible input field whose value is sent along with the other form values when the form is submitted This is used to pass state information from one script or form to another Hidden Field INPUT TYPE HIDDEN An INPUT element with TYPE HIDDEN represents a hidden field The user does not interact with this field instead the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field The NAME and VALUE attributes are required Example lt input type hidden name context value 12k3j412k3j412k3j41k23 gt m IMPORTANT Hidden fields are not totally safe you can save and modify the HTML on the browser and resend the modified HTML back to the server which in fact prevails the hidden fields Reference on the Internet http members aol com htmlguru tips index html 2 5 6 National Characters Code Pages Date Format An Internet application that is supposed to give world wide support has to have support for national characters as well as the corresponding date formats date separators decimal position and decimal characters While in a native AS 400 application this support is given by OS 400 in the Internet environment it is up to the application and the browser Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 15 2 5 7 It is a good practice to store la
354. s because only programs in the QSYS LIB File system may be executed on the AS 400 system Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet The following figure shows the HTML output after the execution of the CGI BIN program Ordering an AS 400 a j Thanks for ordering an IBM System AS 400 Bolt Busch 22297 Hamburg IU eb erseering 24 Model Server 50 Support Line Service NO i Back Demo i WS R R R G G G Figure 21 The HTML Output Information Back on the Browser URL for CGI lt form action BonusCGl imvr501 PGM METHOD POST gt Program to execute QSYS LIB ITSOIC LIB imvr501 PGM Parameters passed to application Input parameters to imvr501 PGM will be via Figure 22 Mapping of CGI URL to HTTP Configuration Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 65 66 There are two methods that can be used to access your forms Depending on which method you use you receive the encoded results of the form in a different way The two methods are Method Description GET If your form in the HTML document has METHOD GET in its FORM tag your CGI program receives the encoded form input in the environment variable QUERY STRING POST If your form in the HTML document has METHOD POST in its FORM tag your CGI program receives the encoded form input on stdin The server does not send you an En
355. s eliminates the possibility of virus introduction or modification of programs performing the communications security functions The main processor and firewall communicate over an internal system bus that is not subject to sniffing programs or LANs The main processor can disable the firewall when tampering is detected regardless of the state of the firewall The firewall software is installed in the same manner as any other AS 400 software product There is no need to install and configure a separate machine and operating system as is typical with other firewalls Administration of the firewalls is performed by a Web browser on the internal secure network Secure sockets can be used to protect the administration session Authentication of the administrator is performed using the OS 400 security support so separate USERIDs or passwords are not required Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 7 1 4 AS 400 Firewall Technology Components e IP packet filtering for TCP UDP and ICMP e SOCKS server e Proxy server for HTTP HTTPS FTP and GOPHER for Web browsers Telnet proxy e Mail relay e Split Domain Name Server DNS e Logging e Real time monitoring More AS 400 Firewall Information For more information on AS 400 firewall technology http www as400 ibm com firewall 7 2 Internet Connection Secure Server 400 ICSS 400 With the IBM Internet Connection Secure Server business transactions can be sec
356. s information to allow the AS 400 system to route this display to the proper Workstation Gateway server This is because the AS 400 system must save state while using a protocol such as HTTP that does not save state For example the URL used to save state looks similar to http hostname 1384 WSG 057782 QTMTWSG QTWSG00950 Where 1384 The TCP IP allocated for the duration of this client session 057782 The AS 400 job number allocated to this client session QTWSG00950 The AS 400 job name allocated to this client session 2 Command Entry Figure 82 on page 180 shows the Command Entry display for the Netscape client Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 179 Command Entry Command Entry SYSTEMO2 Request level 4 Previous commands and messages No previous commands or messages Type command press Enter FS Exit F4 Prompt Fo Retrieve Fi0 Inelude detailed messages Fli Display full Fiz Cancel Fis Information issistant Fz4 More keys Figure 82 The Command Entry Display Seen by the Workstation Gateway 3 Work with Active Jobs Figure 83 on page 181 shows the Work with Active Jobs display for the Netscape client 180 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Work with Active Jobs Work with Active Jobsa SYSTEMO 02 21 97 16 05 5 0 Elapsed time 00 00 00 Active jobs 156 Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Hold 4 End S Work with b Release T Display message S Uork with spooled files 13 Disconn
357. s needed for GUI development The most recent release of Java is JDK 1 1 which contains the following additional packages e The java text which contains classes for internationalization that allow applets and applications to be localized to different national languages and conventions The java security which contains additional security features such as digital signatures that allow an applet to be signed by originator and cryptography so that information can be encrypted before traveling over the network The java rmi which allows objects to be distributed across the network and called using remote method invocations e The java beans which is a cross platform component model used to build applications using pluggable pieces The java sql which allows database access using a standard SQL interface called JDBC Java Database Connectivity Applications written using the JDK are portable Write once run anywhere has become the rallying cry of Java application programmers Java applications developed using the integrated development environment on one system can be deployed on a different system without having to change or recompile the code And Java is becoming widespread with Java Virtual Machines available or planned for every major hardware platform and operating system One of the down sides of the portable interpreted nature of Java is performance While the performance of interpreted Java code is better than sc
358. s of Communication for CGI Programs The HTML Source using the FORM Tag The HTML Document Using the FORM Tag Displayed by the Browser The HTML Output Information Back on the Browser Mapping of CGI URL to HTTP Configuration 2 2 2 AS 400 CGI Using the GET Method 0 AS 400 CGI using the POST Method 0 Two Named Input Fields Defined in the HTML Form CGI Programming with C Language using POST Method CGI Programming with RPG Language using POST Method QUSEC Data Structure for Error Reporting RPG Source Code 000 2c ee Getinput Subprocedure Sample 2 0 CGI Programming with REXX Language using POST Method REXX Source Code 0 000000022 The HTML Document using the FORM Tag with Method GET Document Returned from the Program CGIENVGET The HTML Document using the FORM Tag with Method POST Document Returned from the Program CGIENVPOST Welcome to the ITSO Company Example ILE RPG Program ORDAS400G Method GET ILE RPG Program ORDAS400P Method POST ILE C Program PARSECGIP Method POST Net Data Overview Net Data General Overview Net Data Macro Files Define Section of Web Macro Function Definition Section HTML Section Input Browser View of Input HTML HTML
359. s shows more than 20 configurable items relating to such things as Device capabilities Screen appearance Session limits Access methods e When using Webulator 400 with the IINET Commerce Server 400 secure transactions can be made e The the Netscape plugin for Webulator 400 provides correct keyboard mappings for 5250 sessions viewed from the browser For instance the F12 key now provides the Cancel function where appropriate This enhanced functionality is not available with Workstation Gateway 5 11 Further Information This section presents you with additional information about using Workstation Gateway from IBM and or Webulator 400 from I NET 5 11 1 Workstation Gateway 216 Workstation Gateway additional information 5 11 1 1 Support Pages on the Internet The support pages and FAQ for IBM s Workstation Gateway can be found at the following URL http www as400 ibm com ncc webconn html gate htm This is a good site especially for late breaking news and PTF information about the Workstation Gateway and is supported by the AS 400 team Another avenue for retrieving up to date news is Information APARs At the time this document was printed 5763 TC1 Information APAR 1109450 contains the latest information APARs can be found at the following URL http as400service rochester ibm com 5 11 1 2 Code Snippets As described elsewhere in this redbook many business can use and are using the
360. scriptions through this mechanism Troubleshooting There are several steps to configure and install the plugin and if any are not correct it will not work Fortunately once you have the plugin correctly installed for a given browser you should not need to worry about it in the future Possible problems might be e The browser does not show the plugin in Help About menu Make sure you completely shut down the browser and restart it If you leave even one browser window open it does not recognize the plugin Make sure you have the correct version of the DLL If you are using a 16 bit browser you must have the plugin for Windows 3 x If you are using a 32 bit browser you must have the plugin for Windows 95 NT Check to see if your browser is on the list of supported browsers Because this plugin is platform specific it does not work with all browsers Make sure you copied the DLL file into the proper directory Problems have been seen with Netscape Navigator 2 0 recognizing any plugin when installed on a network drive in this case install the browser to a local drive e The browser says Plugin Not Loaded The browser may not be able to find the PLUGIN WKY file Make sure it is in the document root and that it is available to the browser You can check the access log to see if the server was able to successfully send it Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 203 The content type may not have been
361. se file 1 COMPILE THIS SOURCE MEMBER AS MODULE CUSTINQRP PDM OPTION 15 2 CREATE PROGRAM CUSTINQRP FROM MODULE CUSTINQRP PDM OPTION 26 WITH PROMPT PF4 AND BNDSRVPGM QTCP QTMHCGI Refer to the TCP IP Configuration manual for API Parms gt sf fee i DU i I E E E e i e e i de e i se e de e e e i e e kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DEFINE YOUR FILES HERE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk FCUSTPF UF A E DISK USROPN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DS contains the name of the file and library used by the CVTDB API kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk dDBFILE DS d 10 inz CUSTPF d 10 inz WEBDB kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Buffer used to convert the string data into fields sa kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DDBBuff E DS EXTNAME CUSTPF Copyright IBM Corp 1997 251 EE DA eee E SE PO ERO SERE eee RELA SE PRO PEER kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Standalone Fields Used for PARMS and work fields in the Program kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DINBuff S 2048 DINBuffLn S 9B 0 DINActLn S 9B 0 DDBRecLn S 9B 0 DDBCvtLn S 9B 0 DRspCode S 9B 0 DOutLn S 9B 0 DCmdLen S 15P 5 DEMAILM c We
362. se on the Web designing your pages accordingly limits the audience you can reach with the information you want to present A wide array of Web browsers is available for just about every platform you can imagine including graphical user interface based systems Mac Windows X11 and text only for UNIX dial up UNIX connections Most browsers are freeware or shareware try before you buy or the same as Netscape have a lenient licensing policy Netscape allows you to use its browser for personal use for an evaluation time after which you are expected to buy it Usually all you have to do is download them from the net If you get your Internet connection through a commercial online service such as America Online or CompuServe there are usually Web browsers built into the software for that system as well Although we urge the application programmer to consider the differences of browsers we advise the programmers to design their applications to be independent from browsers as much as possible That means stay away from specific functions available only on some browsers although they might have real nice functions 2 12 ILE Integrated Language Environment Programming Considerations This section concentrates on aspects of the ILE architecture that must be addressed from a design perspective The contents should be read by anyone involved in either designing migrations from Original Program Model OPM to ILE or designing new ILE applicati
363. select products order and submit payment online letting you focus on managing your business strategy Web pages for a shopping cart registration form and order forms are supplied for your shoppers to use and can be customized to create a unique look and feel for your store The supplied APIs suit many business applications but they can also be tailored to your needs You can even write your own APIs for additional or unique requirements And you can use them to incorporate such external business applications as tax calculation and inventory management systems into the online store you build with Net Commerce Net Commerce helps shoppers browse also With the catalog building function you define the categories or departments through which shoppers navigate to reach products and you can lead shoppers to the same product through several navigation routes to maximize its exposure Products can have different prices for promotions sales or shopper groups You define the conditions whereby these prices are valid and they are applied automatically Net Commerce is a market leader in online shipping You decide how your products are shipped and how to offer valued choices to consumers You can Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview 229 use as many shipping carriers as you want and calculate shipping charges in ways that suit your product line such as by weight dollar value or quantity 7 4 5 Help Manage Your Store The Net Comm
364. single entity End users perceive information applications and services as being provided by the network rather than by a computer system IBM is committed to Network Computing on the AS 400 system a system that has the advantages of an integrated database integrated security and an object based structure The AS 400 users can utilize the latest technology reduce or eliminate many geographic barriers exploit the Internet to their companies and enable new ways of doing business Internet Connection for AS 400 which is an integrated package included with 05 400 helps customers conduct business on the Internet It includes Chapter 1 AS 400 System in Network Computing Environment 3 e World Wide Web Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP server e Workstation Gateway WSG server e Net Data Logging of World Wide Web server access TCP IP has also been enhanced to provide e FTP support across all of the Integrated File System IFS e FTP authentication exits points Anonymous FTP e Asynchronous communications support in the form of SLIP Reference URL http www as400 ibm com 1 4 Why Attach an AS 400 System to the Internet Why not If you are seriously considering putting a server onto the Internet there are many distinct advantages in choosing an AS 400 system If you have concerns about using an AS 400 system in this role ask yourself whether the reason for your concern such as security is associated with
365. step compile and bind to create a program Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet The Create Service Program CRTSRVPGM is used to bind modules into a service program object As previously stated you cannot directly run a service program you can only indirectly run procedures in a service program through bound calls from the PGM object that was created with references to the service program 2 Restricted ILE compile and bind commands The Create Bound Program commands CRTBNDRPG and CRTBNDCL provide access to some but not all of the ILE facilities Thus these commands are designed to be simple to use and consequently do not provide the flexibility of the full function ILE commands Use of these commands enables you to take advantage of RPG IV If you elect to run in OPM compatibility mode you cannot use the call bound CALLB operation code the compile part of the process fails with the following message RNV5378 severity 30 CALLB cannot be used when DFTACTGRP YES is specified for CRTBNDRPG If you specify DFTACTGRP YES your program is only run in the default activation group hence you are unable to take full advantage of ILE named activation groups and resource scoping 2 12 3 OPM Compatibility Mode Compatibility mode is an ILE program attribute that when enabled makes an ILE program behave in a manner compatible with OPM program behavior This facility is available for the ILE RPG 400 and ILE CL programming lang
366. system name Your AS 400 system s TCP IP host name or IP address WbIAliasName Is an alias whose SRCTYPE is WEBULATOR Note You can view all of your current aliases by running the WRKWWWALS command Example Assume that your HOSTNAME is www xyz com and your Webulator alias name is WWW5250 The name of your Webulator 400 root URL is http ww xyz com WWW5250 If you added additional Webulator 400 directory entries using the WRKWWWDIR command you should try to access their URLs also Note To determine how to access child URLs you must look at the names of your directory entries Since all Webulator 400 directory entries must start with the Webulator 400 root directory name of META WEBULATOR you can ignore all entries that do not meet this criteria m Example Assume that you have the following Webulator 400 directory entries META WEBULATOR META WEBULATOR STATUS The first entry is the Webulator 400 root directory and the second directory is a child below the root directory To determine the name of the URL to access this child directory you need to strip off the Webulator 400 root component from the directory name This leaves us with the name of the child directory entry STATUS You must append the name of the child directory entry to the URL of the Webulator 400 root to get the correct URL for the child directory entry Assuming that the root directory URL is http www xyz com WwwW5250 the U
367. t List Option lt OPTION gt No closing tag Indicate one choice ina Select menu Paragraph lt P gt lt P gt optional Define a paragraph Table 1 Page 3 of 3 HTML Main Elements Name Opening tag Closing tag Description Pre formatted lt PRE gt lt PRE gt Enclose pre formatted text text Sample lt SAMP gt lt SAMP gt Indicate sample text Select lt SELECT gt lt SELECT gt Define a set of selectable options Strong lt STRONG gt lt STRONG gt Strongly emphasize text Emphasis Title lt TITLE gt lt TITLE gt Define document s title Typetype lt TT gt lt TT gt Display enclosed text in monospaced font Textarea lt TEXTAREA gt lt TEXTAREA gt Enclose a text area Underlined lt U gt lt U gt Underline text unsupported by Mosaic Unordered lt UL gt lt UL gt Enclose an unordered List list Variable lt VAR gt lt VAR gt Indicate a variable HTML tags are case insensitive Every command is interpreted by the browsers independently of the capitalization The tag lt FORM gt for example can either be written lt Form gt or lt form gt or lt fORm gt without making any difference m Note This If you want to know more about the Hypertext Makeup Language HTML there is a lot of information available on the Internet There are also a lot of publications available One of them is the redbook Using the Information Super Highway GG24 2499
368. t 1 of 5 ILE RPG Program ORDAS400G Method GET Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementation 103 104 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Data structure for error reporting Copied from QSYSINC QRPGLESRC QUSEC DQUSEC DS D Qus EC D QUSBPRV 1 4B 0 INZ 16 D Bytes Provided D QUSBAVL 5 8B 0 DE Bytes Available D QUSEI 9 15 D Exception Id D QUSERVED 16 16 D Reserved D QUSEDO1 17 116 D D Varying length kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Constants for names of CGI APIs DAPIStdIn G QtmhRdStin DAPIStdOut Cc QtmhWrStout DAPICvtDB QtmhCvtDb DAPIEnVar QtmhGetEnv Compile time array for OVRDBF DOVRDBF S 80 DIM 2 PERRCD 1 CTDATA DOVRARR S 1 DIM 80 D K K k e k ke e ke He K ke k ke e K ke e k e Ke ke e K ke K k ke K ER KER KR ERK ERR ke k K K k k K k K k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k kk k D Define NewLine DNewLine E x 15 DERAAAAAKAAKK ERK EKER ERK ER ERE RRR ERK ERK REE R KERR ERE KERR EKER ERR EERE RR k k kk k k kkk k D Define break DBreak Cc lt BR gt Figure 38 Part 2 of 5 ILE RPG Program ORDAS400G Method GET Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Get the Environment Variable called QUERY_STRING Set the ENVarName to QUERY_STRING You must count the length of the Var Name
369. t reduces any escape messages resulting from CGI program failures to diagnostic messages 3 7 Decoding the Parameters from the Remote Web Client 74 You now know that depending on the HTML form s method which can be either POST or GET the input string to your application is made available to your CGI application running on the AS 400 system in either standard in or the QUERY_STRING environment variable If your application is in ILE C 400 you have native I O statements to code to retrieve the parameter string If your application is in ILE COBOL 400 or ILE RPG 400 IBM provides a service program to do the job of reading the parameter string and placing it in a local program variable What we have not covered is how this parameter string looks and what exactly you must do to parse it into something that you can use in your application How to parse the string is dependant upon if you are writing your CGI application Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet in C 400 see Section 3 8 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE C 400 on page 77 or in either RPG 400 or COBOL 400 see Section 3 9 2 CGI Parameter Parsing with ILE COBOL 400 or RPG 400 on page 86 But first let s spend a little bit of time to understand the basic syntax of the parameter string that we receive from a Web client 3 7 1 CGI Parameter String Syntax When you write the HTML form each of your input items has a NAME tag associated with it As an ex
370. t wait If you base your choices only on how many hits your Web server can serve per day you may end up buying less equipment than you need 8 1 2 How Many Connections per Second is Enough A hit and a connection are the same thing Throughout our information we use the maximum connections per second as a gauge but how many seconds are in a day 24 hours 60 minutes per hour 60 seconds per minute 86 400 seconds 1 million hits per day 1 000 000 86 400 11 6 connections per second But are the requests to your site evenly distributed over 24 hours every day In reality most Web sites have peaks and valleys in the rate of requests When doing capacity planning you need to concentrate on planning for the peaks Otherwise you over estimate the maximum capacity of your Web site Copyright IBM Corp 1997 237 150 E 100 e oO Q dn la D Q D d e E 8 50 0 Figure 96 60 in 4hrs annann 90 in 8hrs wer Ge ee 80 in 8hrs 1000 fi 000 100 in 12hrs seno Piero 100 in 24hrs noia 1 15 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 6 0 65 Millions of hits per day Distribution of Connections This graph shows the importance of understanding the peaks in your Web request rate To read the chart first find the line that most closely matches your Web site Do 60 of your requests occur in only four hours of a day for example from 6PM to 10PM Eastern Standard Time Do 90 of your requests occur in eight hours
371. tBuff OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff c TYPE ifeq PI c OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff c OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff c 10 CHAIN HTMLOUT 98 G OutBuff CAT SRCDTA 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff c endif TYPE ifeq P2 Cc OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff c 11 CHAIN HTMLOUT 98 Cc OutBuff CAT SRCDTA 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff c endif c TYPE ifeq P3 OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff 12 CHAIN HTMLOUT 98 C OutBuff CAT SRCDTA 0 OutBuff C OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff Cc endif Cc OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff Cc OutBuff CAT Break 0 OutBuff SERV ifeq aT c 13 CHAIN HTMLOUT 98 c OutBuff CAT SRCDTA 0 OutBuff OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff C else c 14 CHAIN HTMLOUT 98 G OutBuff CAT SRCDTA 0 OutBuff c OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff c endif c endif C ENDDO C MOVE OFF IN98 c 15 setl htmlout C IN98 DOWEQ OFF C read htmlout 98 c IN98 CABEQ ON EndHTM Cc OutBuff cat SRCDTA 0 OutBuff c OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 OutBuff EndHTM TAG End variable OUTPUT C ENDDO Figure 38 Part 4 of 5 ILE RPG Program ORDAS400G Method GET 106 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Read HTMLFILE until EOF c MOVE OFF c IN99 DOWEQ OFF c READ HTMLREC c ENDDO Send OutBuff to standard output c OutBuff CAT NewLine 0 c der CHECKR OutBuff c EXSR STDOUT End program c CLOSE HTMLO c MOVEA OVRDBF 2 c MOVEA OVRARR
372. ta Macro Files 114 4 2 1 Define Section 117 4 2 2 Function Definition Section 118 4 2 3 HTML INPUT Section 119 4 2 4 HTML OUTPUT Section 121 4 3 Generating HTML in a Web Macro 122 4 3 1 HTML Blocks 122 4 4 Web Macro Functions 124 4 4 1 Define Functions ii i ee ee eR ee ee ed 124 4 4 2 Calling Functions sii A ae dla ee de eH eS 125 4 4 3 Net Data Built In Functions 0 129 4 4 4 Table Variables 2 002020 2 ee es 131 4 4 5 Implicitly Defined Variables 0 132 4 5 Report Blocks 2 224 edo eh ee a ee ae eee 134 4 571 Message BIOGKS inicr eo bc Se ee Me eee de eee elle bo HY 136 4 6 Language Environments 2 0 0 00 0 pee ee 139 4 6 1 REXX DTW_REXX Language Environment 139 4 6 2 SQL DTW_SQL or SQL Language Environment 141 4 6 3 SYSTEM DTW_SYSTEM Language Environment 144 4 7 Net Data Advanced Macro Language Examples 145 4 7 1 Multiple HTML Sections 146 4 7 2 Using Include Files 146 4 7 3 Conditional Logic 147 4 7 4 Maintaining State using HTML Hidden Variables 147 4 7 5 Net Data Hidden Variables 0 0 150 4 7 6 Net Data Predefined Variables 151 4 7 7 Net Data Environment Variables 152 4 7 8 Net Data Default Report 153 4 8 Additional Tips 154 4 8 1 Net Data Error Messages 156 4 9 Getting Net Data Up and
373. te a EOF file The browser needs to know when finish the output Fe e ke Ae e He e he e he He KERR ER ERE RE RE ERR REE RERERERERRERERE if wordpos FLUSH translate options gt 0 then do Calls the QtmhWrSout API e e e e e e e e e e He e e e e e e e Ke He ke Ke eke e e CALL PGM STDOUT PARM amp g 1stdout amp g 1stdout1 g 1stdout g 1stdout1 0 if dataln 0 then return end If no newline charapter appends at the end of the line Fe e ke Ae e ke e KER EKER ER ER ERE RE RE RRR ERE RRR ER ERE EERE REREREREREERE if right data 1 lt gt g 1newline then data data g 1newline dataln length data if dataln g 1stdout gt g lmaxparmlength then do Calls the QtmhWrSout API KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKRKKKRAA CALL PGM STDOUT PARM amp g 1stdout amp g 1stdout1 g lstdout data g lstdoutl dataln end else do g lstdout g 1stdout data g lstdout g 1lstdout l dataln end end return This program takes parameters and calls the API to write them in standard stdout 98 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet copy qsysinc qrpglesrc qusec Variables for QtmhWrStout DOutBuffLn S 10i 0 Variables for entry parameter list Note 9999 is maximum size of C DOutbuff S 9999 DOutBuffPk S 15P 5 Dnewline C x15 Mainline calculations C entry plist C parm outbuff C OutBuffln parm outbuffPk C eval qusbprv 16 Standard output subroutine C ca
374. ted Web Model An additional application model that IBM intends to support is called the Enterprise Distributed Web model Enterprise Distributed Web applications are true open client server applications The client is coded in downloadable Java which runs in any Java capable browser A page containing the Java applet is downloaded by a Web server to a browser While the applet runs in the browser it opens its own communications session to the server The applet also communicates with a server to provide access to the database C Java application servers or SOM objects in addition to supporting a variety of middleware include HTTP TCP IP Secure Sockets Layer SSL DSOM and MQ Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 9 Open Connection Request Page Send Page w Java Code sf ____ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Send Request w parameters JAVA i Open Communications with a server a PT O 1 Virtual Machine VM Figure 5 The Enterprise Distributed Web Model 2 4 AS 400 System Facilities for the Internet This section gives an overview of the Internet related services on the AS 400 system 2 4 1 Database Services The AS 400 database is accessible to Internet users through CGI programs and the Net Data product Net Data uses a modified type of HTML file called a macro that includes HTML script as well as directives that allow dynamic documents to be built These direc
375. ted on future releases INCLUDE_URL statement It ignores this statement if it encounters it Live connectivity using Common Gateway Interface thread management However connections to databases are kept persistent across URL invocations so that there is no performance degradation when accessing remote databases Application programming interface support for the IBM Internet Connection servers ICS NetScape servers NS and Microsoft s Internet Information server IIS Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 155 4 8 1 Net Data Error Messages Net Data returns the following messages to alert you when a problem is found 156 Return Code Message Text Error Condition 1002 1001 1000 function function_name Unable to allocate memory function function_name Internal code code function function_name Function not found The server could not process a request for storage from Net Data A call to an internal function failed This is a Net Data internal error Report the problem to your software service representative The function requested on a function call is not a supported Net Data built in function 1001 function function_name Parameter parm_name contains a null value An input parameter contained a NULL value This may occur if the parameter passed on the function call has not been previously defined in the Web macro 1002 1003
376. tered during WSG V3R2 installation JE Restrictions i None ha Messages ha None ef JE Side Effects i if None va Functions Macros called LE TRACE Write one data record to test results file Input chat argv 1 Operation specific information int argv 2 Length of operation specific information char argv 3 IP address of the remote host system int argv 4 CCSID of the operation specific info char argv 5 Allow operation 0 No 1 Yes output char argv 6 User profile to be used output char argv 7 Password to be used output char argv 8 Program library to be used output char argv 9 Program name to be used output char argv 10 Menu panel to be used output Exit Normal Return AllowOper value to server application 15 X Exit Error None JE End Function Specification Kk k k k k kk k k k kkk ERE KER ERE EKER ERE EREREREERE void main int argc char argv exitpgm argv 1 int argv 2 argv 3 int argv 4 argv 5 argv 6 argv 7 argv 8 argv 9 argv 10 return End main Figure 102 Part 3 of 7 Sample Exit Program for HTML Gateway Appendix B HTML Gateway Code Examples 267 Function Specification Feke k e ke He e e ke e e e e e AREER
377. ternet The AS 400 system offers some alternatives to enable applications to the Internet One does not require any change to the application itself it only has to be enabled at the server side Users can use AS 400 applications on the Internet intranet as they are used to using natively on a terminal The function on the AS 400 system is called HTML Workstation Gateway and is part of OS 400 Another method is to provide an easy access to the data in the database and allow queries to be executed or call programs that access the database and return the requested data The following diagram shows the different ways to support users on the Internet One might to decide to take one function only some others might want to combine two or even all available approaches Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 17 Internet planned Application Design The simple Web Interactive Web Distributed Web Enterprise dynamic very dynamic Distributed Web static JAVA Applats Scripts Web Client AS 400 Serve Wo CGI Bin Programs TCPIP Socket JAVA applications Workstation Gateway ie RO Legacy Applications RPG COBOL C CL Legacy dia amp Sr eee lt q gi DB2 400 DB2 400 DB2 400 Figure 6 Internet Application Design Overview DB2 400 DB2 400 Depending of what you want to get accomplished you can choose either one or a combination of the following options e CGI Common Gatew
378. test suites perlsrc savf 4 3MB A precompiled per executable with the PERL libraries and test suites perlpgm savf 4 9MB A precompiled per executable with the PERL libraries and test suites perlrisc savf for RISC systems 9MB These files are available at CPAN sites in the directory ports as400 Please see the installation notes and the readme which is included in the save file for complete unpacking and installation instructions and any known problems and limitations Note This is public domain software Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 51 IBM does not provide service and support for running PERL scripts on the AS 400 system Do not call the IBM support line for assistance Comments and questions should be directed to comp lang perl misc or comp sys ibm as400 misc newsgroups Note For more information about PERL see http perl com perl 2 14 6 Using VisualAge for Java to Create Applets and Applications 52 The VisualAge family of software application development tools allows developers to construct applications visually by connecting prefabricated reusable software components from an expansive library of predefined classes and parts from IBM and other vendors IBM s unique visual construction from parts technology will be extended to the Java programming environment enabling developers to visually build Java applets The new IBM Java tools will extend V
379. th ILE RPG 400 and ILE COBOL 400 on page 82 Returning Variables to Net Data Currently it is not possible to return environment variables to Net Data from RPG or COBOL One solution for this is to call a C program to return the environment variables to Net Data A new API QtmhPutEnv is planned for V4R1 and will allow RPG or COBOL programs to return varibles to Net Data This is the listing of the RPG program that we call from the Net Data macro This simple program uses the API QtmhGetEnv to read the input from the browser We add a little constant text to the output buffer and use the API QtmhWrStout to return the modified string to the browser Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 0001 00 Data structure for error reporting Copied from QSYSINC QRPGLESRC QUSEC 0002 00 deol c x15 0003 00 dtxt c Text added to the buffer 0004 00 DQUSEC DS 0005 00 D Qus EC 0006 00 D QUSBPRV 1 4B 0 INZ 16 0007 00 D Bytes Provided 0008 00 D QUSBAVL 5 8B 0 0009 00 D Bytes Available 0010 00 D QUSEI 9 15 0011 00 D Exception Id 0012 00 D QUSERVED 16 16 0013 00 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0014 00 These are for the APIEnVar 0015 00 DENBuff S 1024A INZ Return area for API 0016 00 DENBuffLn S 9B 0 INZ 1024 Ln of return area 0017 00 DENActLn S 9B 0 INZ Act Ln of ret data 0018 00 DENVarName S 64A INZ Name of Env Var 0019 00 DENVarLn S 9b 0 I
380. the AS 400 A White Paper Java is a hot new programming language designed for today s networked world This white paper discusses what Java is and why it is a key piece of the application development strategy for the AS 400 system Read on to find out about Java on the AS 400 system today and where it is going in the future 7 5 1 Java Overview Java is an object oriented programming language developed by Sun Microsystems It was originally designed for programming consumer electronics The language was designed to be architecture neutral so that it could run on the different computer chips used in the various consumer electronic devices But Sun soon realized that the language had potential to do much more The architecture neutral aspect of Java makes it ideal for programming on the Internet It allows a user to receive software from a remote system and execute it on a local system regardless of the underlying hardware or operating system Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview 231 232 This is possible because of the interpreted nature of the language and the Java Virtual Machine Traditionally the source code of a program is written in the programming language of choice and compiled into the machine code understood by a particular set of computer hardware The Java compiler however does not generate machine code Instead it generates intermediate code called Java bytecodes These bytecodes are interpreted by
381. the Internet itself rather than a specific system 4 Consider the advantages of using an AS 400 system Communications An AS 400 system has exceptional communication Scaleability Functionality Software cost Training Security Legacy Data capabilities LAN WAN and dial up capability are all part and parcel of OS 400 providing a choice of connection methods using TCP IP The common features present in OS 400 across the entire model range make it easy to accommodate future growth The AS 400 system provides the popular TCP IP applications such as Telnet FTP e mail WWW server and so on Almost all the AS 400 TCP IP suite of applications comes free of charge when you order OS 400 If you are already running an AS 400 operation the training required to attach your AS 400 system successfully to the Internet is minimal The AS 400 system has extremely good native security features These features alone can prevent many Internet related security problems that afflict other systems With user exit programs you can further enhance the security for FTP and Workstation Gateway servers Perhaps the main reason to consider an AS 400 system as an Internet server is when the information you want to serve is already resident on an AS 400 system The new Internet Connection for AS 400 applications provide several methods of accessing your legacy data through the Internet By using the Workstation Gateway server most of y
382. the Java interpreter which executes the instructions on the particular hardware platform The Java interpreter and run time system are collectively called the Java Virtual Machine or JVM The bytecodes are what make Java programs portable A program written in Java is compiled into bytecodes These bytecodes can be transported across a network and executed on any system that implements a Java Virtual Machine An applet is a small Java program designed to be included in an HTML Web document The HTML document contains tags that specify the name of the Java applet and its Uniform Resource Locator URL The URL is the location at which the applet bytecodes reside on the Internet When an HTML document containing a Java applet tag is displayed a Java enabled Web browser downloads the Java bytecodes from the Internet and uses the JVM to execute the code from within the Web document These Java applets are what enable Web pages to contain animated graphics or interactive content Because Java applets can be downloaded from any system security mechanisms exist within the JVM to protect against malicious applets The Java run time system verifies the bytecodes as they are downloaded from the network to ensure they are valid bytecodes and that the code does not violate any of the restrictions placed on Java applets by the JVM Java applets are restricted in which operations they can perform how they access memory and how they use the JVM The restricti
383. the URL has portions encoded with escape sequences It is cumbersome for CGI programs to decode these sequences after they have been converted from ASCII to EBCDIC It is difficult for the CGI programs to determine and control what CCSIDs to use when handling ASCII and EBCDIC data e Multiple conversions from ASCII to EBCDIC of input and output data presents some performance problems The basic idea of the CGI is illustrated in Figure 17 HTML form sent to browser which Includes action URL Browser requests a URL from the 2 server passing parameters filled Browser In from the form Server AS 400 Server passes Information g back to browser ed EACH n The Common Gateway Program program server executes the passes output from other program and passed parameters programs plus any additional from form elther by POST or Browser formats and Informatlon back to server ET method displays the Information It recelves E Common Gateway Program program operates calling Other other programs If necessary programs dabatases Figure 17 The Basic Idea of How the CGI is Working 1 An HTML form is sent from the server to the Web client Along with the form is an action URL that points back to the CGl bin program located someplace on the network 2 The browser is sending a request for a URL Uniform Resource Locator resource from the server This URL contains the name and path of the CGl bin application along wit
384. the information provided here along with the characterization of your Workstation Gateway workload environment in a capacity planning exercise perhaps with BEST 1 Server models may not be the best choice for Workstation Gateway environments The user job is labeled as an interactive job while the other tasks involved Workstation Gateway servers and communications tasks all are tagged non interactive For a typical commercial transaction with Workstation Gateway the interactive portion of the transaction is about 20 of the total transaction s CPU time To avoid decreasing the effectiveness of your server model when using Workstation Gateway it is recommended that you keep the interactive portion of your overall CPU utilization below the threshold at where the efficiency drops off e Do not do heavy applications through Workstation Gateway e Limit Workstation Gateway to casual use low number of Workstation Gateway transactions Otherwise use traditional non server AS 400 models 8 8 Net Data Performance Hints and Tips m Reference For more detailed performance information and tips and techniques to improve performance see Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation on page 111 8 9 CGI Bin Performance Hints and Tips Reference For more detailed performance information and tips and techniques to improve performance see Chapter 3 Common Gateway Interface CGI BIN Implementa
385. the page from cache even if the posted data is the same Here the request is always submitted to the server in contrast to pages retrieved with a GET method 2 5 2 6 Caching Control It is possible for the server to request no caching for a page Here the field expires which is set to 0 in the HTTP header and prevents caching It is also possible to request no caching for an HTML document by using lt meta http equiv expires content 0 gt in the header part of the HTML document 2 5 3 End User Driven Also different is the way the application is being driven On the Internet the end user determines the flow of the application This is similar to a client server application with a GUI front end where the user picks and chooses icons and menu items not controlled by the application The user might decide to request some data from one server request different data from the same server data from different servers and finally after hours fills the first window and returns it to the first server To always have complete transactions the server application has to send a simple complete transaction on one request or has to keep track of each user s status Most AS 400 applications today presume that the calling user stays with the application until it finishes it Most of the transactions span several windows before a customer transaction is complete 2 5 4 End User Anonymous On the Internet or intranet for that matter e
386. the path statements into one path statement and insert the combined path statement in the initialization file in the library where the DB2WWW program object resides Once Net Data is serving Web macros you should delete all the DB2 WWW Version 1 initialization files that are not being used 4 11 Debug HTTP Server Setup for Net Data 166 For the following problems assume that the Net Data CGI BIN program object DB2WWW has been moved to a library named WWWCGI where your CGI BIN programs reside m SYMPTOM Error 500 text of message follows Bad script request QSYS LIB WWWCGI LIB DB2WWW PGM QSYS LIB not executable CAUSE Incorrect Exec rule Exec QSYS LIB WWWCGI LIB DB2WWW PGM Exec qsys 1ib wwwcgi 1ib db2www pgm SOLUTION Specify an Exec rule that only supplies the path to the DB2WWW program For example Exec QSYS LIB WWWCGI LIB Exec qsys lib wwcgi lib m SYMPTOM Error 404 Text of message follows Not found file doesn t exist or is read protected even tried multi Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet CAUSE There is an Exec rule missing SOLUTION Specify an Exec rule that supplies the path to the DB2WWW program in both upper and lower case For example Exec QSYS LIB WWWCGI LIB Exec qsys lib wwcgi lib m SYMPTOM Error 403 Text of message follows Forbidden by rule CAUSE A Map or Exec rule is missing or incorrect SOLUTION Specify a Map and Ex
387. ther language environments You cannot refer to these section of the Web macro Table 12 Page 1 of 2 Net Data REPORT Block N1 Np N_column name Implicit REPORT Variables Where pis the column number These variables contain the column names Where column name is the value of one of the Np variables If it exists this variable has the value co umn name NLIST This LIST variable is created by concatenating all of the individual column names Np The default separator for the list variable is a space character but this can be changed by specifying it on a LIST define such as define LIST 7 NLIST Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Table 12 Page 2 of 2 Net Data REPORT Block Implicit REPORT Variables V1 Vp Where p is the column number This variable contains the value of the pth column in the current row These variables are only valid in a ROW block of a REPORT block and are set to new values as each row is printed V_column name VLIST ROW_NUM Where column name is the value of one of the Np variables This variable contains the value of the field in the current row whose column name is column_name These variables are only valid in a ROW block of a REPORT block and are set to new values as each row is printed This LIST variable is created by concatenating all of the individual field values Vp in the current row The default separator for
388. this list variable is a space character but this can be changed by specifying it on a LIST define These variables are only valid in a ROW block of a REPORT block and are set to new values as each row is printed This is most useful for creating tables in HTML 3 0 Contains the row number of the current row After the ROW block has been processed ROW_NUM contains the total number of rows in the table This variable is only valid in a ROW block of a REPORT block and is set to a new value as each row is printed NUM_COLUMNS Contains the number of columns in the table TOTAL_ROWS Contains the number of rows in the table The following variables can be used in a REXX program called by a function call to a REXX FUNCTION block Table 13 Net Data REXX Language Environment Variables Implicit REXX Language Environment Variables T_ROWS Where Tis the table name This variable contains the current number of rows in the table T_COLS Where T is the table name This variable contains the current number of columns in the table T_N p T is the table name and p is the column number This variable contains the name of the pth column T_V i p Tis the table name iis the row number and p is the column number This variable contains the value of the pth column of the ith row in the table You can use the following variables in programs invoked by a function call to a SYSTEM FUNCTION block These table variab
389. tion on page 57 Chapter 8 Internet Application Performance 249 8 10 Workstation Gateway Hints and Tips m Reference For more detailed performance information and tips and techniques to improve performance see Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation on page 169 250 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Appendix A ILE RPG and ILE COBOL Sample CGI Programs Disclamer The source code for the Cobol and RPG program are included for reference A 1 ILE RPG Sample CGI Program CUSTINFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Program Prompt user for mailing info and response Language ILE RPG Description This program is used to process an HTML Form as input and add a record to a database It is a SAMPLE program APIs Used QtmhRdStin Read from Standard Input This API is used to read the input Data from the user QtmhCvtDb Convert to DB This API takes the Stdin input and converts it into a group data structure that can be processed by an RPG pgm The field names in the DDS must match the names in the HTML Form QtmhWrStout Write to Standard Output This API writes the output to the user The Output Must be in the correct HTML format and it MUST have a MIME Header QCMDEXC Execute a CL Command from within a High Level Langauge Program Used to Override the output databa
390. tives can be SQL statements program invocations include statements and variable substitutions Local and remote AS 400 databases can be accessed from a Net Data macro For more information refer to the Net Data description in Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation on page 111 2 4 2 Application Access Existing legacy applications can be accessed using the 5250 Workstation Gateway function New internet applications can be written using HTTP server APIs the CGI interface or using the Net Data product HTTP server API programs can be written in the C programming language CGI programs can be written in C RPG 10 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet and COBOL programming languages Net Data applications are written in a macro language that can reference AS 400 resources including the database and programs written in a variety of AS 400 languages C C COBOL RPG COBOL REXX and PERL All of these functions are available as part of OS 400 Lotus Domino is another way of serving up Internet applications Domino allows applications to be built using the rich application development capabilities of Lotus Notes Domino allows existing Notes applications to be served up over the Web PERL has been ported to the AS 400 system by Mortice Kern Systems Inc MKS More information about MKS can be found on the Web under the URL http www mks com This product was put out as a product preview option in December 1996
391. tp 4 rchasmU2 cg bin netdata Q57 5 LIBANETDATAW Ww LIB NOMACROS FILE selecibox mbi4 FORM2 You selected the value ACURA from the select box Figure 70 Sample Select Box When the select button Submit it is activated by the user it calls the macro section HTML FORM2 and returns this display to the browser 4 8 Additional Tips The following list contains distinguishing features of the OS 400 implementation of Net Data and some helpful hints e Web macros can be stored in any file system You can copy Web macros to and from the QSYS LIB file system to another file system by using the Copy To Stream File CPYTOSTMF command and Copy From Stream File CPYFRMSTMF command 154 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Tip You can use the Copy To Stream File CPYTOSTMF command to copy your macros into the IFS The IFS gives you the best performance when serving your macro Net Data expects the macros in the Integrated File System to be in ASCII format If you have the AS 400 system create the file during the copy you need to use the conversion table QASCII TBL in library QSYS LIB as shown in the following example By using the QOpenSys directory you can use long file names as shown in this example by using the html extension CPYTOSTMF FROMMBR qsys lib netdatawww lib ndmacros file tim erend mbr TOSTMF qopensys timerend html CVTDTA TBL TBL qsys lib qascii tbl Figure
392. training of staff who use functionally similar displays Workstation Gateway does not require HTTP server unless serving graphics whereas Webulator 400 has to run on top of Webserver 400 Hardware can be either green screens or Web browsers Disadvantages Useability Performance versus CGl bin and Net Data Security of data being transmitted Synchronization of client session page with the browser display 5 13 Future Developments This section describes how to better follow the enhancements for the Workstation Gateway and Webulator 400 in the future 5 13 1 Workstation Gateway Since the Workstation Gateway server is not really an HTTP server many of the foreseeable AS 400 developments will not impact the Workstation Gateway Secure transactions using Workstation Gateway will not be available at the same time as secure HTTP The best place to follow Workstation Gateway news is at the official Web site http ww as400 ibm com ncc webconn htmlgate htm 5 13 2 Webulator 400 To keep abreast of developments of the Webulator 400 product it is recommended that you visit the Web site for the latest news http ww inetmi com products webulate webulate sht 5 14 Conclusions To summarize using a 5250 HTML gateway can give you the following benefits Web access to thousands of existing AS 400 applications without re coding Existing displays can be modified to include graphics text and links using the new DDS keyword
393. ts Although this is acceptable it minimizes the degree of separation between program logic and screen presentation The second function declaration today also refers to a REXX program However the entire REXX program one entire line in this case is contained in the function declaration itself An external program is not needed Inline programs are allowed for REXX functions because it is an interpreted language that can be parsed and executed dynamically Inline programs have the advantage of simplicity by not requiring a separate program file to manage The first REXX function could also just as well have been handled inline A function must be defined before it is called Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet 4 2 3 HTML INPUT Section 3 LL FKK k kk k k kk k k kk kk kk k k HTML Section Input FEE E k Ae k Ae k de k KK KARE e e Ae Ae K Ae DG HTML INPUT lt Identifies the name of this HTML section lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt page title lt title gt lt Note the variable substitution from the define section lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Input Form lt h1 gt lt hr gt Today is today This line contains a call to the REXX function today Type some data to pass to a REXX program lt FORM METHOD post ACTION output gt lt When this form is submitted the output HTML section is called lt INPUT NAME input_data lt input_data is now an implicitly defin
394. ts PTFs that impact Net Data Note that the PTFs may have been superseded by other PTFs V3R7MO V3R2M0 HTTP Server SF37633 N A C C Runtime SF35079 N A Database SF35074 SF38554 EH Database ACL SF38031 SF38030 qj REXX SF34680 SF34679 NLS N A MF14090 A Other N A N A Note 1 Must be loaded for Net Data to function properly 2 Must be loaded to enable DBCS support Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation Web browsers can directly access many Internet Information Services but the presentation of some complex data formats and commercial applications often need some help For instance application programs written using CGl bin are needed in addition to the basic Web server to read relational databases dynamically build Web pages containing the database records and transmit them to the Web browser We have seen the use of such implementations for the AS 400 system using CGl bin and Net Data in the previous two chapters HTML gateways allow Web clients to access your database middleware or applications through the Web server without you having to make any changes to the existing applications or even to write any additional code Most Web servers today require that you write scripts or programs to create interactive forms and applications for the Internet For most software providers this can mean learning new tools and procedures if they want to this enhanced
395. tween the client and server with the client Java applet doing more than just providing a pretty window presentation lt can dynamically receive information from server files and programs at the user s request 2 7 3 Net Data Macros Net Data provides a convenient mechanism for creating dynamic Web pages without complex programming A user creates a dynamic HTML script called a macro that is interpreted by the Net Data macro processor The macro processor is implemented as a CGI program or a persistent CGI program on other platforms it is also implemented as a server API program The macro contains HTML statements as well as macro directives that represent substitution variables SQL calls or program calls Macros can be used to build complex forms and process information from those forms They can also be used to generate Java applet calls Java script and Visual basic script statements 2 7 4 The Internet Client Server Programming Model The second prominent Internet programming model is the Internet client server model This model is not that different from the traditional client server model that allows program logic to be distributed between a client and a server communicating over some agreed to protocol The Internet client server model is different only in that Internet intranet protocols are used that is something that runs over TCP IP and the programming languages and associated tools are platform independent for example Java
396. u Company ad Shippin Denaren Internal Sales amp Marketing A Network Department Fa ale sl Sle olo 32 Accounts Department X Si z Department R PD Z AS 400 RIE o E HG po AS 400 5250 HTML Gateway 85999Y J8UI BU Web Browser Figure 76 A Typical Company Showing the HTML Gateway Link to the Internet 5 1 What is an HTML Gateway 170 An HTML gateway provides automatic translation between 5250 data streams and HTML The 5250 data stream that is normally sent to end users displays is intercepted The display layout is evaluated including variable data fields and static text By performing efficient translation between 5250 data and HTML the user interface terminal to your AS 400 application becomes platform independent In addition the application can be made globally accessible with a more visually appealing user interface It means that your AS 400 application can have a much improved user interface using the Web browser as an alternative to the 5250 interface No AS 400 specific software is needed on the users end system Currently two HTML gateways exist for the AS 400 system one provided by IBM and the other by I NET IBM s product is called Workstation Gateway and is provided as part of Internet Connection for AS 400 which is provided at no cost Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet with versions V3R2 and V3R7 of OS 400 I NET s product is called
397. uages Rexx and Java NetRexx blends the easy to learn syntax of Rexx with the robustness and portability of the Java environment The result is a language that is tuned for both scripting and application development and is therefore truly general purpose The initial implementation of the language is a compiler that first translates the NetRexx source code into Java source code a Java compiler is used to generate the Java byte codes class files for execution NetRexx classes and Java classes are entirely equivalent NetRexx can use any Java class and vice versa Initial measurements using the current implementation suggest that the Java source for a typical class has approximately 35 more lexical tokens and requires 20 more keystrokes than the equivalent in NetRexx The NetRexx compiler NetRexxC is written in NetRexx and should run on any Java platform that supports the Java toolkit and compiler javac By default NetRexxC automatically calls the javac compiler to create class files but you can use other Java compilers if you want the generated Java source is accessible For samples and examples of using Java classes from NetRexx and for more formal details of the language please see the other NetRexx documents at http www2 hursley ibm com netrexx You can find the NetRexx packages to download there also 2 14 5 Using Perl to Create Java Applets IBM and Mortice Kern Systems MKS have released a beta of version 5 003 of
398. uages it is not available for ILE C 400 The way to enable OPM compatibility mode for an ILE program is to use the CRTBNDRPG or CRTBNDCL command and specify DFTACTGRP YES Use this command if you want to migrate all or part of your application from RPG III to RPG IV but you do not want to take advantage of ILE bound calls service programs or activation groups at this time If you enable compatibility mode specify DFTACTGRP YES on the CRTBNDxxx command the following ILE facilities are not available to you Bound calls EXPORT IMPORT keywords and specifications Service programs Use of named or NEW activation group Pri Ni 2 12 4 Activation Groups All OPM programs run in the same activation group the system provided default activation group Within ILE activation groups are used to logically partition applications that are used concurrently within the same 05 400 job Activation groups exist for the life of the job that created them Once the job is terminated all activation groups associated with that job are deleted Creation of a new ILE program or service program always involves the specification of the activation group in which the program runs Thus resources such as the order entry OE and accounts receivable applications are separated such that there is no conflict over files common to both applications commitment control scoping and variables used within programs common to both applications Chapter 2 I
399. und in Section 4 2 Writing Net Data Macro Files on page 114 To find out more information about the Net Data macro language see the online Net Data Reference Guide at http www software ibm com data net data docs Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 113 4 1 5 Net Data and Internet Security The following section is a general description of Net Data and security To use these functions with the AS 400 system you need IBM s V4R1 secure server Net Commerce or I NET s Commerce server Net Data works with the DB2 database the Web server and the firewall products to provide secure data access over the Internet When used with one or more of these other products the types of security provided are as follows e Authentication Net Data can take advantage of two types of authentication user login and password one provided by the Web server and the other by DB2 They are as follows Web servers can typically be configured to protect certain directories on the server When a URL accesses a file in that directory login and password pop up windows appears on the end user s Web browser to request for authentication DB2 has a login password authentication mechanism for database access This mechanism can be used to restrict access to tables and columns by certain users e Encryption Net Data when used with a secure Web server that has support for Secure Sockets Layer SSL or Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol SHTTP
400. until the Web macro is found If the Web macro is not found Net Data assumes that IWWW macro SQLM references the Web macro The path statements for the MACRO_PATH configuration statement can be integrated file system directories IFS and QSYS LIB directories For example if macros are in the IFS directory WWW MACRO and in the QSYS LIB directory of QSYS LIB WWW LIB MACRO FILE the MACRO_PATH statement looks similar to this MACRO_PATH WWW MACRO QSYS LIB WWW LIB MACRO FILE Chapter 4 Net Data Implementation 163 164 The format of the EXEC_PATH statement is EXEC_PATH pathname pathname The EXEC_PATH statement identifies one or more directories to search in the order in which they are specified to find an external program invoked using the EXEC statement If the program is found the external program name is appended to the path specification resulting in a qualified file name which is passed to the language environment for execution For example if programs are stored in a library called WWWPGMS the EXEC_PATH statement looks similar to this EXEC_PATH QSYS LIB WWWPGMS LIB The format of the INCLUDE PATH statement is INCLUDE PATH pathname pathname The INCLUDE PATH identifies one or more directories that are searched in the order in which they are specified to find a file specified on the INCLUDE statement in a Net Data macro When found the include file name is appended to the path specification to produc
401. up By default Webulator 400 generates preformatted text display data which ensures that output fields line up properly Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Unfortunately column data does not line up if there is either an input field or a submit button on the same line This happens because the width of input fields and buttons are not the same as the width of an output field If the columns are not lining up because of a Submit button that Webulator 400 created you may be able to modify your keyword parsing configuration to prevent Webulator 400 from creating the Submit button Note You can have Webulator 400 generate HTML tables instead of preformatted text Tables guarantee that columns line up by inserting extra space between fields Please see Section 5 7 2 1 HTML Preformatted Text on page 207 and Section 5 7 2 2 HTML Tables on page 207 for more information Please note that you must have a browser capable of displaying tables for the display to appear No input fields have focus Webulator 400 can generate a JavaScript routine that automatically positions the cursor in the correct field Please see the JavaScript example on page 210 for more information Note You must have a JavaScript capable browser for the cursor to be positioned correctly If you do not have Send JavaScript enabled or your browser does not support JavaScript you are dependent on the browser to select an input field Some browsers autom
402. ure The secure server is enabled when 5769 NC1 or 5769 NCE is installed Internet Connection Secure Server provides HTTP secure HTTPS transactions with the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol SSL is a security protocol that was developed by NetScape Communications Corporation along with RSA Data Security Inc This protocol ensures that data transferred between a client and a server remains private It also allows the client to authenticate the identity of the server Once your server has a digital certificate SSL enabled browsers such as the NetScape Navigator can communicate securely with a server using SSL With SSL a security enabled Web site can easily be established on the Internet or on a corporate TCP IP network SSL uses a security handshake to secure the TCP IP connection between the client and the server During the handshake the client and server agree on the security keys that they will use for the session and the client authenticates the server After that SSL is used to encrypt and decrypt the information in both the https request and the server response including e The URL the client is requesting e The contents of any form being submitted e Access authorization information such as user names and passwords e All data sent between the client and the server Chapter 7 AS 400 Internet Technology Preview 227 Internet Connection Secure Server Internet Connection Secure Server for AS 400 provides https support e
403. uss their experiences with these products through e mail All messages sent to the mailing list are automatically forwarded to the e mail addresses of the subscribers to the list The sign up page can be found at the following URL http www inetmi com cgi bin listreg 5 11 3 Additional Publications on the Web URLs http as400 rochester ibm com The AS 400 Home Page a useful starting point http as400bks rochester ibm com Contains the AS 400 Softcopy Library CD ROMs online http www developer ibm com The IBM Solution Developer Support Home Page http www as400 ibm com nstation infopage htm IBM Network Station AS 400 Information http www ncsa uiuc edu General Internet WWW HTMLPrimerAll html A Beginner s Guide to HTML http www netscape com comprod mirror client_download html Download Site For Netscape Navigator Products http www microsoft com ie download Download Site for Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 0 http www ncsa uiuc edu demoweb url primer html A Beginner s Guide to URLs Chapter 5 HTML Gateway Implementation 217 5 12 HTML Gateway versus Other Methods Advantages Until recently AS 400 software developers often had to learn new languages tools and procedures in order to support the Web An HTML gateway allows existing AS 400 applications whatever the language to be run over the Web with no code changes or conversion programs DDS HTML keyword added allowing some display enhancements No re
404. uthentication If set Webulator 400 allows sign on display fields to be overridden by URL options e IgnoreSignonOverride This is only applicable if the method is set to User or UseAuthentication If set Webulator 400 does not allow sign on display fields to be overridden by URL options Webulator User Entry Specifies a user name and password that is used for automatic sign on by Webulator 400 e Name This is the AS 400 user profile that users are signed on as Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet e Password This is the AS 400 password that is entered for users Because this is not encrypted you should protect this configuration file with OS 400 authority Only the user who changes the file and the user who starts the server needs authority to the file The server user profile should not have authority to this file Note Multiple entries may exist in the Webulator 400 user file 5 6 3 Using Webulator 400 This section describes how to use the Webulator 400 from I NET 5 6 3 1 URL Syntax You can specify options on the query string of the URL that initializes a Webulator 400 session to change the behavior of that interactive Webulator 400 session The query string is specified on the initial URL after the complete Webulator 400 path has been specified It starts with a followed immediately by the list of query string value pairs separated by an amp Assuming that your Webulator 400 session URL is www xyz
405. value lt Title gt 05 pic x 24 value Thank you for your input 05 pic x 8 value lt Title gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 7 value lt HEAD gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 6 value lt Body gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 4 value lt hr gt 05 pic x value x 15 Appendix A ILE RPG and ILE COBOL Sample CGI Programs 257 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk This group contains a Standard trailer needed for HTML s This is used as output to the user kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k 01 WS STANDARD TRAILER 05 pic x 7 value lt Body gt 05 pic x value x15 05 pic x 7 value lt html gt 05 pic x value x 15 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk This group contains the user output data It should change from program to program k kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k 01 ws output info 05 pic x 6 value Name 05 name like name of cust buff 05 pic x 4 value lt br gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 7 value addri 05 addrl like addrl of cust buff 05 pic x 4 value lt br gt 05 pic x value x 15 05 pic x 7 value addr2 05 addr2 like addr2 of cust buff 05 pic x 4 value lt br gt 05
406. vestigating alternatives to the Java language for programming the Java environment The most advanced of these is NetRexx an experimental dialect of REXX that can be as efficient as languages such as Java while preserving the low threshold to learning and the ease of use of REXX and Object REXX It is anticipated that the technology developed during the research of NetRexx can be applied to some future version of Object REXX Object REXX can also play its role in network centric computing it is well positioned to be used for developing so called intelligent agents Intelligent agents are programs that make decisions filter information or obtain knowledge for their owners based on information ranging from a simple user profile to Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 49 complex systematized rules and directives Agents are especially suited for things such as stock brokering shopping in electronic marketplaces and other tasks that require rummaging around networked environments NetRexx is a new human oriented programming language designed as an effective and simple alternative to the Java language With NetRexx you can create programs and applets for the Java environment faster and more easily than by programming in Java Using Java classes is especially easy in NetRexx as the different types of numbers and strings that Java expects are handled automatically by the language Inspired by two different programming lang
407. vestiges of csh Pascal and even BASIC PLUS Expression syntax corresponds quite closely to C expression syntax Unlike most UNIX utilities PERL does not arbitrarily limit the size of your data if you have the memory PERL can slurp in your entire file as a single string Recursion is of unlimited depth And the hash tables used by associative arrays grow as necessary to prevent degraded performance PERL uses sophisticated pattern matching techniques to scan large amounts of data quickly Although optimized for scanning text PERL can also deal with binary data and can make dbm files look the same as associative arrays where dbm is available Setuid PERL scripts are safer than C programs through a data flow tracing mechanism that prevents many stupid security holes If you have a problem that ordinarily uses sed or awk or sh but it exceeds their capabilities or must run a little faster and you do not want to write the silly thing in C PERL may be for you There are also translators to turn your sed and awk scripts into PERL scripts The PERL beta run time and source code is distributed as AS 400 save files and should be available for downloading at ftp ftp cs colorado edu pub per1 CPAN ports as400 The public domain software is now available for downloading that allows you to run PERL scripts on the AS 400 system The PERL distribution for the AS 400 system is packaged as three SAVF format files The PERL source libraries and
408. when it becomes available to each customer according to the normal IBM PTF distribution process The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and or other countries Copyright IBM Corp 1997 275 AnyNet Application System 400 APPN AS 400 C 400 Client Access 400 COBOL 400 DB2 400 IBM Integrated Language Environment 05 400 RPG 400 RS 6000 SQL 400 VisualAge WebConnection WebExplorer The following terms are trademarks of other companies C bus is a trademark of Corollary Inc Java and HotJava are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Incorporated Microsoft Windows Windows NT and the Windows 95 logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company and is used by IBM Corporation under license Pentium MMX ProShare LANDesk and ActionMedia are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U S and other countries UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Other company product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others 276 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Appendix D Related Publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this redbook D 1
409. wser It was originally developed by Netscape as a way to extend the functionality of HTML It is supported by Netscape Navigator 2 0 or later and Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 0 Various other browsers either support it or will support it in the near future Browsers that do not support JavaScript should ignore the embedded JavaScript commands 6 2 2 Webulator 400 and JavaScript Webulator 400 can insert a small amount of JavaScript code into every HTML page that it generates You can enable this support by setting the Send JavaScript configuration value Webulator 400 uses JavaScript to add two important usability enhancements The first enhancement allows the browser to insert the cursor at the start of the correct input field on the display It does this by calling a function during the onLoad event This gives the user the ability to type into a field without first having to select it with the mouse It also indicates to the user the first input field that may contain an error if the row and column are properly set by the AS 400 application The second enhancement allows the browser to return the row and column position of the last input field that had focus It does this by calling a function during the various onFocus events This feature allows the user to have field level prompting without typing a question mark into the field 6 2 3 Why Disable JavaScript 6 3 There are a couple of reasons why you may want to disable the JavaScri
410. wser to maintain persistent connections to all of these machines is ridiculous Process start time often gates performance The price to pay for process isolation is to suffer the costs of process start time In a connectionless environment this becomes an even bigger problem as the process must get started for each request The AS 400 HTTP model minimizes this penalty by providing a pool of pre started server jobs that minimize a majority of the start up costs Add to that the ability to exploit named activation groups that also eliminate program initialization costs and the AS 400 CGI model starts to look better than what is provided on other platforms They use short running transactions This is a consequence of the connectionless model The length of a transaction is limited to a single URL request since that is the length of a process This problem brings about the requirement for the persistent CGI model described later The logic is almost entirely on the server The CGI model is basically a distributed presentation model where the logic is on the server and the client is responsible for window presentation The advantage of having the logic on the server is apparent when the number of window interactions is far smaller than the number of data accesses or the number of calculations performed by the server Although the CGI model is simple and universal it has some definite shortcomings This is primarily due to its connectionless nature
411. ww software ibm com ad visualage_ c or the IBM Internet Connection Family Web site at http www ibm com Internet or the IBM AS 400 Internet Workshop Web site at http www as400 ibm com workshop webbuild htm or the IBM Java Web site at http ncc hursley ibm com javainfo 54 Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet For more information on Lotus products visit the Lotus site at http www lotus com Background on the Internet The Internet Complete Reference Second Edition by Harley Hahn Spinning The Web by Ford Demographics amp Statistics http www commerce net information surveys TCP IP Stuff Networking Personal Computers with TCP IP by Craig Hunt 0 Reilly amp Associates Inc A Beginner s Guide to HTML http www ncsa uiuc edu demoweb html primer html A few good books on HTML stuff Teach Yourself Web Publishing with HTML in 14 Days by Laura Lemay HTML for Dummies by Tittel amp James HTML Publishing on the Internet for Windows by Heslop amp Budnick HTML Quick Reference http kuhttp cc ukans edu lynx_help HTML_quick html AS 400 Reference Manuals AS 400 Security Tips and Techniques GC41 0615 AS 400 TCP IP Configuration and Reference Manual SC41 3420 Cool Title About the AS 400 and Internet SG24 0372 AS 400 Security Reference SC41 3302 Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 55 2 17 Road Map for Internet Application Design No Programmers and n
412. y because the specified entry did not exist A Web registry built in function could not use the specified registry because it could not be found Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet Return Code 3006 Message Text function function_name Path in registry registry name does not exist Error Condition A Web registry built in function could not create the specified registry because a path in the registry name did not exist 3007 function function_name You are not authorized to perform the requested registry operation A Web registry built in function could not complete the specified operation because the requestor did not have the proper authority to the specified registry 3008 4000 4001 function function_name Registry registry_name failed to create function function_name Parameter parm_name is not a whole number or is too large function function_name Parameter parm_name is not a valid number A Web registry built in function could not create the specified registry for unknown reasons One of these conditions exists An input parameter contained a value that was not a whole number e An input parameter contained a value that was greater than the supported maximum of 999 999 999 e An output cannot be expressed as a whole number One of these conditions exists e An input parameter contained a value that was not a val
413. y the activation group in which your program runs using the ACTGRP keyword You can choose one of the following options 1 NAMED activation group An activation group with a name you specified at the time of creating ILE programs 2 NEW activation group Every time the program is dynamically called a new activation group is created As soon as the program returns control to its caller the NEW activation group is deleted Frequent use of this choice provides the worst performance within your application If You Want ANSI Semantics Activation group of anything other than NEW may result in the program s run time behavior not following ANSI C semantics 3 CALLER activation group The program is run in the activation group of its calling program ILE Program Activation When a dynamic call to an ILE program is issued within a job the system performs the following tasks known as program activation 1 Identify what activation group the PGM should run in If the activation group is NAMED and does not exist create it If the activation group is NEW create a new activation group in which to run the PGM this is expensive in terms of CPU If the PGM has not been called in this activation group before always the case with NEW activation groups initialize all static storage for all associated modules whether they are bound by copy or bound by reference 2 Activate all service programs that have b
414. y SF37791 Check the Web site listed in Section 5 11 1 1 Support Pages on the Internet on page 216 for the latest PTF information Do not confuse the Workstation Gateway with the HTTP Web server The HTTP Web server allows the AS 400 system to act as a Web server on the Internet The Workstation Gateway converts your 5250 data stream to HTML Both servers can be started and function independently from each other The Workstation Gateway is a TCP IP application that services requests from HTTP clients After the initial request is received from a client a free port is arbitrarily allocated to the client and that client is considered active All future connections requests for that client occur over the same port number The client remains active until the session is signed off or an inactivity timeout limit is reached Note The Workstation Gateway maintains the illusion that the browser is logically or permanently connected to the AS 400 system even though every transaction between the browser and the AS 400 server is a once only connection The Workstation Gateway server maintains the virtual terminal API connection indefinitely or until the browser logs off or the inactivity timeout value is exceeded The Workstation Gateway server is started through the STRTCPSVR SERVER WSG command and ended with the ENDTCPSVR SERVER WSG command Note Be sure to check the Workstation Gateway attribute to see if the Displ
415. y To Stream File CPYTOSTMF command 46 copying from stream file 46 to stream file 46 counter 128 CPYFRMSTMF Copy From Stream File command 46 CPYTOSTMF 155 CPYTOSTMF Copy To Stream File command 46 Create Service Program CRTSRVPGM command 39 creating service program 39 CRTSRVPGM Create Service Program command 39 D data source 113 DATABASE 142 144 database services 10 DB_CASE 144 DB2WWW 246 DDS keyword HTML 23 DDS specification 23 debug HTTP server 166 debugger 12 default report 153 define section 115 117 definition list description tag 29 definition list item tag 27 definition list tag 27 different Web models 6 directory list tag 27 distributed web model applet 8 Java 8 lively animation 8 parameter checking 8 sound 8 DTW_DEFAULT_REPORT 135 DTW_HTML_TABLE 135 DTW_REXX 139 DTW_SYSTEM 144 DTW_TABLE 144 dynamic document 10 editor 12 emphasis tag 27 enterprise distributed web model 9 environment variable 152 error message net data 156 EXEC_PATH 163 F file size 245 file system 244 flat file interface function 131 forms 112 from stream file copying 46 function calling 125 flat file interface 131 general 129 math 130 REXX 118 string manipulation 130 table manipulation 130 Web registry 131 word manipulation 130 function call 121 function definition 118 124 function keys 23 function section 115 G general function 129 getting net data up 159 global set 125 H head t
416. y operating system unique interfaces or naming semantics portability is reduced e Since they run as a child process of the HTTP server they can benefit from the services provided by the server Communication over the HTTP protocol Security Firewall transparency HTTP is usually allowed to pass through firewalls through socks or application gateways Chapter 2 Internet Application Design Considerations 19 20 Resource mapping and name indirection provided by HTTP server directives program can be moved without affecting client URLs Error logging and audit logging provided by HTTP server Course grained navigation provided by HTML documents They provide process isolation Since each CGI program runs in its own child process it has the security and integrity advantages that separate processes offer They run in a connectionless environment The HTTP server starts the CGI program it does its thing and terminates The output is sent to the browser and the connection is broken Subsequent requests for that same program result in a new connection and a new instance No state information is maintained unless the CGI program had stored previous state information in fields in the requesting HTML form or parameters in the requesting URL This characteristic comes about as a consequence of the Web s hypertext model that allows users to hop around from machine to machine across the world at will Forcing the bro
417. ymous profile you can still use the OUTQ parameter of that user profile to direct all of the printouts to a single queue This queue in turn can be a remote output queue that uses TCP IP to route the print data back to any printer in the network most likely the printer sitting right next to the user s desk Many IBM manuals and redbooks have instructions on how to configure such remote output queues One in particular that includes sample configurations is Printer Device Programming SC41 3713 01 13 Log all accesses made by the Workstation Gateway this is a configuration item All accesses to the Workstation Gateway are recorded in physical file QATMTLOG in library QUSRSYS Further information can be found in TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 3420 04 5 6 I NET s Webulator 400 Webulator 400 is the 5250 HTML gateway from I NET and is used in conjunction with either Web Server 400 or Commerce Server 400 You can use your current applications or even develop new Web applications using such tools as RPG COBOL DDS ILE C and so on More information about I NET and their AS 400 Web serving products can be found at the following URL http www inetmi com 5 6 1 Getting Started 196 Full installation and configuration details of the Webulator 400 product can be read in the Webulator 400 User Guide which can be found at the following URL http ww inetmi com pubs webulate usrguide htm Or you can read the docu
418. you reference the variables and before the HTML block where they are to be used 2 In the HTML block where the variables are referenced use double dollar signs instead of a single dollar sign to reference the variables for example name instead of name SHTML INPUT lt FORM gt lt P gt Select fields to view lt SELECT NAME Field gt lt OPTION VALUE name gt Name lt OPTION VALUE addr gt Address lt FORM gt DEFINE name customer name addr customer address FUNCTION DTW SQL mySelect SELECT Field FROM customer o When the HTML form is displayed on a Web browser name and addr are replaced with name and addr respectively so the actual table and column names never appear on the HTML form and there is no way to tell that the true Unleashing AS 400 Applications on the Internet variable names are hidden When the customer submits the form the HTML REPORT block is called When the mySelect statement calls the FUNCTION block Field is substituted in the SQL statement with customer name or customer addr depending on what the user selected in the SQL query 4 7 6 Net Data Predefined Variables Predefined variables are supplied by Net Data with a value set by Net Data You cannot change predefined variables A predefined variable does not have to be explicitly defined before being referenced in a Net Data web macro The followin

- IBM Redbooks

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents